Home

PowerLogic ION Enterprise 6.0 User Guide

Contents

1. Errors or messages from selected task step DTSRun Loading DTSRun Executing DTSRun OnStart Step_InitializePackage DTSRun OnFinish Step_InitializePackage DTSRun OnStart Step_SetlONDBProperties DTSRun OnFinish Step_SetlONDBProperties DTSRun OnStart Step_RemoveBackups xl I Show only failed tasks Refresh Clear All Close The run date status success or failed and duration are available for all scheduled tasks Select a task from the list to view further information in the Errors or messages from selected task step text field Select Show only failed tasks to filter out completed tasks from the list Click Clear All to clear the job history for the selected scheduled task Right click Scheduled Jobs or ION_Data and select Archive to display the Scheduled archive dialog box A NOTE When ION Enterprise is first installed Scheduled Archive is disabled by default You must open the Scheduled archive dialog box and select the Schedule Enabled check box to enable it 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Scheduled Archive RE Scheduled archive x Database ION_Data 7 Archive location fsal Data Types Data Records Waveforms Events Archive Vv Vv Vv Trim after archive Vv Vv Vv Amount of Live Data Minimum amount of data to keep in the live database months 12 amp Archive Interval Archive in
2. Enabled Name N Type Address Status Protocol Description z Enap 7 ION 4 Sort Ascending O Site Mfg_Gateway1 Z Sort Descending W mfg Loadi ION 7300 10 168 69 74 7802 105 Site Available ION Clear Sorting v Mfg Load2 ION 7330 10 168 69 74 7802 149 Site Available ION O Site lt Ethernet Server M2003 gt Group By This Column HQ Electricity ION 8800 10 168 69 74 7700 Device Connected ION Group By Box Best Fit Clear Filter Right click 7 Fiter Editor menu options Best Fit all columns M Timacimelintar ale Select Columns Column Selector Some tables allow you to select which columns to include in the table 1 In Management Console hover over the column selector tab on the right side of the display window In other interfaces click the Select Columns link 2 Select the boxes for the columns you want to include in the table Clear the boxes for the columns you do not want to include in the table Adjust Column Width To change the width of a column point the mouse to the right edge of the column header When the resize handle double arrow pointer appears click and drag to adjust the width To adjust the width for best fit point to the right edge of the column header then double click when the resize handle appears Best Fit To adjust a column width to the best fit with the least amount of white space For one column right click a column header and select Be
3. 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Page 269 Scheduled Maintenance PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Schedule You can select any day of the week for your scheduled archive the default is Saturday The archive is performed at the specified time on the first occurrence of that day in the month For example if you configure the scheduled archive to occur monthly on Sunday at 5 30 00 AM then Database Manager archives the ION_Data database at 5 30 AM on the first Sunday of every month Scheduled Maintenance Scheduled Trim Page 270 The schedule for the maintenance tasks is pre configured and cannot be changed To view the history for a maintenance task right click the database select Job History gt Maintenance See Viewing History for a Scheduled Task on page 268 for more information There are a number of tasks that are performed on the database when a maintenance job is executed The following is an ordered breakdown of a scheduled maintenance 1 Check database fragmentation and defragment if the fragmentation level is more than 10 2 Update statistics for all the tables in the database Check and track the database size 4 Send an email alert if any maintenance step fails The maintenance schedule for each database is as follows ION_Data maintenance job occurs daily at 2 00 AM ION_SystemLog maintenance job occurs daily at 7 05 AM ION_Network maintenance job occurs daily at 7 3
4. If the object is a module it can be dragged and dropped into another manager ALT dragging of a similar class an object If the object is a register it can be dragged and dropped into another module of a similar class If a module is selected then the module is copied CTREG If a register is selected then the register is copied If a manager is selected and a module has been copied then the module is CTRL V pasted If a module is selected and one or more registers have been copied then the registers are pasted CTRL B If a module is selected and one or more registers have been copied then the registers are clone pasted CTRL Z If a module is selected and one or more registers have been copied then a prompt comes up asking how many copies to paste 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Page 297 Modbus Register Information Pane PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Modbus Register Information Pane Page 298 Keystrokes Action Up Arrow Scrolls up through the list of registers Down Arrow Scrolls down through the list of registers Mouse Right Click Brings up the pop up edit menu Enter Space Bar Opens the quick edit window for the selected register or CTRL X A new register is created in the module of the currently selected register and the Insert or F3 er register properties window is displayed F4 A new register is cr
5. 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Accessing the ION Database with 3rd Party Applications Accessing the ION Database with 3rd Party Applications 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved The following example uses Microsoft Excel 2007 to retrieve data from the ION_Data database Z NOTE The database uses Universal Coordinated Time UTC time When you import data into Excel the meter s Clock module s Time Zone Offset register is applied 1 To create a database query in Excel click Data gt From Other Sources gt From Microsoft Query 2 To create anew data source select lt New Data Source gt from the list and click OK 3 Type the name you want to give the data source Once you type a name the list of drivers for the database type becomes available Select lt SQL Server gt from the list Click Connect 4 Choose your server from the list Provide your LoginID and Password and click OK Select a default table for your data source optional Click OK to continue 5 Select the source name you created and click OK 6 After you have selected the data you want to view the Query Wizard appears Use this to filter and sort the data 7 Follow the steps in the Query Wizard to add data to the Spreadsheet Page 275 Accessing the ION Database with 3rd Party Applications PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Page 276 2009 Schneider Electric
6. Duplicate and Configure area 1 of 1 Devices Displayed Columns with captions in green can be modified in the grid below Hide Column Selection Drag a column header here to group by that column T T T T T F Name Type TCP IP Address TCP IP Port Enabled Z TOPAP Addess Hide Show Columns area FLI_PNLIA CCTOL N 127 0 0 1 7700 Table Editing area A NOTE When table rows are filtered in the Duplicate and Configure tool changes done using the configuration editors on the top pane of the window affect only the devices thot are visible in the Table Editing area If you want to apply the changes to all devices clear the filter first before making the changes The Duplicate and Configure Area The Duplicate and Configure area has different sections depending on the type of device you are duplicating Ethernet devices have the following sections Configure Names Use this section to create the duplicates Configure TCP IP Addresses Use this section to create a sequence of IP addresses to assign to the duplicates after they have been created 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Page 43 The Duplicate and Configure Interface Page 44 PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Configure TCP IP Ports The port number used in the original device is automatically assigned to all the duplicates If required use this section to select a different port number for all the displaye
7. Timestamped Display Displays the value and the date and time the value was measured by the device Useful for min max values Timestamp Only Same as time stamped but does not display a value Can be used as a clock PC Timestamped Display Displays the value and the date and time the value was received by Vista Setting Units and Resolution Use the Units box to type the unit name for the measured value e g Volts or Amps This name is displayed on the numeric object In certain cases the value is scaled For example if the unit name begins with K M or G e g kV or MVolts the displayed value is adjusted accordingly However if the unit contains certain letters i e KW or kVA the scaling factor is reduced by 1 000 for example if the unit begins with K the value is not scaled and Mis scaled by 1 000 The reason for this is that most devices provide these values already scaled Use the Resolution box to specify the number of decimal places to be displayed for anumeric object The default value is 1 but this can be increased to take advantage of any extra resolution available from the data source A NOTE Specifying higher resolution does not result in higher accuracy than the specified accuracy of the device Page 137 Display Options Page 138 PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Setting the Font Options Use the Ticks Labels Font section to define font options such as st
8. 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Page 253 Setting Global Parameters PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Page 254 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Chapter 8 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Database Manager Database Manager helps you maintain the information contained in your databases through periodic backups and archives In This Section Database Manager Interface on page 256 Common Database Management Procedures on page 258 Manual Tasks on page 260 Scheduled Jobs on page 267 Optimizing Database Query Time on page 273 Log Inserter on page 274 Accessing the ION Database with 3rd Party Applications on page 275 Page 255 Database Manager Interface PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Database Manager Interface Use Database Manager to manually perform maintenance operations on the ION Enterprise databases or to configure scheduled tasks to perform these operations To access Database Manager Start Management Console then click Tools gt Database Manager or Open the ION Enterprise Tools folder on the desktop and double click the Database Manager icon Expand the items in the navigation tree to display the Databases and Scheduled Jobs items for each instance File Help Right click an item in the tree for available actions ION Database Manager TECHPUBS VM
9. 600 cece cece eee 103 Acknowledging Alarms 0 60 PERERIN REKER E 105 Controlling System Functions 0 0 e ee ee eee eeeees 107 Plotting Logged Data 0 sooo eee aaa Ea DR es 108 Plotting Logged Data 65 ci5e25 ie eed GN ng SRN esa ck ale eee eee ds ened 108 The Log View Plotter Interface 0 cece eee e cece eee e eee 109 Viewing the Plot Display Tab 0 eens 112 Viewing the Harmonics Analysis Tab 0 06 e eee eee eens 115 Viewing the Phasor Diagram Tab 0 cece eee ees 116 Plotting Waveforms from Devices with High Sampling Rates 118 Adding Parameters to a Log View Plotter 2 2 0 c cece cece 119 Customizing the Log View Plotter Display 0 0 e cece 121 Overlaying Curves in the Log View Plotter 0 c cece eee eee 125 Creating and Customizing a User Diagram 0 ee eee eees 127 Editing a User Diagram 2 2 cee cece cece eee ee eeees 128 The Enable Undo Option crasas ehr ranan ERRA eens 128 Adding a Diagram Object to a User Diagram 0 000 rreren 128 Cutting Copying and Pasting a Diagram Object 6 eee 129 Copying a Group of Diagram Objects to a Framework 0 130 Adjusting Diagram Object Layout and Size 0 cece eee 131 Customizing a Diagram Object 02 eee eee eee eee teens 133 Caption OpPHOns eenn RERE E aE EREE ERRAR tek tes wear one OEE Ay 134 TEXt QPHONS
10. Device Type Select the type of the device Unit ID Type the Unit ID of the device the range is 1 9999 for ION devices or 1 247 for Modbus RTU devices Site Select the direct site you previously set up Configure the other fields as you require Setting Up Devices for Ethernet Gateway Communications To set up devices for Ethernet gateway communications first add and configure an Ethernet gateway site Ethernet gateways that can be used include those that are simple Ethernet to Serial converters or any gateway or data concentrator that provides ModbusTCP communications Step 1 Adding an Ethernet Gateway Site Click the Sites icon Right click in the display window and select New gt Ethernet Gateway Site Fill in the Name TCP IP Address and TCP IP Port fields The TCP IP Port identifies which communications port is used to connect to the serial devices The port you use depends on the type of Ethernet gateway you want to set up i e use 7801 for an EtherGate gateway via COMI or use port 502 for a Modbus gateway Configure the other fields as you require Page 34 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Adding an Ethernet Device Step 2 Adding a Device to the Ethernet Gateway Site Click the Devices icon Right click in the display window and select New gt Serial Device on Ethernet Gateway Site Fill in these fields Group Type a name for the group or select
11. SETUPS EL1 Depth NAME EL1 Depth VALUE 50 EL1 Protection NAME EL1 Protection VALUE 128 EL1 Cutoff NAME EL1 Cutoff VALUE 5 OUTPUTS EL1 Event Log EL1 Event Log Use CTRL Insert to copy text Print Refresh 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Page 213 Creating a Shortcut to an ION Module PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide The Text View screen offers several ways to view sort and find information Inthe View dropdown list select one of two view modes Use Archive to display information useful for archiving the node s configuration Use Diagnostic to display diagnostic information on the selected module s Inthe Sort by dropdown list select the criteria by which you want to sort the data Archive View Diagnostic View Sorts by Default Default Module label Module Class Module Class Type of module Module Name Module Name Default label Displays offline modules first followed by online modules Module state Sorts alphabetically within each group Displays event driven modules first then inactive not Module Update updating modules followed by high speed one cycle Period updates modules and finally high accuracy one second updates modules Sorts alphabetically within each group Inthe Find text field type a text string and click Find to find that text string in the data To reset the text view after you have made a configuration ch
12. The Open Diagram for Meter Template option is used by default each time a network diagram is generated Each meter icon in the network diagram is set to open the default diagrams that match that meter s configuration Select Open User Diagram to open a user diagram when the object is clicked Type the full path and filename into the field provided or click Browse to locate the diagram you want Using this action you can choose a diagram object that displays a representative reading from an independent diagram and use it to open the other diagram when clicked Select Open File to open a file when the object is clicked Type the full path and filename into the field provided or click Browse to locate the file you want The file can be a third party program or some other document if a document is specified then the program associated with the file extension is launched and the specified document is loaded into the application Select Open Web Page to open a specified webpage in your default web browser when the object is clicked Type the complete address into the field provided 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Box Options A NOTE When you select any action other than None the Query Server tab is added to the top of the object configuration box You can use this tab to specify a source of logged data for the new user diagram or grouping window If you enter only the filenam
13. The current product key number number of devices in the system and maximum number of devices supported are listed in the System Info section 3 Type the new product key in the Product Key field Click OK The System Info section lists the updated support information from the newly activated product key If the new key supports additional features or options these are made available immediately without restarting Management Console Page 60 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Reporting Configuration Manager Reporting Configuration Manager Use the Reporting Configuration Manager option in the Tools menu to configure options for Web Reporter such as the database to report on and subscription delivery options 1 Open Management Console and select Tools gt Reporting Configuration Manager The Reporting Configuration dialog box appears 2 Select the Reports tab to configure general reporting options From the dropdown list in the Reports Database section select the database on which you want to run reports Only those databases compatible with Web Reporter are listed Use the slider in the Report Timeout section to set the time in seconds after which Web Reporter stops trying to complete a report generation task 3 Select the Subscriptions tab to configure settings related to report subscriptions SMTP Server Type the network server name from which the report sub
14. 2 Select Edit gt Plot Selected Data 3 Drag the Cursor and move it to the location of the fault 4 Click on the Phasor Diagram tab to view the Symmetrical Components in the Calculations window Plotting Waveforms from Devices with High Sampling Rates Waveforms from devices with high sampling rates can be quite large These large waveforms are split by ION Enterprise into a series of smaller waveforms when displayed in the data log To plot all the sections of the waveform in Vista you must select all the rows that relate to the waveform before you click the Plot button All the rows related to the one waveform have the same timestamp For example in the following image you would select rows 28 to 34 to plot the entire waveform timestamp timeOfFirstPoint cause_ion luse vd effect_ion effect_value v VE 27 07 07 2008 08 53 09 975 AM 07 07 2008 08 53 0 Transient c 1330 Alarm Position 185 Transient CSN 13710 28 07 07 2008 08 52 39 800 AM 07 07 2008 08 52 4 29 07 07 2008 08 52 39 800 AM 07 07 2008 08 52 4 30 07 07 2008 08 52 39 800 AM 07 07 2008 08 52 4 31 07 07 2008 08 52 39 800 AM 07 07 2008 08 52 4 32 07 07 2008 08 52 39 800 AM 07 07 2008 08 52 4 33 07 07 2008 08 52 39 800 AM 07 07 2008 08 52 3 34 07 07 2008 08 52 39 800 AM 07 07 2008 08 52 3 Sag Swell cn 115 ENS50160SagVcn Disturbance Start Up SEO TNT IANA AAA ANA aki ATATA AANA I ee ATA OMIM ON eae Reba ee Piette AAS fd ed Pa P
15. Installing a Report Definition or a Report Pack 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Report definitions can be developed by Schneider Electric or any other organization skilled at developing content for Microsoft Reporting Services Report packs can only be developed by Schneider Electric To create report definitions report developers use Microsoft Business Intelligence Studio which comes with SQL Server After a report definition is developed you can install it After a report definition is installed and access to it is granted users can begin creating and saving reports from that definition Report Definition Versus Report Pack For the purpose of installing report definitions and report packs a report definition is a single rdl file whereas a report pack includes all files for a complex report or series of reports Installing or Updating a Report Definition 1 Click File gt Install Report Definition The Install Report Definition dialog box appears 2 Click Browse to navigate to the location of the rdl file Select the file and click Open then click Install For a new report definition use File gt New to add it to the report selection pane For an existing report definition a confirmation message appears asking if you want to update all reports associated with the definition Click OK to continue Installing or Updating a Report Pack 1 To make a report pack available for upload copy it into the
16. To delete a template condition select the condition from the Template Condition table and click the Delete button in the Edit lt Iemplate gt section To delete a template select the template from the main table and click the Delete button in the top right corner of the tab To undo changes click Revert Adding an Event Watcher Page 64 To add an event watcher you need a template You can use one of the default templates or define your own see Creating a Template on page 63 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Adding an Event Watcher Event Watcher Manager Lx Event Watchers Templates Updated Name Template Description List of Event High Priority Event Manufacturing General High Priority Event 4 high priority event at the manufacturing Facility pme n a Watchers aa Setpoint Event Watcher Setpoint Event Event Watcher Q r Edit New Event Watcher Editing Area Name Devices Select Columns High Prionty Event Manufacturing A Site Y Template General High Priority E vent Selected Name Type Site Mfg_serial a Description 4 high priority event at the manufacturing Mfg Load34 ION 6200 MODBUS ii facility Mfg Load33 ION 6200 MODBUS Site Mfg_Gateway1 Site lt Ethernet Server M200 List of devices in the system lt I Select All includes any
17. Use Designer to configure hardware nodes e g ION meters or software nodes e g Virtual Processor or Log Inserter Default Node Diagrams in Designer When a meter is opened in Designer the default diagrams for the appropriate meter and default template are loaded automatically Opening a Node Diagram 1 Select File gt Open The Select Node dialog box appears 2 Select the node you want to open then click OK When you select anode from the list Designer communicates with the specified node and opens the applicable node diagram CAUTION Do not open a node diagram if the node is currently being configured from its front panel When Designer loads a node diagram it compares the diagram with the configuration of the node If there are any discrepancies between the diagram and the node Designer updates the diagram to match the node Ifa diagram depicts a module that does not exist on the node Designer deletes the module icon from the diagram If anode contains a module that is not depicted in the diagram Designer adds the module icon to the diagram Ifthe links between modules differ from node to diagram Designer adjusts the diagram to match the node Anode diagram typically does not differ from the node s true configuration unless the node s configuration was changed through other means for example with a remote display unit Saving a Node Diagram Saving a node diagram serves two purposes it
18. lj Drag a column header here to group by that column k Name Type TCP IP Address TCP IP Port Enabled gt FLI_PNLIA CCTO1 ION 8800 10 168 69 74 7700 Original device an t FL1_PN 7700 t FL1_PNL1A CCTOS 7700 FL1_PNL1A CCTO9 7700 Asterisks indicate pending changes 7700 FL1_puL that have not yet been saved 7700 FL1_PNL 7700 FL1_PNLIC CCTO4 7700 J Click Apply to save your changes and continue editing devices click OK to save your changes and return to Management Console or click Revert to undo unsaved changes Duplicated Devices in Management Console Drag a column header here to group by that column Enabled Name Type Address Site Pr Mfg PM Y Mfg Load10 PM800 Series 10 168 69 76 502 105 Gateway1 M x Mfg Loadi1 PM800 Series 10 168 69 76 502 106 Gateway Mc x Mfg Load12 PM800 Series 10 168 69 76 502 107 Gateway1 Mc x Mfg Load13 PM800 Series 10 168 69 76 502 108 Gateway Mc x Mfg Loadi5 PM800 Series 10 168 69 76 502 116 Gateway Mc x PM800 Series 10 168 69 76 502 110 Gateway1 Mc x Duplicated devices are always Gateway Me x disabled when they are added to Gateway1 M x Loadi Management Console Gateway Mc Xs Mfg Load2 Gateway1 Mc x MFg Load25 PM800 Series 10 168 69 76 502 115 Gateway1 Me Step 4 Configuring Duplicated Devices See the following section Configuring Multiple De
19. An observation sheet is generated for every observation period however it is hidden by default You can access specific observation sheets by unhiding the specific sheet for the generated report in Microsoft Excel Format gt Sheet gt Unhide gt observation sheet EN50160_Mains_Signal Use the EN50160_Mains_Signal template to create a report for signal line frequency statistics for a single meter for each observation period The EN50160_Mains_Signal template uses data from the EN50160 MSignal log IEC 61000 4 30 IEC 61000 4 30 are power quality standards that define measurement methods for 50 Hz and 60 Hz power quality instruments Three IEC 61000 4 30 templates are available in Reporter IEC61000 4 30_10Min Use this template to create the IEC 61000 4 30 report based on a 10 minute interval sampling period IEC61000 4 30_2Hr Use this template to create the IEC 61000 4 30 report based on a 2 hour interval sampling period IEC61000 4 30_3Sec Use this template to create the IEC 61000 4 30 report based on a 3 second interval sampling period i e 150 cycles for 50 Hz 180 cycles for 60 Hz Waveforms To generate a report from logs that contain voltage and current waveform data select lt no template gt and set the Log to Waveforms See Creating a Report Without a Template on page 335 for details i Waveform Rep Pijal Ed Waveform Report Read Only Meter1 Waveform Log Local Time 1998 Ju
20. File Database ION_Data he Query Timeout seconds 60 Maximum 99999999 Execute The SQL Editor task is included within Database Manager for a number of reasons The SQL Editor lets you export database information for troubleshooting purposes With the SQL Editor you can write custom queries that let you view whatever data you want The SQL Editor provides a method for implementing custom changes to the databases For example this allows you to execute a custom SQL script provided by Schneider Electric A NOTE Ensure that you select the appropriate database before you execute your SQL statement Use this task to remove data from a database If Show Archives is selected you can also perform a trim on archived databases Z N CAUTION Trimming data from the database is permanent It is recommended that you backup or archive data before trimming Page 265 Update Statistics Update Statistics PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide 1 Right click on Databases ION_Data or ION_SystemLog and select Trim The Trim Database dialog box appears 2 Select the database you want to trim from the Database to trim list 3 Inthe Trim Range section specify the date range of data you want to trim for the ION_Data database or set the maximum data age in days for the ION_SystemLog database 4 For the ION_Data database or an archive select the data types you want to trim Data Records
21. Using Reporter on Secondary Server or Client on page 337 o o o Troubleshooting on page 338 Introduction PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Introduction Reporter features a wizard that guides you through the report creation process This involves selecting a report template and database which then allows the wizard to display those sources in the ION Enterprise network that contain the type of data required to create the report When the report is generated Reporter retrieves data from the ION_Data database uses the report template to process the data then creates a finished report in Microsoft Excel format Report templates are preconfigured for the most common reporting needs The following report templates are supplied with ION Enterprise 5 6 Energy and Demand Load Profile Power Quality EN50160_General EN50160_Summary EN50160_Mains_Signal TEC61000 4 30_10Min TEC61000 4 30_2Hr TEC61000 4 30_3Sec o o Starting Reporter To start Reporter navigate to the ION Enterprise system bin folder and double click on RepGen exe GF Tip If you plan to use this program frequently create a shortcut to the exe file on your desktop Reporter opens with either Manage Reports or Generate Reports pre selected depending on whether or not any reports have already been created You cannot generate report
22. ihe brackets to your filter statement i estamp pz Waai v Use the AND OR NOT buttons to string filter statements together For example if you want to instruct the log viewer to display data for the past month excluding today you could use the following procedure 1 In the first box select timestamp 2 Inthe second box select BETWEEN 3 In the third box select last_month_to_date 4 In the fourth box select today_12AM 5 Click Insert The following filter appears in the box below the filter controls timestamp BETWEEN last_month_to_date and today_12AM A NOTE When setting priorities for a Global Event Log Viewer specify high priorities to prevent the viewer from filling up with low priority events If you wanted to instruct an Event Log Viewer to display only unacknowledged alarms create a filter that only displays alarms that have no acknowledgement time ack time 1 In the first box select ack time 2 Inthe second box select IS NULL 3 Click Insert The following filter appears in the box below the filter controls ack_time IS NULL As you construct a filter statement each field offers options based on your selection in the previous field s For example if you select priority in the first field the third field becomes a text field where you can type anumeric value if you select timestamp in the first field the third
23. network dgm must exist WebReach processes each element in the network diagram and converts them for display in the web browser The easiest way to create a network diagram is to automatically generate it in Vista Generating the Network Diagram Automatically 1 Start Vista 2 Click File gt Generate network diagram 3 Click File gt Save WebReach displays this generated network diagram as its home page Displaying Vista User Diagrams Online 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Use a web browser to view the web version of the network diagram From any Internet Explorer Web Browser 1 Start Internet Explorer 2 Inthe address field enter http ComputerName Web where ComputerName is the server s computer name or its IP address and Web is the virtual root If you changed the default virtual root substitute the appropriate value for Web in the address For example if the server s computer name is Server2 you would type http Workstation2 Web The ION Enterprise web interface login appears 3 Enter your username and password then click the WebReach tab 4 The network diagram you created in Vista is displayed Click an icon to display its contents e g meters belonging to that group From the Primary Server 1 Launch the ION Enterprise taskpad and click Web Reporter The web interface login appears 2 Enter your username and password then click the WebReach tab Page 163 V
24. 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Adding Special Days A NOTE Do not leave any dates unassigned unassigned dates are not calculated in the reports Editing a Season 1 On the Define a Season tab select the season you want to edit then click Edit The Edit a Season dialog box appears 2 Make the changes you require then click OK Deleting a Season To delete a season select the season in the Define a Season tab then click Delete This also deletes the day groups and TOU periods configured for that season Adding Special Days 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved After you define a sub schedule you need to set up holidays and other special days You can define holidays that occur on the same date every year or at some other regular interval such as the third Thursday in November You can also define special days such as inventory days that might occur regularly and require special treatment in reports Use the Define Special Days tab to set up holidays and other special days 1 Inthe navigation pane select the sub schedule for which you want to define special days In the tab display pane select the Define Special Days tab Click Add The Add a Special Day dialog box appears Type aname for the special day in the Name field gr PF SP N Select the frequency of the day One time only Enter the date for a single day that does not repeat in
25. 6 Tocreate anew tariff for example Off Peak select the tariff name then click New Repeat the above steps to rename the tariff set the rates and set the tariff periods Holidays 1 Select one of the Off Peak periods then click New 2 Rename the tariff for example Holidays and click on the day and times underneath to configure the tariff period TOU Schedule Properties x 2007 TOU Schedule p Tait Period gt Off Peak From To 11 00 PM to 6 00 AM E firoopm z fecoam z E On Peak E Holiday Even Day x 11 00 PM to 6 00 AM Ev Belgium Holidays im Brazil Holidays Chile Holidays China Holidays Columbia Holidays Great_Britain Holidays Mexico Holidays id very year Every Year OK Cancel 3 Select the appropriate country holidays from the list 4 Add or remove individual holidays as required A NOTE Make sure there are no gaps or overlapping date or time ranges in the TOU Schedule Copying an Existing TOU Schedule To create a TOU Schedule using an existing one as a template select it then click Copy Rename the copy and modify its properties as needed Step 3 Set Up the Report Options The report options are organized in the different tabs of the window named as follows Date Range Distribution Validation Display and Notes 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide
26. All rights reserved Page 219 Linking ION Modules Using the ION Tree PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide 6 Click on the input symbol of the module icon in the second node diagram A pop up menu or dialog box appears listing the module s inputs Those that are of a different class than the selected output register are grayed out to indicate you cannot select them 7 Click the input you want or in the case of the dialog box click the input then click Select Designer does not graphically represent links between modules on different nodes so you will not see a line connecting the modules 8 Select File gt Send amp Save to save your changes to the node This procedure can also be performed in reverse order You can select a module s input first and then link it to another module s output register Z NOTE If the input is already linked the label of the register it is linked to is displayed beside the input If you select this input the existing link is overwritten A Note About Performance While creating links you may notice the circle at the end of the arrow cursor is sometimes black This indicates that Designer is in the process of retrieving information about a module You can still click on the inputs or outputs of other modules but Designer aborts the original request To minimize the amount of communications between Designer and the connected nodes avoid unnecessary clicking on the input and output sy
27. All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Copying and Pasting ION Modules Cutting or Copying ION Modules to the Clipboard Use the Cut or Copy command to save a temporary copy of the selected modules to the clipboard You can then use the Paste command to transfer the selection from the clipboard into any node diagram Each copy retains the setup register values custom labels link information and layout of the original selection A NOTE When selecting modules to be cut or copied you can also include grouping icons and text objects If you select a grouping icon all modules within the group are copied as well as any nested grouping icons 1 Select the module s you want to cut or copy 2 Do one of the following To cut the selection to the clipboard and remove the original select Edit gt Cut To copy the selection to the clipboard and retain the original select Edit gt Copy Designer copies the requested information to the clipboard After the selection has been copied to the clipboard you can select Edit gt Paste to paste it into any user diagram Copying ION Modules to a Framework You can use the Copy to framework command to create a framework from the selected modules A framework is a template that you can use to reproduce a group of modules Unlike regular copying and pasting a framework is stored as a file so you can paste it l
28. CTRL left click on output The list of setup registers appears these setup registers can be linked to inputs on other modules SHIFT CTRL left click on output The list of setup registers appears with the current register settings displayed in square brackets Right click on output The list of output register owners appears you can break links from this dialog CTRL right click on output The list of setup register owners appears you can break links from this dialog Designer Icons 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved NOTE To create a shortcut to an ION module see Creating a Shortcut to an ION Module on page 214 In each node diagram Designer uses icons to represent the configuration of the node There are two basic types of icons module icons and grouping icons Module icons represent ION modules located on the node Grouping icons represent a group of module icons A NOTE A module icon with a symbol EJ in the lower corner is a shortcut Module Icons All module icons share four common elements a label a graphic an input symbol and an output symbol Label hi abe aa Graphic EEH Input Symbol or Output Symbol The label displays the name of the module The graphic shows a picture to distinguish one type of module from another The input and output symbols provide access to the module s inpu
29. E E garantie ere wins sis taal Geared aca sind w Sai raf Bs rapdheanastay 134 Edit Text Options resonis anneni ie aaa tees E a Shih a 135 ENKOpHONS 222Sccinedie dy en E a E E E a biases asl ets 135 Query Server OPHONS asen t aa an a aaa Wh A 136 Display OPUONS dar ofe a E a E AS a EA 136 ACHT OPHONS a aa erain r SE E EE EA EE ets 142 Box Opuions Nrs eru E IANI E A NAATA EEN 143 Annunciation Options i reaa e O p a e EA EEES TAN 144 Alarming Options 0 0 09 hesitates Dace A EAN EE E 144 Linking a Diagram Object to a Data Source 0 eee eee 146 Querying the Database 0c cece cee e cece eee cece 148 Using the Query OPHONS 4 2 nies en aie he haa th opin hie ke 148 Using the Query Wizards csp cee p Ci hs eh ne Meals Nas Sees 150 Customizing a Diagram Window cee ce eee cece eeee 155 Default Font titne decanted wiht eee whinle KOA ia thal am thew 155 Backeround Color ccna teenie nn niet RT ae Mes wh Sy onda S 155 Configuring Window Properties 0 0 60 c cece eee 156 Chapter 5 Chapter 6 WebReach seeeeeeesssssseecccsssssseesescosssssseceeesossssseeeeo 16 WebReach Support 0 ccc e cece cece eee eect eeees 162 WebReach Installation After ION Enterprise is Installed 162 Preliminary Setups scat her nev eeham a Chae et Seed ee eee ee nadie 163 Displaying Vista User Diagrams Online 00 ce cece eee eee ee 163 Viewing Historical Trend Dat
30. In effect the 4 bytes are returned in 2 1 4 3 format S32 MFP or A 32 bit signed value returned in two consecutive 16 bit registers The word stored in the first 16 bit register is 32 M10k 4321 multiplied by 10000 and added to the word stored in the second 16 bit register Also known as signed Modulo 10000 U32 MEP or A 32 bit unsigned value returned in two consecutive 16 bit registers The word stored in the first 16 bit register is U32 M10k 4321 multiplied by 10000 and added to the word stored in the second 16 bit register Also known as unsigned Modulo 10000 or mod 10K A 32 bit signed value returned in two consecutive 16 bit registers Contrary to 32_M10k_4321 the word stored in S32 M10k 2143 the second 16 bit register is multiplied by 10000 and added to the word stored in the first 16 bit register U32 M10k 2143 A 32 bit unsigned value returned in two consecutive 16 bit registers Contrary to U32_M10k_4321 the word stored in the second 16 bit register is multiplied by 10000 and added to the word stored in the first 16 bit register A 48 bit signed value returned in three consecutive 16 bit registers R3 10 000 2 R2 10 000 R1 where R3 is S48 M10k 21 63 the last register and R1 is the first register Each registers range is 9 999 to 9 999 A 48 bit unsigned value returned in three consecutive 16 bit registers R3 10 000 2 R2 10 000 R1 where R3 is the last register and R1 is the first register Each
31. IsDownstream Assigned Source Updated Assigned Source Physical S Measurement Updated Measurement Handle Entered By Update Historical Database Manual Ja Iv Modbus 111 TechPubRack GE7500 TechPubRack GE7500 MI1 Value 1 0x8000 LOGINSERTER CES m Vv IV Modbus 111 TechPubRack GE7500 TechPubRack GE7500 MI1 Value 2 0x8040 LOGINSERTER CES D D Iv Modbus 111 TechPubRack GE7500 TechPubRack GE7500 MI1 Value 3 0x8080 LOGINSERTER CES O O Iv Modbus 111 TechPubRack GE7500 TechPubRack GE7500 MI1 Value Ox80cO LOGINSERTER CES D O Iv Modbus 111 TechPubRack r9600v2 TechPubRack r9600v2 Vin avg Ox80cO LOGINSERTER CES D m Iv Modbus 111 TechPubRack r9600v2 TechPubRack r9600v2 Vina Ox8000 LOGINSERTER CES O B iV Modbus 111 TechPubRack r9600v2 TechPubRack r9600v2 Yin b 0x8040 LOGINSERTER CES oO D v Modbus 111 TechPubRack r9600v2 TechPubRack r9600v2 Yin c 0x8080 LOGINSERTER CES O a Vv Modbus 111 TechPubRack r9600v2 TechPubRack r9600v2 Ia 0x8200 LOGINSERTER CES E O v Modbus 111 TechPubRack r9600v2 TechPubRack r9600 2 YII ab 0x8100 LOGINSERTER CES O O M Modbus 111 TechPubRack r9600v2 TechPubRack r9600v2 YII bc 0x8140 LOGINSERTER CES D O v Modbus 111 TechPubRack r9600v2 TechPubRack r9600v2 YII ca 0x8180 LOGINSERTER CES O T Iv Modbus 111 TechPubRack r9600v2 TechPubRack r9600v2 YII avg Ox 1cO LOGINSERTER CES in oO xl 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Page 315 Basic View versus Advanced View PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Columns Descrip
32. Link Options To view the link options right click on the object then select the Link tab Use the Link tab to link a diagram object to a real time source and to specify anew text label The Link tab is available for the following diagram objects Numeric Status and Control A NOTE To set a real time source for a grouping object use the Node tab The Link tab contains two sections Link and Label Use the Link section to specify a real time source for the diagram object See Linking a Numeric Status or Control Object on page 146 for more information Use the Label section to change the object s text label The Label section has three options Select None to display no label Select Use node label to display the node s register label This is the default Select Custom to display the label that you type into the text field provided The custom labels you create are stored in the user diagram and are only available to users of your diagram 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Page 135 Query Server Options PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide A NOTE If you have specified custom labels in your diagram or custom labels have been applied to an ION meter at the device level you can display the default labels at any time by selecting Show Default Labels from the Options menu This displays the default label of the data source instead of the label assigned in the device or in the user diagra
33. Module 7 Example Logging Data from Meters The Virtual Processor can be used to log data from meters that do not have Data Recorders In the following example the total kWh from a meter s Integrator module is recorded every 15 minutes by a Virtual Processor s Data Recorder module Virtual Processor Data Recorder Module Source Data Log Integrator Module kW tot m Record Integrand Trigger Periodic Timer Module Period 900 sec Setting Global Parameters Page 252 The Virtual Processor global operating parameters and Modbus network setup are configured using Virtual Processor Setup The global parameters do not need to be changed for normal operation The Virtual Processor operates properly in most applications with the default settings See Modifying the Global Parameters on page 79 for details 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Setting Global Parameters To set up the Virtual Processor s Modbus network see Configuring the Virtual Processor s Modbus Service on page 75 Z NOTE The ION Virtual Processor Service must be restarted for any changes to take effect as the Virtual Processor only reads the vipsys dat file once on startup The ION Virtual Processor Service can be restarted like any other service using the Services window found via the Control Panel service applet
34. Page 156 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Configuring Window Properties Z Eile Edit Options View Window Help l x dT A You can integrate your diagram objects into the image by placing them at the appropriate points on the drawing Users then display site specific information by clicking on the appropriate spot in the background Specifying a Custom Background Image 1L a PF YS N Right click in the background of the window you want to customize and select Properties The Window Properties Configuration dialog box appears Select the Image tab Select Custom image and click Browse Select the image file you want to use and click Open Click OK to set this image as the background Query Server Setting a Default Query Server for a Window Use the Query Server tab to specify a logged data source for any window in a user diagram The Query Server that you select provides the default source of logged data for all Event Log Viewers Data Log Viewers and Grouping Objects within the window Setting a Default Query Server for a Window 1 2 3 Right click in the background of the window and select Properties Click the Query Server tab in the Window Properties Configuration box Select either Inherit from parent icon or Custom Query Server Select Inherit from parent icon for the active window to default t
35. Page 50 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved 9 Editing Duplicated Device Information On the Table Editing area click on the first cell under the Name column to select it then paste the contents of the clipboard CTRL V 10 Click Apply to save your changes or click OK save your changes and return to Management Console Using Find and Replace to Edit Device Information Use the Find and Replace feature to modify matching characters in the device names or in any other editable columns on the device table The Find and Replace feature does not work on read only columns 1 2 Right click the device table and select Find and Replace or press CTRL H Type the characters you want to search for in the Find box Do not use wildcard characters Note that the search is case sensitive Find in column lists all available columns Select the column you want to search in In the Replace box type the characters you want to use to replace the characters in the Find box If you want to delete characters from a column value leave the Replace box blank Click Preview to list the search results in the table The Replace with column displays the new name or value resulting from the Find and Replace operation Use the check box in the Select column to select the rows for which you want to change values Click Select All to
36. PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Adding Data from a Spreadsheet or Text File You can select data from a spreadsheet or text file and paste it into an existing graph This is useful if you want to compare trends from different times waveforms showing different system events and other analysis applications Ensure that the first column of data in the spreadsheet or text file is the same type as the first column in the data log viewer from which the log plot originated In particular for timestamps make sure the complete timestamp is contained ina single column and that it uses the same date and time format as defined in the Windows Control Panel If the date portion of the timestamp is in one column and the time is in another or if the format is different in any way the data cannot be pasted into the Log View Plotter When you paste data into a graph from both spreadsheets and text files the Log View Plotter interprets the first row of data in the selection as a heading The first row in your selection is used to label the parameter in the legend So if the first row is not already used for column headings insert a row and type in the label you want to appear in the Log View Plotter To copy data from a text file the text file must be formatted correctly Each column in the text file must be separated by a tab and there must be a hard return at the end of each row P untitled Notepad of x The first row F
37. When you change the type of paste the descriptions in the Summary column and the Details box also change to describe the new action See Free Paste or Lock Paste below for more information Free Paste or Lock Paste You can use the free paste and lock paste options to instruct Designer how to respond to potential conflicts For example if you want to paste the module Setpoint 1 into a diagram that already has a Setpoint 1 module you have two options You can either add the new module under a new name for example Setpoint 2 or you can overwrite the existing module with the new one and reuse the old name Page 235 Copying and Pasting ION Modules Page 236 PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide The first option in the above example is a free paste It can be used to paste new modules into a diagram without deleting any existing modules This is useful for integrating new functions into a node without disrupting the node s existing functionality Although this may seem desirable it is not always the best option By leaving existing modules intact a free paste can result in needless duplication of functions In addition some groups of modules are interdependent and may require a lock paste to operate correctly The second option in the above example is a lock paste It instructs Designer to recreate the source modules exactly even if this requires Designer to overwrite existing modules in the diagram Whe
38. column describes the event Global Event iewer 1 ALARM 86 node priority cause_ion cause_value effect_ion eect value ack_time username Rajpur Feec 200 V3 Transient Det TR1 Tran 3 129 ALARM I LOGINSER 255 PowerMeasurt Object refer ALARM RACK P765 200 Sag Swell1 Disturbance E 51 DistStat Normal 03 28 2007 01 40 41 013 PM quest RACK P765 200 Sag Swell1 Disturbance 51 DistStat Disturbance 03 28 2007 01 40 44 373 PM quest LOGINSER 255 Collection cf ALARM ela 0 PowerMeasurt By default Vista plays a beep to annunciate an event with a priority between 128 191 and a beep combined with a flashing display to annunciate an event with a priority between 192 255 To customize these options see Alarming Options on page 144 When you acknowledge an alarm Vista records the time the alarm was acknowledged in the ack_time column and your user ID in the user_name column A NOTE In some cases your access level may not be sufficient to acknowledge an alarm for example a critical alarm may require Supervisor access This is a user configurable option See Alarming Options on page 144 for more information Acknowledging an Alarm 1 Openan Event Log Viewer or the Global Event Log Viewer then do one of the following To acknowledge a single alarm click on the word ALARM in the ack_time column or highlight the row containing the ala
39. gt Copy to framework Vista saves the selection including the type and location of each diagram object as a file You can then use the Paste from framework command to copy the group layout to another diagram or grouping window This is useful for replicating a single configuration on multiple workstations You can store a saved framework with its own filename and retrieve it anytime Copying a Group of Diagram Objects to a Framework 1 Select the group of objects you want to copy 2 Select Edit gt Copy to framework The Copy to framework dialog box appears 3 Type a name for the framework in the File name box then click Save The framework file extension fwu is added automatically The selection is saved as a framework After you save a group of objects as a framework you can paste it to another window Page 130 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Adjusting Diagram Object Layout and Size Pasting a Group of Diagram Objects from a Framework 1 Select the window you want to paste to 2 Select Edit gt Paste from framework The Paste from framework dialog box appears 3 Navigate to the framework you want to paste and click Open The framework selection appears in the active window Adjusting Diagram Object Layout and Size 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved This section describes how to move align and resize diagram objects Moving Diagram Objec
40. net send Workstation Digital D4 D3 D2 DI C Current THD is high Outputs O Oo Oo It O Launch Signal to turn on cooling fan has been sent Fan Switch Modbus Communications Modicon Modbus RTU is an industry standard communications protocol used in control and power monitoring industries The devices in a Modbus network have a Master Slave relationship with communication transactions occurring between the Master and one or many slaves up to 247 slave devices can exist in one site The Virtual Processor can act as a Modbus Slave by responding to requests from a Modbus Master and providing it with power monitoring system data Providing Data for a Modbus Master The following diagram illustrates how the Virtual Processor can make values in ION module registers available to a Modbus Master device Assume the Modbus Slave module s source inputs are linked to numeric or Boolean output registers from other ION modules In this example the values obtained from those registers are converted to the proper Modbus format according to how the Modbus Slave module s setup registers are configured The Modbus Slave module responds to a read request from the remote Modbus Master device and sends the Modbus data to the specified Modbus registers again according to how the Modbus Slave module s setup registers are configured Page 248 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide 2009 Schneider E
41. vertical alignment of selected objects To align objects 1 Select the icons that you want to align 2 Select Edit gt Layout The Layout dialog box appears 3 Select the Align tab and set the horizontal and vertical alignment of the icons The options in each area determine the criteria by which you can align icons For example if you select Left sides under Horizontal and Space evenly under Vertical Designer aligns all objects in the selection by their left sides using the leftmost object for reference and distributes them evenly along a vertical axis 4 Click OK Using the Grid The Grid tab in the Layout dialog box activates and configures an invisible grid Icons placed onto the grid snap to the nearest gridline to help align and space them evenly To activate or deactivate the grid 1 Select Edit gt Layout The Layout dialog box appears 2 Select the Grid tab 3 Select one of the following options No Grid turns the grid off Grid size in pixels activates the grid Type a number in the Grid size in pixels box to specify the size of the grid distance between grid lines 4 Click OK to save your changes Page 205 Designer Windows PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Designer Windows To create links between several node diagrams or grouping windows you need to position the open windows so you can see all the modules involved Use the Window menu to organize open windows in the workspace Arranging Wi
42. with the backup database file Restoring a Database Using Database Manager 1 2 Stop all ION Enterprise services Right click Databases then select Restore The Restore Database dialog box appears Select the appropriate database to restore from the list in the Select the backup to restore section To see the properties of the selected database click Properties Click Clear to ensure there are no connections to the database Edit the Restored database name field or select from the dropdown list In the Database file location field click the browse button and navigate to the location where you want to store the restored database Restart ION Enterprise services amp NOTE There are blank database and transaction log backup files available in the event of a complete database loss or corruption They are located in the ION Enterprise system etc directory The task in Database Manager called New ION Database uses these files Page 259 Manual Tasks PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Manual Tasks The following sections provide information on the manual tasks that can be used to manage your databases To perform a manual task do one of the following Right click Databases and select the task from the pop up menu or Right click the database on which you want to perform the task and select the task from the pop up menu When you right click on Databases to select a task a task dialog
43. 105 for more information A NOTE Because Event Log Viewers are associated with a single user diagram they only update and alarm when the user diagram is open All Event Log Viewers need to be re opened if a diagram is closed or the software is shut down Displaying the Global Event Log Viewer 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved The Global Event Log Viewer displays event data stored in the database It includes records retrieved from meter and Virtual Processor event logs as well as records transferred from the system log database Users share a single Global Event Log Viewer and generally the information displayed is common or global to the entire system A NOTE We recommend that you do not delete the Global Event Log Viewer If the pre configured Global Event Log Viewer is deleted a new one must be created and configured If one user deletes it the Global Event Log Viewer is automatically deleted from all workstations Only a user with Supervisor level access can delete a Global Event Log Viewer You can add multiple Global Event Log Viewers if you have sufficient authority You can change each viewer s filter criteria to query the database for events from a specific node or group of nodes or for events with a certain priority level Page 103 Displaying the Global Event Log Viewer Page 104 PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Adding a Global Event Log Viewer Select Edit gt Add Global
44. All rights reserved Chapter 9 Modbus Device Importer The Modbus Device Importer utility enables ION Enterprise software to recognize and easily integrate third party Modbus devices into the ION Enterprise network In This Section Introduction on page 278 ION Object Descriptions on page 281 Main Console Screen on page 283 Main Toolbar on page 284 Editing a Register on page 291 Register Properties Defined on page 291 Shortcut Keys on page 296 Data Formats on page 299 o o Configuring Logging and Calculation on page 301 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Page 277 Introduction Introduction Page 278 PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide The Modbus Device Importer is a tool for advanced users that creates the files and software support necessary to display data from any Modbus device using the Vista component of ION Enterprise The Modbus Device Importer user interface sets up useful common Modbus parameters by default but also allows you to configure all Modbus specific and device related parameters The Modbus Device Importer also has built in error checking to validate the files you created or those from other sources Process Overview Creating a new Modbus device type involves the following steps 1 Identify the new device type device name file name etc 2 Create a Modbus map file for the device type Identify a Modbus r
45. Cancel to return to the program Page 20 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Additional Information Additional Information 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved For more information about ION Enterprise components using devices with ION Enterprise and ION architecture see the following documents ION Enterprise 6 0 Commissioning Guide ION Enterprise 6 0 System Requirements Additional Device Support in ION Enterprise 6 0 OPC Server Assistant PQDIF Exporter Multilingual Support in ION Enterprise 6 0 ION System Security Troubleshooting Serial Communications in PowerLogic ION Meters Troubleshooting Meter Wiring Upgrading ION Device Firmware ION Reference o o Visit www powerlogic com for more information and to obtain documentation Page 21 Customizing and Navigating Interface Displays PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Customizing and Navigating Interface Displays The following sections describe ways to customize and navigate display windows dialog boxes and tables in components of ION Enterprise Navigating Tree Structures Information in ION Enterprise is often displayed in a tree Click to expand items in the tree or to collapse them Selecting Multiple Items in Tables Tree Structures Diagrams and Folder Structures To select adjacent items select the first item hold down the SHIFT key then click the
46. DIAG TECHPUBS M2003 SiteServer xlmod dll 03 25 2009 09 47 59 WARNING Gateway1 Mfg Load1 03 25 2009 09 48 03 511 AM Respo WARNING Gateway1 Mfg Load1 03 25 2009 09 48 06 636 AM Respo m Status Navigation pane Diagnostics information pane Refresh Tree View If you add a new device in Management Console while Diagnostics Viewer is open you can refresh the tree view to display the new device by collapsing then expanding the root node of the tree i e ION Enterprise Diagnostics Navigation Pane Diagnostics information is grouped as follows Service Diagnostics Contains diagnostics information for certain ION Enterprise services ION Network Router Service ION Site Service and ION Log Inserter Service Communication Diagnostics Contains diagnostics information for the ION Enterprise sites hardware devices and software nodes Select an item in the navigation pane to display its diagnostics information Page 66 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Service Diagnostics Diagnostics Information Pane The diagnostics information pane displays detailed data about the state of your power monitoring system and devices Service Diagnostics Service Diagnostics records communication problems and similar events occurring with ION Enterprise software components Communication Server Diagnostics Information abo
47. Device then click OK to confirm the deletion Page 77 Configuring the Virtual Processor s Modbus Service PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Page 78 Adding a Communications Port for the Modbus Slave GF Tip If you want to use ION data in your Modbus network you need to convert the data to Modbus Use Designer to open the Virtual Processor node and create Modbus Slave modules then set them up to map the registers and apply the proper conversion from ION data to Modbus 1 Expand Modbus Network to display Master Sites and Slave Ports Select Slave Ports then click Add COM Port The Modbus Port Site dialog box appears 2 Set the COM Port to the port you want to use as a Modbus Slave port this is the port that the Modbus Master uses to read Modbus data from the Virtual Processor s Modbus Slave modules Click OK A NOTE The Modbus Slave port must not be set to the same port as any ION or Modbus Master ports 3 Expand the COM port you have just added to display Settings 4 Expand Settings to show the items below it 5 Select Unit ID then click Modify Unit ID The Modbus Slave Unit ID dialog box appears 6 Enter the Modbus Slave device unit ID Click OK 7 If you want to modify the Baud Rate select Baud Rate then click Modify Baud Rate Select the new baud rate from the dropdown list then click OK 8 If necessary configure the Parity Stop Bits and Data Bits Changing Port Assignment for a Modbus Ma
48. Event Log Viewer A Global Event Log Viewer window appears The new Global Event Log Viewer is preconfigured with default link and query information However you can link the viewer to another log server using the procedure described in Linking a Data Log Viewer or Event Log Viewer on page 147 If you want to reconfigure a Global Event Log Viewer right click in the viewer window to display the Event Log Viewer Configuration dialog box You can edit the Caption Query Server Query or Alarming options in the same way you edit these options on an individual Event Log Viewer See Customizing a Diagram Object on page 133 for information on configuring these options NOTE When you add a Global Event Log Viewer to your workstation it is automatically added to all Vista workstations in your network Viewing the Global Event Log Viewer To view the Global Event Log Viewer select Window gt Global Event Viewer The Global Event Log Viewer appears Global Event Viewer 1 ALARM 86 olx Global Event viewer 1 ALARM 865 a AE timestamp node priority cause_ion cause_value effect_ion eect value ack_time username 5 E14 03 28 2007 1 Rajpur Fee 200 V3 Transient Det TR1 Tran 31 130 ALARM 7 19 2 4 03 28 2007 1 Rajpur Feed 200 V3 Transient Det TR1 Tran 3 128 ALARM 719 E 3 03 28 2007 1 Rajpur Fee 200 V3 Transient Det TR1 TranV31 129 ALARM 7 19 4 03 27 2
49. Icons into a Grouping Window To move an icon or group of icons to or from an open grouping window select it and drag it to the new location 1 Click on a grouping icon to open the grouping window Drag the grouping window by the title bar and position it so that you can see the icon s that you want to move 2 Select the icon s you want to move and drag the selection into the grouping window When you move a linked module icon into a grouping window the module remains linked but any lines that represent links to modules outside the window disappear Creating a New Grouping Window from the toolbox To create a new grouping window drag the grouping object onto the node diagram 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Designer Icons The ION modules toolbox is a collection of ION modules and generic tools that you can add to a node diagram If the ION modules toolbox is not displayed select Options gt Show Toolbox See Using the ION Modules Toolbox on page 209 for more information When you point to an object in the toolbox the name of the object is displayed on a ToolTip You can use ToolTips to identify the grouping object in the toolbox Renaming a Grouping Window When you create a new grouping window the default name is that of the node diagram To change the name of a grouping window rename the groupi
50. It is important to maximize the speed at which the Virtual Processor receives the data used to make control decisions The performance of a Virtual Processor using Distributed Control is sensitive to factors such as network traffic the Virtual Processor s global parameters and the workstation s CPU usage The following sections provide some guidelines for improving a distributed control network s performance 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Distributed Control System Configuration Minimize the number of devices per site for sites including devices used for distributed control Minimize the number of applications such as Vista diagrams that are requesting data from the control site Decrease the Virtual Processor s Client Polling Period Maximize the site s baud rate CPU Performance Dedicate a single Virtual Processor for control purposes an additional Virtual Processor can be run for less critical functions Donotrun CPU intensive functions on the same workstation as your distributed control Virtual Processor Distributed Control Applications The Virtual Processor s Distributed Control frameworks can perform various control processes two examples are presented below Ensure that you are familiar with the sections above before using any of these module frameworks in a control system Example Passi
51. J ION Setup Register Data Type UINT16 X Register Type Holding Register T st Modbus Address 40005 Hex Offset 5 Edit Mode Decimal Hex Request Type JPW x Register Mask None X i Reference another cerasi mE ao El A Reference another Regeter Mutipher 1 m register for the Multiplier i 3 Reference another Regater Gite 0 m register for the Offset Register Not Available Value Enumeration Cancel You can also double click the register in the Modbus Register Information pane to edit it This is a faster way to edit basic register properties When the Edit Mode is initiated in the Modbus Register Information pane the selected register opens up into an edit mode Modbus Reg Baud Rate 40000 None Pal Request Format Mask Scale Mutiplier_ of Enu amp aw xl l zif vio v Ed To scroll through the list in Edit mode use the PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN keys After editing the values press ENTER to save the changes amp NOTE If you use the PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN keys the changes made are saved as if ENTER was pressed To cancel any changes press the ESC key Register Properties Defined 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved The following register properties can be configured Register Label The label is a description attached to the register You can change this value at any time it is only an identifier for the register Page 2
52. Link The first step in linking modules is to decide which modules you want to use When choosing a module to link you have two choices you can add and link a new module or you can re link an existing module In some cases you may not want to add a new module For example if all the modules of a particular type are already used you need to re link one of them to perform the new function Most devices are preconfigured at the factory to provide common measurements and calculations If any of these factory defaults are unnecessary in your application you can unlink the modules involved and reuse them Plan ahead before you add new modules Unlinked modules are wasted resources You may find a linked module that you can use to add a new link in order to augment the function it is performing For example if you have a Setpoint module that triggers a waveform recording then later decide to use this trigger to reset a counter you can link that Counter module to the same Setpoint that controls the Waveform Recorder module Linking ION Modules Graphically 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Linking modules graphically means pointing and clicking a module s input then clicking another module s output register to link it note both input and output register classes must be compatible You can use this method to link to modules on the same node or to create links across nodes You can use the autolinking feature to speed
53. Low Limit 1 Eval Mode Greater Than Duration 300 sec Launching Module Launch RunCommand PML_ROOT1 bin Repgen exe r Power_Quality As transients often occur in groups the five minute delay setup with the One Shot timer module allows multiple transients to appear in one Power Quality report amp NOTE Using the Virtual Processor s Launching module may require that the Virtual Processor be run as an application instead of a service Contact Technical Support if you require more information Page 251 Setting Global Parameters Meter A Power Meter Po Power Meter Meter B Module Meter C wer Meter Module Meter Power Meter Module _ Source PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Example Data Aggregation In the following example meters monitor average current values I avg Every day at a specified time determined by the Periodic Timer module the Data Recorder Module stores the maximum average current value for each meter Virtual Processor Maximum Module Maximum Reset Maximum Module Source Reset Maximum AA Maximum Maximum Module Source Reset One Shot Timer f Trigger Module Data Recorder Start 5 4 aT mals Rec Log a External Control Switch 1 Source 1 Module Source 2 ae y Source 3 Enable Record Periodic Timer
54. Method 1 To list a module s output registers click the output symbol on the right side of the module icon To list the module s setup registers hold the CTRL key while clicking the output symbol Either a pop up menu appears or if the module has many registers a dialog box appears listing the available registers Select the register you want to link Inthe menu click the register you want to select Inthe dialog box double click the register or click it then click Select Move the cursor towards the module you want to link to The cursor changes and a dotted line follows it across the node diagram This indicates you are in the process of creating a link and it shows where the connecting line will appear in the node diagram If you link to a module that is in a different window than the original module either in a different node diagram or grouping window the dotted line disappears but the cursor still indicates that a link is in progress If the module you want is obscured by another window click on the title bar of the window containing the module This brings the window to the foreground without canceling the link If you click on the background of the window the link is cancelled Click the input symbol of the module that you want to link to display the module s inputs Either a pop up menu appears or if the module has many registers a dialog box appears listing the module s inputs If the input is already l
55. Modules on page 224 Copying and Pasting ION Modules on page 230 Viewing Output Registers Setup Registers and Inputs on page 239 Time of Use TOU Program Management on page 241 o oeoo o o Virtual Processor Service on page 244 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Page 195 Getting Started with Designer PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Getting Started with Designer Page 196 Designer is a programming tool intended for advanced users only Familiarity with ION architecture is essential as Designer is based on ION architecture The functions used in traditional power monitoring are treated as discrete modular objects that can be interconnected and customized These objects known as ION modules are the basic building blocks that comprise a node Designer is used to make any changes to the operation of an ION compliant node ION devices the Virtual Processor and Log Inserter are all configured using Designer For those already familiar with Designer see Designer Shortcuts on page 200 for a list of the most commonly used commands Starting Logging into and Exiting Designer To start Designer use one of the methods outlined in Starting a Component of ION Enterprise on page 19 or open Management Console and select Tools gt System gt Designer For instructions on logging in to Designer see Logging into a Component of ION Enterprise on page 19
56. Offset 0 Multiplier 1 gt lt ModbusInfo IONHandle 134217986 Name VoltsB Meter01 ModbusAddress 40003 RequestT ype R Format UINT16 Scale 1 Offset 0 Multiplier 1 gt lt ModbusInfo IONHandle 134217987 Name VoltsC Meter01 ModbusAddress 40004 RequestType R Format UINT16 Scale 1 Offset 0 Multiplier 1 gt lt CalcInfo IONHandle 135266304 Name Averaging 1 Function Averaging Module gt lt CalcInfo IONHandle 136314880 Name Minimum 1 Function Minimum_Module gt Page 279 Introduction Page 280 PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide lt CalcInfo IONHandle 137363456 Name Maximum 1 Function Maximum_Module gt lt CalcInfo IONHandle 138412032 Name Data Rec 1 Function DataRecorder_Module gt lt CalcInfo IONHandle 139460608 Name Feedback 1 Function Feedback_Module gt lt CalcInfo IONHandle 140509184 Name Periodic Tmr 1 Function PeriodicTimer_Module gt lt CalcInfo IONHandle 131072000 Name Diagnostics 1 Function Diagnostics_Module gt lt ModbusMap gt 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide ION Object Descriptions ION Object Descriptions Managers Modules Registers 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved ION objects are software items that are recognized by ION Enterprise software ION objects consist of device managers modules and registers Managers
57. Page 301 Configuring Register Logging PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide All the register information from the main MDI screen is pre populated in this table when you open the application Show downstream device columns Select this to show all the columns for selecting and setting the downstream device properties for registers Per register area Use this area to individually configure registers Low area Use this area to enable calculation and set logging of low values High area Use this area to enable calculation and set logging of high values Mean area Use this area to enable calculation and set logging of mean values Global register edit area Use the bottom half of the screen to edit individual registers or multiple registers after selecting them in the list Help link Click this link to open the Modbus Device Importer online help Stale data link All Click this link to open the Configure Stale Data Settings dialog Filtering and sorting columns See Sorting Data in a Column on page 24 and Filtering Data in a Column on page 24 for instructions on filtering and sorting Configuring Register Logging Page 302 To edit registers on an individual basis select the row of the register and edit the cells in the row or use the editing tools in the Global area To edit more than one register select the rows you want to configure similarly and use the editing tools in the Global area Log Select to en
58. ReportPack directory ION Enterprise web ReportPacks 2 Click File gt Install Report Pack The Report Pack Install dialog box appears 3 Select the report pack that you want to install Click Install Page 191 Custom Report Definitions PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Custom Report Definitions Page 192 You can use Microsoft Business Intelligence Studio to create custom report definitions Custom report definitions should only be created by users with a solid understanding of the database access layer Microsoft Business Intelligence Studio and Reporting Services Contact Schneider Electric if you require specialized report definitions 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Running the ION Power Quality Aggregation Service Manually Running the ION Power Quality Aggregation Service Manually To run power quality and EN50160 reports in Web Reporter the ION Power Quality Aggregation Service must be started This service performs calculations for these reports By default this service is only run on new data For pre existing data you must run this service manually To run the service manually 1 Select Start gt Run or press START R to display the Windows Run dialog box 2 Click Browse to navigate to the EventCollector Cli exe located in the ION Enterprise system bin folder then type a 3 Click OK The ION Power Quality Aggregation
59. Type a mobile email address for the user 3 Click Apply to save the changes or click OK to save the changes and exit User Manager During the ION Enterprise software installation two default user names guest and supervisor are created both with a default password of 0 zero Since both these user names have supervisor level access the default password should be changed or the accounts removed after you add a new user with supervisor level access Changing User Information 1 Select the username associated with the information you want to change 2 Type the new information in the Edit User Account section of the Users tab After you edit a user s information an asterisk appears beside that user in the list of users until you click OK to save the information 3 Click Apply to save the changes or click OK to save the changes and exit User Manager Deleting a User 1 Select the username of the user you want to delete then click Delete The row disappears from the list of users You cannot delete the user account you are currently logged in with the Delete button becomes unavailable A NOTE You cannot use the Revert button to undo a deletion To undo a deletion click Cancel to exit out of User Manager without saving your changes 2 Click OK to save your changes and exit User Manager Page 57 Groups PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Groups Use the Groups tab of User Manager to define
60. Waveforms Events in the Data Types section You can select any combination of data types to trim 5 Click OK A warning appears to notify you that the selected data will be permanently removed Click Yes to continue or No to cancel Right click on Databases and select Update Statistics to display the Update Statistics dialog box Statistics on numbers of rows and ranges of key values in the data provided can be used by SQL Server to determine the most efficient way to access the base tables thus improving the performance of distributed queries Update Statistics recalculates these values for better performance To update statistics select the database you want to update and click OK Upgrade Database Page 266 Right click on Databases and select Upgrade Databases to display the ION Database Upgrade dialog box This task upgrades the selected database with the latest database schema The ION Enterprise installer automatically upgrades your databases with the new database schemas when you install ION Enterprise on an existing ION Enterprise server If you install the latest version of ION Enterprise on a different server so that you can manually copy older database files to the new computer you can run this task on the older databases i e the ION_Data ION_SystemLog and ION_Network databases and archives to upgrade them with the new schema To upgrade a database select the database you want to upgrade and click OK 20
61. When you delete a Site or a Server all devices associated with it are also deleted 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Page 37 Accessing Meters with Advanced Security PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Accessing Meters with Advanced Security If you have a meter in your network with Advanced Security enabled use Management Console to allow ION Enterprise Services to access the meter 1 Right click the device that has Advanced Security enabled and select Security The Meter Security Settings dialog box appears 2 From the Software Access dropdown list select the user configured on the meter using Designer or ION Setup that has the access settings that you want to give ION Enterprise services and components to the device 3 Click Match Password and type the password for that user in the Password field then re type it in the Confirm Password field 4 Select the check box if you want to allow the software to send secure time synchronization signals to the meter Clear the check box if you do not want to send secure time synchronization signals to the device 5 Click OK Page 38 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Configuring Connection Schedules Configuring Connection Schedules 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved You can schedule the times when the server connects to a site or Ethernet device Adding a Connection Schedule Click t
62. a TOU schedule in a report the report data is presented according to the information you set up in the schedule See Energy Cost on page 176 for information on the Energy Cost Report A typical TOU has On Peak Off Peak and Shoulder periods Since rate schedules vary not only by day and week but also by season the TOU schedules can be set up to match your precise needs To configure TOU schedules for use with Designer see Time of Use TOU Program Management on page 241 Opening the Time of Use Editor To access the Time of Use Editor select Tools gt System gt Time of Use Editor in Management Console Time of Use Editor Interface Schedule Name Time of Use Setup amp SUB SCHEDULE 3 25 2003 Manufacturing GP Spring Modified Last On 3 25 2009 10 49 20 AM DAY GROUP Weekdays Description Time of use schedule for manufacturing facility SubSchedule Count 1 N DAY GROUP Weekends Schedule Description H B SEASON Summer i SEASON Fall I SEASON Winter Navigation Pane 1 Expand the schedule to display its sl Tab Display Pane les are listed in dates When vau nse a schedule in a Ieulated arenrdir Use the navigation pane to navigate through the schedules access the right click menus for schedules and sub schedules and select an item to display associated tabs in the tab display pane Overview Creating a TOU Schedule To create a TO
63. an existing group from the list Name Type the name you want to give the device Device Type Select the type of device Unit ID Type the Unit ID of the device the range is 1 9999 for ION devices or 1 247 for Modbus devices Site Select the Ethernet gateway site you previously set up Configure the other fields as you require Adding an Ethernet Device Click the Devices icon Right click in the display window and select New gt Ethernet Device Fill in the Group Name Device Type and TCP IP Address fields Configure the other fields as you require amp NOTE When you configure Ethernet or Ethernet gateway devices you can specify either a hostname or an IP address in the TCP IP Address field Setting Up Devices for OPC Communications 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved To set up devices for OPC communications first add an OPC site Step 1 Adding an OPC Site Click the Sites icon Right click in the display window and select New gt OPC Site Fill in the Name and Address fields Configure the other fields as you require Make sure you follow the correct syntax when typing in the address for the OPC site Select the Address field to see an example address in the Property Description section near the bottom of the OPC Site Configuration dialog box Step 2 Adding a Device to the OPC Site A NOTE At least one OPC Device Type needs to be preconfigured before an OPC Device can be create
64. annunciate an event with a priority between 128 191 and a beeping sound combined with a flashing display to annunciate an event with a priority between 192 255 A NOTE If your computer is equipped with a sound card you can replace the default alarm sound with a custom sound Save the sound file you want to use as alarm wav and store it in the ION Enterprise system etc directory Page 145 Linking a Diagram Object to a Data Source PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Linking a Diagram Object to a Data Source After placing an object in your user diagram you need to link the object to a data source Some types of diagram objects require a real time data source and others require a logged data source Numeric status and control objects require a real time data source You can link these diagram objects to a device Event Log Viewers and Data Log Viewers require a logged data source You can link these diagram objects to any log in your system Linking a Numeric Status or Control Object This section describes how to link a numeric status or control object to a node Numeric status and control objects display real time data After you have placed one of these objects into a user diagram you should link it to a real time data source An object cannot receive or display information until it is linked Specifying a Real Time Link to a Node 1 Right click on the diagram object you want to link The Configur
65. box appears You can select the database on which you want to perform the task If the task can only be performed on one database the database is pre selected When you right click on a database only the tasks that apply to that database appear in the pop up menu and the database is pre selected in the task dialog box Alarm Configuration Right click Databases and select Alarm Configuration to display the Alarm Configuration dialog box FE Alarm Configuration x Select events to monitor Database Size M Enable Alarm ION_Data Database size threshold MB 20000 a M Enable Alarm ION_SystemLog Database size threshold MB 2000 Hard Drive Space M Enable Alarm Remaining hard drive space threshold MB 5o a Monitor all hard drives Monitor only hard drives with ION databases Configure alarming method Send E mail SMTP server E mail address es Separate multiple e mail addresses with semicolons ox cancel Select Events to Monitor Database Size This section lets you enable or disable local alarms that monitor the size of the ION_Data and ION_SystemLog databases You can also set the size threshold that the ION_Data or the ION_SystemLog database must exceed before you receive an alarm notification The ION_Network database is not monitored Page 260 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Archive 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserv
66. bring up a calendar where you can choose an effective date for the new sub schedule 3 Click OK The sub schedule displays in the navigation pane Continue configuring the sub schedule by adding seasons and day groups To add anew sub schedule that has the same settings as an existing sub schedule see Copying an Existing Sub Schedule below Copying an Existing Sub Schedule 1 Right click the sub schedule that you want to copy and select Save as New SubSchedule The New SubSchedule dialog box appears 2 Click the arrow beside the effective date to bring up a calendar where you can choose an effective date for the new sub schedule 3 Click OK The new sub schedule displays in the navigation pane with the same attributes other than effective date of the sub schedule you copied Editing a Sub Schedule Effective Date 1 Right click the sub schedule for which you want to change the effective date then select Edit Effective Date The Edit SubSchedule Effective Date dialog box appears 2 Click the arrow beside the effective date to bring up a calendar where you can choose an effective date for the new sub schedule 3 Click OK Deleting a Sub Schedule To delete a sub schedule right click the sub schedule name in the navigation pane and select Delete This also deletes all seasons in that sub schedule and any day groups special days etc that they contain Configuring Seasons 2009 Schneider Electric All
67. by selecting the desired object s in either the ION Map Information pane or Modbus Register Information pane and then holding down the ALT key You can move the module or register to any other holding object but it must be moved to the same data type Editing Objects To edit objects in the Modbus Device Importer right click on them and select Advanced Properties See Editing a Register on page 291 for more information Deleting Selected lt type of object gt To delete objects in the Modbus Device Importer right click on them and select Delete selected lt type of object gt If you delete an object all children objects beneath it are also deleted To delete multiple registers at once select them in the Modbus Register Information pane and then click Delete selected Registers Advanced Properties Select this menu item to open the Device Properties dialog box You can also open this dialog box using View gt Device Properties For more information regarding device properties see View Menu on page 286 The following menu items are accessed by clicking View on the main toolbar Refresh Refreshes the main console screen Collapse All Collapses the tree view Device Properties Click View gt Device Properties or right click on the tree view root and select Properties The Device Properties dialog box appears Device Properties Tab Device Type Type the name of the Device Type Default Diagram Tem
68. change the hours and minutes Monthly Monthly by Date Select Monthly then select Monthly by Date to run the report on selected dates in the calendar month at a specified time Type the dates in the On calendar day s field Separate multiple dates with a comma To select a range of continguous dates separate the first and last date in the range with a hyphen For example to schedule the report to run on the 1st 10th to 15th and 20th days of the month type 1 10 15 20 After you have entered the dates type the time into the Time of Day box or use the up down arrows to change the hours and minutes Monthly Monthly by Day Select Monthly then select Monthly by Day to run the report on a specific day of the week in a selected week of the month at a specified time For example to set the subscription to run on the Monday of the last week of the month select Last and Monday from the dropdown lists Type the time into the Time of Day box or use the up down arrows to change the hours and minutes 7 Click Test Now to test that the report subscription configuration is functioning 8 Click Save to save the subscription The subscription appears in the list of subscriptions for the selected report Subscription Errors and Solutions Certain warnings may appear when you try to add subscriptions Depending on the situation you may not be able to add the subscription or you may be able to add it but the output will not be delivered s
69. current register and exits edit mode Page 296 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide ION Map Information Pane ION Map Information Pane Keystrokes Action Right Arrow Expands a node or selects a child if children are already expanded Left Arrow Collapses a node or selects a parent node if no children are expanded Up Arrow Scrolls up through the list of nodes Down Arrow Scrolls down through the list of nodes Mouse Right Click Brings up the pop up edit menu Enter odes Bar Opens the properties window for the selected object or CTRL X F1 If the root device type is selected a new manager is created and the manager properties window is displayed F2 If a manager is selected a new module is created and the module properties window is displayed F3 If a module is selected a new register is created and the register properties window is displayed F4 If a module is selected a new register is created but the register properties window is not displayed ineen It is equivalent to F1 F2 or F3 depending on which object is currently selected If a register is selected then the enumeration window is displayed If a manager is selected a prompt to delete the manager is displayed Delete If a module is selected a prompt to delete the module is displayed If a register is selected a prompt to delete the register is displayed
70. day portion of the date then either type the new date or use the up and down arrows beside the date to edit it Relative Date Select the day and month from the dropdown lists For the end date select the Time of Day the season ends Start of Day or End of Day If you select Start of Day the season ends at 12 00 00 AM on the selected day if you select End of Day the season ends at 12 00 00 AM on the next day so there are no gaps in the schedule A NOTE If you use relative dates you can configure a schedule that may become invalid in future years Be careful when you configure the schedule that there will be no missing or overlapping days in the schedule in future years For example rather than scheduling one season to end on the 1st Sunday in June and the next to start on the 1st Monday in June it is better to schedule the first season to end at Start of Day on the 1st Sunday in June and the next season to start on the 1st Sunday in June 6 If this is a split season where there is a gap between two parts of the season select the Split Season check box and add a second sets of dates For example winter is typically a split season because it occurs in the first and last months of the year 7 Click OK The calendar on the Define a Season tab now shows one season with the rest of the year unassigned 8 Click Add to create additional seasons Repeat steps 4 to 6 to name the season and define the start and end dates
71. depending on the version of SQL Server you are using PDF Creates a PDF of the report that you can view in Adobe Reader Excel Creates a version of the report in Excel format that you can view in Microsoft Excel XML Creates an XML version of the report that you can view in your browser or other compatible program HTML Creates an HTML version of the report that you can view in your browser or other compatible program TIFF Creates a TIFF image version of the report To export a report select the format you want from the Select a format dropdown list The File Download dialog box appears asking whether you want to save the file or open it if a compatible program exists on the computer If you export a report to PDF or TIFF format that has multiple columns of data e g if it has multiple measurements or multiple sources in a wide table the columns may be appear on multiple pages in the exported file Page 186 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Report Administration Report Administration Managing a Report Sharing a Report 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved The following sections describe the options available in the Manage Reports dialog box Use the Manage option in the Manage Reports dialog box to create a new folder delete or rename a folder or report or move or copy a report from one folder to another 1 C
72. details If you do not have a user name and password log on in View Only mode for limited access The default user name is guest The default password is 0 zero The password field is case sensitive For information on setting up user accounts and changing passwords see User Manager on page 55 After you log on the program interface appears There are two ways to end a session in a component of ION Enterprise Log off if you want to end the current user session but keep the program running or Exit if you want to close the program completely Some components offer both options some only offer the Exit option Page 19 Ending a Session PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Logging Off 1 Select File gt Logoff A message appears prompting you to confirm your intention to log off 2 Click Yes to log off or No to return to the program If you attempt to log off without saving your work the program prompts you to save your changes Click Yes to save your changes No to discard them or Cancel to return to the program After you log off the ION Enterprise Logon screen appears Exiting 1 Select File gt Exit A message appears prompting you to confirm your intention to exit the application 2 Click Yes to exit or No to return to the program If you attempt to exit without saving your work the program prompts you to save your changes Click Yes to save your changes No to discard them or
73. devices that require a unit ID 1 Use the up or down arrow in the Start spin box to change the start value or simply type it in the box Click the up or down arrow on the End box edit the range or type the end value in the box Click Configure at the bottom of the Configure Unit IDs section A NOTE To edit the unit ID of an Ethernet device you must first add the Unit ID column to the table in the Table Editing area Configuring Sites 1 2 From the dropdown list select the site you want to use for the selected serial or OPC devices Click Configure at the bottom of the Configure Sites section Page 49 Editing Duplicated Device Information PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Configuring Ports 1 From the dropdown list select the port you want to use for the selected Ethernet devices 2 Click Configure at the bottom of the Configure Ports section Editing Duplicated Device Information The following sections describe how to quickly edit the properties of duplicated devices in the table editing area Copying Device Information from a Spreadsheet Sometimes device names do not follow any particular naming pattern In this case you can use the copy paste function to apply configuration changes directly to the Table Editing area First you need to add a new device in Management Console then create as many duplicates of the device as the quantity of items you are pasting If you have a Micro
74. down menus to navigate to the required register Click OK The offset to be used now appears in the Register Offset field Register Not Available Value If the register has a control signal value to indicate that the register is currently not available then you can set the value here The value must match the data that is received from the register on the device If a value is received that matches this property value the string Not Available is displayed when viewing the register in Vista Boolean Labels This option is only available for Boolean registers It allows you to set default labels for Status Objects in Vista 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Register Properties Defined Value to Send Out as a Pulse This option is only available for pulse registers It allows you to specify the exact Modbus value sent to the device when a pulse register is activated in Vista Constant String Value A constant for manipulating data retrieved from the device Number of Registers to Request This option is only available if the data type is set to ASCII ASCII Reverse or Packed BCD It allows you to specify the number of registers to retrieve from the device on a request Enumeration Enumeration is useful for converting numeric value representation into human readable string values For example you can use enumeration
75. dreies tun ELEU CEEE ES 213 Creating a Shortcut to an ION Module 0 0 0 0c cece 214 Adding a Text Box to a Node Diagram 6 cece cece eee 215 Linking ION Modules cee ce cee cee eee eee tenes 217 Linking ION Modules Graphically nnn 0 6 c cece een ee 217 Linking ION Modules on the Same Node 0 00 00 00 e aes 218 Linking ION Modules Across Different Nodes 0000004 219 Linking ION Modules Using the ION Tree 2 0 0 cece eee eee 220 Deleting Links TAEA sea tat etek n AA ga Meare rea eure eure rata a 222 Configuring ION Modules 2 ccc cece cece eee e neces 224 Copying and Pasting ION Modules eee cece eens 230 Viewing Output Registers Setup Registers and Inputs 239 Viewing Output Register Information 000s 239 Viewing Setup Register Information 000 e cece eee ees 240 Viewing Input Information 0 eee eee 240 Time of Use TOU Program Management eeeeeeeee 241 Advanced TOU Schedule Configuration 6 0000 e eee eee ee 241 Virtual Processor Service 0 ccc cece cece eect e eee e eens 244 Using the Virtual Processor 6 a A E SRA 244 Distributed Control is ienr ane vivre eigen ate E die ted te OEA aoe ese Les 245 Modbus Communications 0 eee 248 Common Virtual Processor Applications n nasses seser erer 250 Setting Glo
76. eees 308 Setting Up the ION Alert Monitor 00 cece eee ee 309 Starting the ION Alert Monitor 0 0 00 312 Downstream Device Assistant c cccccscsssssssssseenee GIG Detecting Downstream Devices cece cece cece ee eens 314 Downstream Device Assistant Basics cece cece eee ecees 315 Starting the Downstream Device Assistant 0000 c cece cece 315 Basic View versus Advanced View 6 660 e cence cece ee 315 Displaying Physical Sources taeran ra an ar eee ne 318 Sorting Data screwed wv a asses tr dears Geto eed aan ary Pacer EE ENE We Naas aoe ee 318 Downstream Device Assistant Options 6 6 sser cece 318 Downstream Device Assistant Functions eeceeceeeeeeees 321 Renaming the Assigned Source 0 c cece eee eens 321 Cancelling Changes i cccue tev Ra weal sagt AWA Saeed 322 Changing the Measurement Mapping 600 c cece cece eee eens 322 Adding a New Downstream Device Mapping 0c eee eeee 322 Updating the Historical Data at a Later Time 0 00 eee eee 323 ACU VATY LOS a5 hatin ENRIETO AANE E Meee eae pated 323 Downstream Device Assistant Commands 0 eeeeeeeeees 324 Reporter ciseccoivusocccedinersttecswectseasevreacen coueceenies O20 lntrodUclioniic 1 80 05 sate perenne nee ee sobe habe s sawed aan 326 Creating a Report cc ccc ccc cee cee eee etre eee eees 327 Generat
77. field displays time based options i e now today 12AM yesterday etc Page 153 Using the Query Wizard Page 154 PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Time related functions now_ The current time today_12AM Today at 00 00 00 yesterday Yesterday at 00 00 00 last_week Seven days ago at 00 00 00 this_month The first day of this month at 00 00 00 last_month_to_date The same date of the month one calendar month ago at 00 00 00 last_month The first day of the last calendar month at 00 00 00 last_quarter_to_date The first day of the month three calendar months ago at 00 00 00 The second field offers a standard set of operators Operator Specific Data If you select an operator that requires additional information Vista displays a dialog box where you can specify the required data For example if you select the node column in the first field then select the IN operator from the second field a dialog box appears requesting that you specify the node you want to use If you specify any column other than node then select IN a box appears requesting numeric values After you have specified a filter click Next to continue Step 4 Choosing a Sort Order Specify a sort order The sort order is the order in which records appear in the viewer 1 Highlight the name of the column to sort by in the Available Columns list then click Add The co
78. from the shortcut menu for the Devices display pane Configure lt Network Component gt opens the lt Network Component gt Configuration dialog box where lt network component gt is the component selected Use this dialog box to make changes to the properties for the selected network component Page 30 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Management Console Network Components Management Console Network Components 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved This section describes the different components in Management Console Servers Sites Devices Dial Out Modems Connection Schedules and System Log Events See Setting Up Your Network in Management Console on page 33 for information on adding these components to your network Servers A server is a computer in the ION Enterprise system that runs administrative software to control access to the network and its resources such as metering devices Sites A site is a group of devices in the ION Enterprise system that share a common communications link A site can be a direct site a modem site an Ethernet gateway site or an OPC site Direct Site In a direct site serial communications occur between a computer and one or more meters The standards most commonly used on computers are RS 232 for connecting one device and RS 485 for connecting a loop of up to 32 devices When connecting to more than one s
79. future years for example a special day for your organization that does not repeat every year Repeat yearly Enter the date for example a holiday that occurs on the same date every year Repeat on Complete the fields in the Repeat On section to define how the day repeats and in which months it occurs Select whether is occurs on a particular date of the selected month s Day or a relative day i e Last Saturday in the selected month s 6 Repeat steps 3 to 5 to add additional special days 7 Click OK to save your changes and return to the Define Special Days tab See Configuring Day Groups on page 86 for instructions on how to apply special days to a sub schedule Page 85 Configuring Day Groups PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Deleting a Special Day To delete a special day select the special day in the Define a Special Day tab then click Delete Configuring Day Groups Day groups define how days of the week are divided into groups Day groups can include days of the week special days such as holidays or other specially designated days such as inventory days Default settings are weekdays Monday to Friday and weekends Saturday and Sunday but you can add additional groups There can be a maximum of 47 day groups in any season Make sure that all days have been accounted for since unaccounted time is not included in any reports Adding a Day Group Before you add a day group make sure
80. groups of users Groups can be used to determine access to reports in Web Reporter Information that is required but is missing is marked by an exclamation mark Users Groups Help New Revert Updated Group Name Description List of groups Everybody All users belong to this group Finance Finance Reports group Operations Facility Operations group Edit User Groups Edit User Group Operations section Name fo perationd Description Facility Operations group Users Members Of Operations First Name Last Name Username Access Level First Name Last Name Username Access Level Guest Account guest Supervisor Jakob Schmidt JakobS Supervisor Supervisor Account supervisor Supervisor John Liu JohnL Operator Jakob Schmidt JakobS Supervisor Roberta Cruz Robertac Controller John Liu JohnL Operator Roberta Cruz Robertac Controller Pierre Jacques Pierre User Lox Defining Groups 1 On the Groups tab click New A new row appears in the lists of groups 2 Inthe Edit User Group section of the tab enter the name required and description of the group 3 To adda user to the selected group select the username from the Users list and click the right arrow button gt gt 4 To remove a user from the selected group select the username from the Members Of list and click the left arrow button 5 Click Apply to save your changes or click OK to save your c
81. logs in the Log View Plotter you can improve the display to avoid discontinuity by setting the vertical axis to Power Factor Display 100 100 Setting Any Vertical Axis for Power Factor Display 1 Right click on the vertical axis or right click on the graph background and select the axis after you have plotted the power factor data 2 Select Power Factor Display from the pop up menu A check mark appears beside the option to indicate that it is selected You can plot other non power factor data on the same graph however you should not plot the new data on the same axis as the power factor data De index the new data on a separate axis as described in De indexing a Parameter or Offsetting a Parameter on the Y axis on page 114 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Viewing the Harmonics Analysis Tab Viewing the Harmonics Analysis Tab 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved If any of the parameters you have plotted is a waveform you can display a histogram of the signal s harmonic content by selecting the Harmonics tab on the Log View Plotter window The resulting histogram shows the harmonics for all waveforms in the plot Plot Display Harmonics Analysis Phasor Diagram I1 Analysis Start 03 12 2007 04 48 34 279 AM 1 Cycle TT Calculations Log View Plotter A NOTE The cycle used is the first full cycle to the right of Cursor 1on the Plot Displa
82. nen ath et Medes ati E Pata deed TEEN 19 Additional Information 2 cece eee e cece cece eeeeeees 21 Customizing and Navigating Interface Displays 005 22 Adjusting the Display of a Window or Dialog Box 00020 005 22 Grid Table Controls enron srs Bink a a dN le Sees ats a Sere re 23 Management Console ssccssscssssscsssscssrscsssresses 27 o The Management Console Interface cece cece ce ee eens 28 Management Console Network Components 2seeee eee 31 Setting Up Your Network in Management Console 4 33 Adding a Server icoJas vd eee aa oad Sa es eee ees 33 Setting Up Devices for Direct Serial Communications 34 Setting Up Devices for Ethernet Gateway Communications 34 Adding an Ethernet Device syss sneri taa ETARA nce 35 Setting Up Devices for OPC Communications 0 0 0000 ee 35 Adding a Modem e riero aa deta Ro hinia asus iene dies areas 36 Editing a Network Component 06666 e cence cence nee 36 Deleting a Network Component 66666 c cece eects 37 Accessing Meters with Advanced Security 00eeccceeeeeee 38 Configuring Connection Schedules cee ec eee cc eecees 39 System Log Events cece cece ec ee cee creer e eee e eee eeee 41 Setting Up Large Systems cee cece eee cece eee eens 43 The Duplicate and Configure Inte
83. numeric object placed in a user diagram displays numeric data from a single source There are seven types of diagram objects available on the Diagram Objects toolbox Grouping Object Group a number of related objects within a separate grouping window Click on a grouping object to open the grouping window and display its contents Text Box Display independent headings titles and comments in a user diagram Numeric Object Display real time numeric values such as Volts Amps or kW T a g Status Object Display Boolean data On Off Yes No 1 0 etc to indicate the status of a digital output relay digital input status input or setpoint The image can be customized and it can be configured to use animation Data Log Viewer Display data logs stored in the ION_Data database including archives from previous versions of ION Enterprise show waveform data waveform capture waveform recorder and trends data recorders using tables and provide data for plotting a Page 128 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Cutting Copying and Pasting a Diagram Object Event Log Viewer Display event logs stored in the ION_Data database including archives from previous versions of ION Enterprise show event records from devices and other components and display and acknowledge alarms Control Object Send commands to a device on your network for example clear an energy accumul
84. query options to define the way a viewer displays data and the Query Wizard to edit the actual query A NOTE Anytime you place and link a new Data Log Viewer or Event Log Viewer you need to specify a query for it You can specify a query using the Query Wizard Using the Query Options To define the way a log viewer displays information configure its query options To view the query options for an Event Log Viewer Data Log Viewer or Global Event Log Viewer right click on the viewer object The Configuration dialog box appears Select the Query tab The upper section of the Query tab offers two buttons Edit Query starts the Query Wizard a user friendly interface that helps you edit the query Edit SQL accesses the SQL statement via Windows Notepad so you can edit the query directly using SQL if preferred A NOTE If you edit a query directly i e by editing the SQL statement your changes may not be accessible to the Query Wizard This is not a problem unless you intend to use the Query Wizard as well The Options section of the Query tab offers the following options Records uploaded at a time This option specifies the number of records Vista uploads into active memory RAM when you first open a Data or Event Log Viewer The maximum value is 9999 As you scroll down the list of records Vista uploads additional records as needed You may want to change this default value if for example you want to se
85. registers range is O to 9 999 A 64 bit signed value returned in four consecutive 16 bit registers R4 10 000 3 R3 10 000 2 R2 10 000 R1 where R4 is the last register and R1 is the first register Each registers range is 9 999 to 9 999 U48 M10k 21 65 S64 M10k 21 87 A 64 bit unsigned value returned in four consecutive 16 bit registers R4 10 000 3 R3 10 000 2 Hes MOR AU St R2 10 000 R1 where R4 is the last register and R1 is the first register Each registers range is 0 to 9 999 A 64 bit signed value returned in four consecutive 16 bit registers The highest order word is returned in the first 64 87 21 register the lowest order word in the fourth In effect the 8 bytes are returned in 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 or big ENDIAN format A 64 bit unsigned value returned in four consecutive 16 bit registers The highest order word is returned in the first U64 87 21 register the lowest order word in the fourth In effect the 8 bytes are returned in 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 or big ENDIAN format A 64 bit signed value returned in four consecutive 16 bit registers The highest order word is returned in the fourth 64 21 87 register the lowest order word in the first In effect the 8 bytes are returned in 2 1 4 3 6 5 8 7 or little ENDIAN format 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Page 299 Data Formats PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Format Type Description A 64 bit unsigne
86. required If no mask is specified all bits are relevant PF Nexus A 16 bit unsigned value range 0 to 3999 representing 3 decimal places of accuracy BCD Binary Coded Decimal A number is expressed as a sequence of decimal digits and then each decimal digit is encoded as an 8 bit binary number For example decimal 92 is encoded as 00001001 00000010 The following data types can have their length specified by the Number of Registers to Request setting Packed BCD A number is expressed as a sequence of decimal digits and then each decimal digit is encoded as an 4 bit binary number nibble For example decimal 92 is encoded as 1001 0010 ASCII A sequence of bytes representing the ASCII character set Each word stores two ASCII characters Trailing spaces are removed ASCIl Reverse Same as ASCII except every second character is in the reverse order Page 300 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Configuring Logging and Calculation Use the Configure Logging and Calculation utility to perform additional Modbus device configuration including Screen Overview Select this check box to Configuring Logging and Calculation enabling register logging including setting log frequency enabling low minimum high maximum and mean average calculations and logging configuring stale data settings appending downstream devi
87. saves your changes to the diagram and applies your changes to the node To save the active node diagram select File gt Send amp Save To save all open node diagrams select File gt Send amp Save All Closing a Node Diagram To close the node diagram s Select File gt Close to close the active diagram or Select File gt Close All to close all open diagrams and windows Page 199 Display M ode versus Edit Mode PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide If you attempt to close a diagram without saving your changes Designer displays a warning with a list of the modules affected You can then do one of the following Click OK to return to the diagram and save your work before closing the diagram Click Close Anyway to discard any unsaved changes and close the diagram A NOTE If you reopen a diagram containing unsaved changes Designer may list the unsaved changes as offline modules Display Mode versus Edit Mode There are two display modes in Designer which affect how you navigate a node diagram Whether or not the toolbox is shown indicates the mode you are in if the toolbox is open you are in edit mode if it is closed you are in display mode Display mode allows you to view the node diagram without making changes To prevent accidentally moving or deleting modules or links use Display mode when navigating node diagrams In Display mode single click grouping objects to open associate
88. select all the items or Clear Selected to clear all Click Apply to save your changes or Cancel to discard your changes Click OK to save your changes and close the dialog box Page 51 Editing Duplicated Device Information PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Page 52 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Chapter 3 Management Console Tools Management Console tools are additional programs that help you manage and monitor your ION Enterprise network In This Section Introduction on page 54 User Manager on page 55 License Manager on page 60 Reporting Configuration Manager on page 61 Event Watcher Manager on page 62 Diagnostics Viewer on page 66 Device Upgrader on page 71 Remote Modem Setup on page 74 Virtual Processor Setup on page 75 o o o Time of Use Editor on page 80 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Page 53 Introduction Introduction PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide The following programs are available in ION Enterprise and can be started through the Management Console s Tools menu User Manager allows you to configure ION Enterprise user login names access levels and passwords License Manager allows you to upgrade your software license to provide additional device client and software support Reporting Configuration Manager allows you to set up options for Web Reporter Dat
89. set up an ActionSet to execute an operating system command when the alert is received You can specify attributes for ActionSets Ifthe Channel attribute is used in the ActionSet for example lt ActionSet Channel COM1 gt then the actions commands listed in the ActionSet are executed for all alarms coming through the communications port and modem specified for that Channel i e COM1 Ifthe Location attribute is used in the ActionSet then the actions commands listed in the ActionSet are executed for all alarms originating from the specified Location regardless of Channel Ifno attribute is specified then the actions commands listed in the ActionSet are executed for all alarms originating from any communication port or location If there are two ActionSets one specifying a Channel attribute the other specifying Location attribute then the one that specifies the Location attribute takes priority A NOTE The value of the Location attribute is specified in the Location setup register of the Alert module for the meter that is sending the alert For details refer to Alert Module description in the ON Reference 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Setting Up the ION Alert Monitor Commands i e command lines that run separate applications such as net send contained in the ActionSet can
90. supplied 100 ms Energy Usage by Shift System Configuration EN50160 Event History Tabular EN50160 Mains Signaling 1EC61000 4 30 Trend Energy Cost Load Profile Energy Period over Period Power Quality 100 ms Use the 100 ms report definition to create a report of selected 100 ms measurements The report displays timestamped values for each 100 ms measurement selected EN50160 EN50160 is a set of power quality standards used by certain energy suppliers and energy consumers There are two default report definitions available EN50160 and EN50160 Mains Signaling The EN50160 definitions use the following types of data from devices supply voltage dips temporary overvoltages supply voltage unbalance harmonic voltage interharmonic voltage frequency and magnitude flicker and short and long term interruptions A NOTE To run EN50160 reports in Web Reporter the ION Power Quality Aggregation Service must be started This service is run by default only on new data To run the service on pre existing data see Running the ION Power Quality Aggregation Service Manually on page 193 EN50160 Use the EN50160 report definition to create a report containing comprehensive analysis of all EN50160 compliance data logged by multiple meters The compliance summary is based on the EN50160 limits for each observation period each default EN50160 measurement indicates a pass or fail on the compliance t
91. symbol on the right provides access to the module s output and setup registers Input ower Meter We a 4 Output A register is a type of memory bank that stores a module s linking and configuration information Each module uses two types of registers Output registers store data that has been processed by the module such as numeric values event log entries and waveform data Setup registers store the module s configuration information Both types of registers serve as storage locations for the module Viewing Output Register Information Output register information includes the module s available output registers the real time values of the output registers and the owners of the output registers Each of these can be accessed from the output symbol located on the right side of the module icon Frequency Viewing Available Output Registers Click the output symbol Viewing the Real time Values of Output Registers Press the SHIFT key and click the output symbol Viewing the Owners of Output Registers Right click the output symbol This displays an output register s owners so you can identify all dependent modules on the node and determine the purpose of each dependent module This is useful when determining the effects and consequences of deleting a module 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Page 239 Viewing Setup Register Information PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guid
92. tha cee tea a be eae abe seas 266 Scheduled Jobs 2 2 0 20000 kes soe ee0 RG Aa Raa SRSA ved ededs 267 Scheduled Archive 0 000i ccc ee ene nee n nent n eens 268 Scheduled Maintenance 0 ccc ccc ene n ene n eens 270 Scheduled Trim 4 sta j e0d ts ess staat aes E whale d Benes Beets 270 Scheduled Backup vi si sdicti sta ed Aa added eee aA ae aaa ale 271 Optimizing Database Query Time 00 cece cece cece 273 Leos WSOPE seian o aane BEE IK EE E AEE ela celeovsraderiotinns 274 Accessing the ION Database with 3rd Party Applications 275 Modbus Device Importer cssccsssscssssesssresssrrees 277 INtrOAUCHON asarana nnas e a EE E EREE EAEEREN 278 ION Object Descriptions 2 cee cece eee cece eens 281 Managers cero 3c seein als n a Rho Saba De Meal ss tins Bhd Sones aS 281 MO dttlesy os r eed oa ance ie ete ota te eg aaa iee tars ceri De Sea ae ib a toe 281 INC SISESIS A reret e ei vats tes Haat Stee Sond Then lt cree reset chads wees EEA 281 Main Console Screen ccc c ccc cece ccc ee etre eee ee ceees 283 Main Toolbar si fois tes sheila cts ccoliads N RRA ss ehh eh tet test 284 Pile Menine see 8 Gee dub Sed ap ec a he a r AA a Gide Gynt Seer ehwatan aah dhe aes 284 FAREMU k Sica Sch be oy le ae te eens Ada cer eld RUGS Red dad 284 View Ment 5 38538 TEE EEE E E E E EE ee 4 eee at EE by E 286 Tools MeN ee Ses os arene ee ts teow Ce AA A ee TERE RAA A tee 287 Settin
93. that you have defined seasons and special days for the sub schedule 1 Inthe navigation pane select the season for which you want to define day groups The Define DayGroups tab appears in the tab display pane 2 Click Add The Add a DayGroup dialog box appears If the Add button is unavailable there are no free days to add to a day group A day can only belong to one day group To add another day group you must first remove days from an existing day group 3 Type a name for the day group 4 Select one of the following options Day of week Select the check box es for the day s you want to include A day can belong to only one day group if a day is unavailable it already belongs to an existing group If all days are unavailable you can only include special days in this group unless you remove days from another day group Special Day s Only Select the special day in the Include Special Days list then click to select or clear the day Days with a check mark beside them are included in the day group You can only include a special day in one day group 5 Click OK The name is added to the day group list Page 86 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Configuring TOU Names and TOU Periods Editing a Day Group 1 Onthe Define DayGroups tab select the day group you want to change then click Edit The Edit a Day Group dialog box appears 2 Make the changes you requi
94. the Scheduled Jobs window Right click on a database and select the task you want to edit or Right click on Scheduled Jobs and select the task you want to edit The scheduled task s dialog box appears See Scheduled Archive on page 268 Scheduled Trim on page 270 and Scheduled Backup on page 271 for information on editing these scheduled tasks A NOTE You cannot configure scheduled Maintenance tasks Page 267 Scheduled Archive Scheduled Archive Page 268 PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Viewing History for a Scheduled Task To view the history of a scheduled task right click a database select Job History then select the task for which you want to view the history The Scheduled Job History window appears GE ION_Network BACKUP Job Scheduled Job History x job outcome 30 2008 1 00 01 AM Step 1 Full backup and removal of specified old backups 3 0 2008 1 00 01 AM job outcome 30 2008 1 00 01 AM Step 1 Full backup and removal of specified old backups 3 0 2008 1 00 01 AM job outcome 3 00 00 AM Step 1 Full backup and removal of specified old bac 3 job outcome M Step 1 Full backup and removal of specified old backups 3 9 2008 1 00 00 AM job outcome 3 8 2008 1 00 02 4M Step 1 Full backup and removal of specified old backups 3 8 2008 1 00 02 AM job outcome 3 8 2008 1 00 02 4M Step 1 Full backup and removal of specified old backups 3 8 2008 1 00 02 AM d
95. the Scrolling Graph dialog box where you can set the Sample Interval and Relative Reset The sample interval determines the resolution of the X axis in seconds It should be set between one tenth and one hundredth of the X axis range for example when extending the range to one hour 3600 seconds the sample interval should be set to approximately 60 seconds The relative reset is a percentage that determines the amount the scrolling graph shifts back upon filling the plotting area For example a relative reset of 0 5 shifts back 50 a relative reset of 0 99 scrolls the most smoothly Customizing the Display of a Status Object Status objects display the status of Boolean on off conditions in one of three ways an indicator light an alphanumeric field or a custom image To view the display options of a status object right click on the object then select the Display tab amp NOTE To invert the default color scheme select Invert active state from the Annunciation tab The Display tab has three options Select Default image to display the default indicator light image which changes color to indicate various conditions by default green indicates an OFF condition red indicates an ON condition and gray indicates a status object that is not connected or is not receiving information Select Custom images to use custom images for each condition Custom images can show animation customized buttons alarm m
96. the dropdown list select the way in which you want to display the sources i e device type group name etc Click the and to expand and collapse items in the navigation tree Click the check box beside a device or group of devices to select it Click Select All or Select None in the top right corner to select or clear all the check boxes Page 183 Saving a Report with its Inputs Defined PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide When you are finished selecting devices click OK THD Baseline Type the THD Baseline if the default is not appropriate for your needs Title Type a title for the report in the text box Unbalanced Baseline Type the Unbalanced Baseline if the default is not appropriate for your needs Voltage Baseline Type the Voltage Baseline if the default is not appropriate for your needs Saving a Report with its Inputs Defined After you display a report you can save a version of the report with some or all of these inputs included For example you may want to always generate an Energy Cost report for a certain number of devices for the previous month When you save the report you can save it with the inputs for the devices and time period predefined See Saving a Report on page 185 for more information Generating a Report Viewing a Report Page 184 To generate a defined report a report saved with all inputs defined and saved select the report from the repo
97. the filter results you want you can stop typing For example to filter out DST from disturbance in System Log Events you only need to type di Using the Filter Builder The Filter Builder is an advanced data filtering tool Use it to create filters with multiple conditions across multiple columns To use the Filter Builder 1 Right click a column header and select Filter Editor The Filter Builder dialog box appears 2 Specify the filter conditions The elements of the filter builder are lt Column Header gt lt Condition gt lt Value gt Click an element to display the options available then select the option you want to use E Filter Builder x iW And i Or 1E Not And ii Not Or Add Condition Add Group Clear All 3 Select the lt Column Header gt and the lt Condition gt you want to apply Type the lt Value gt to test for To add another filter click the button on the top 4 5 Select a logic to apply to this new filter in relationship to the current filter 6 Repeat step 3 7 To remove a filter click the delete x button beside it In the following example the filter finds all devices whose names contain FL1 and whose types begin with ION Page 25 Grid Table Controls Page 26 gt Filter Builder xi Name Contains FL1 Type Begins with ION n Cancel Apply al The rows returned are as
98. the node column of a device to display its user diagram Displaying an Event Log Viewer ne Click an Event Log Viewer object in your user diagram The Event Log Viewer appears W Meter Events User Diagram 7600_FAC 4WYE_ 1 3 0 timestamp priority cause_ion cause_value effect_ion effect_value 4 Mp 25 Ethernet Time Change Clock 1 Time Changed 25 Ethernet Time Change Request Clock 1 Time About to be Changed 25 Ethernet Time Change Clock 1 Time Changed 25 Ethernet Time Change Request Clock 1 Time About to be Changed 25 Ethernet Time Change Clock 1 Time Changed 25 Ethernet Time Change Request Clock 1 Time About to be Changed 50 V1 Fick Plt Limit Exceeded V1 Fick N1 Incremented 25 Ethernet Time Change Clock 1 Time Changed 09 22 37 822 PM 25 Ethernet Time Change Request Clock 1 Time About to be Changed 10 47 00 000 AM V2 Fick Plt Limit Exceeded V2 Fick N1 Incremented V1 Fick Plt Limit Exceeded V1 Fick N1 Incremented 12 22 39 919 PM Ethernet Time Change Clock 1 Time Changed 12 22 35 014 PM 25 Ethernet Time Change Request Clock 1 Time About to be Changed 2 21 22 405 PM 25 Ethernet Time Change Request Clock 1 Time About to be Changed Ethernet Time Change Clock 1 Time Changed Ethernet Time Change Clock 1 Time Changed Ethernet Time Change Request Clock 1 Time About to be Changed Ethernet Time Change Clock 1 Time Changed Page 102 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterpri
99. they communicate through a modem RS 232 RS 485 or Ethernet to Serial gateway connection You must have the appropriate sites configured first before you can add serial devices Ethernet Devices Ethernet devices are those that are directly connected to the network via Ethernet You can manually connect or disconnect your Ethernet device through the Management Console OPC Devices OPC devices provide data in OPC format You must have an OPC site configured to add an OPC device Dial Out Modems A dial out modem is one that a server computer uses to communicate with a remote modem at a modem site The modem implemented can be a traditional hardware based modem or it can be a software based modem that uses the computer s processor to emulate a traditional hardware based modem When a modem site needs to establish communications it selects a modem from the list of modems configured in the modem site You can add hardware modems or WinModems to the modem list A NOTE A WinModem is a modem that is directly controlled by the computer s operating system Connection Schedules Connection schedules are programmed routines for a server to regularly connect to and disconnect from sites and their associated devices and Ethernet devices See Configuring Connection Schedules on page 39 for more information System Log Events System Log Events lists events for the network You can select what timeframe and components
100. thousands separator and decimal point use the Regional Settings option of the Windows Control Panel You can also use this option to customize the time and date styles The year month day format can be modified and the clock can be changed from am pm to 24 hour Setting Display Style The Display style box lets you select a new style from the list of available choices The following styles are available 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Display Options kW tot 219 8 kW tot 219 8 2000 800 1200 0 kW tot 219 8 kw tot 219 8 kW tot 219 8 0 Alphanumeric Partial Dial Full Dial Horizontal Bar Vertical Bar kW tot 219 8 3 19 2007 04 01 59 147 PM kW tot 219 8 jane Timestamp with value s woo kW tot 3 19 2007 04 01 59 147 PM 0 2000 Timestamp only dia mia a eea kw tot 219 8 PC 3 19 2007 04 00 58 468 PM Scrolling Bar Arc Meter PC Timestamp Alphanumeric Default style General use text display Partial Dial General use voltage current harmonic distortion etc Full Dial Power factor bi directional power flow etc Horizontal Bar General use Vertical Bar General use OOO Scrolling Graph Display General use Displays recent readings on a scrolling graph Arc Meter Display General use voltage current harmonic distortion etc
101. up the process of linking ION modules Typically linking ION modules involves connecting the output register of one module to the input of another In many cases only one of the module s inputs have the same register class as the selected output register If autolinking is enabled Designer automatically selects the appropriate input and establishes the link If necessary it overwrites an existing link This relieves you from having to manually select the input however it also prevents you from seeing what input you are linking to By default autolinking is disabled You should only use autolinking if you are thoroughly familiar with all the inputs and output registers of the modules you are working with to ensure you do not inadvertently create undesirable links Page 217 Linking ION Modules on the Same Node PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Enabling Autolinking To enable autolinking select Options gt Enable Autolinking A check mark beside the option indicates it is selected Disabling autolinking To disable autolinking clear Options gt Enable Autolinking Linking ION Modules on the Same Node If the selected node is a meter such as the ION7650 the process of configuring the node primarily involves creating links between modules on that node A NOTE To cancel a link in progress click anywhere in the background of the window or press the ESC key Page 218 Linking Modules Using the Point and Click
102. updated within this time period it is considered expired and is removed HTTPRefreshInterval 10 seconds The webpage refresh rate ae ipti i to find WebReach relat SubscriptionObject orliteim webreachsiore Wa name tag that the subscription service uses to find WebReach related intormation i ted Vist VirtualDirectory ION The part of the web address that points to the WebReach generated Vista diagrams for displaying in the browser XMLRefreshlnterval 3000 milliseconds The real time data update rate on the webpage This table lists the optional registry entries you can set for custom functionality Optional Registry Entries Default Setting Description This value specifies the network diagram to display as the homepage for x pml diagrams ud WebReach The value can be a relative path such as the default setting or it can NetworkDiagram network dgm be an absolute file path e g D customdiagrams ud networkB dgm This value determines how long WebReach waits for the results of a query to return from the database before timing out If this registry entry is not created or no QueryTimeout value is specified WebReach times out after 60 seconds QueryTimeout See description This optional registry entry is useful if you know that a query will take more than 60 seconds to return its results and you do not want WebReach to time out before then Specify a value that gives you enough time to get your query resu
103. with a single Tariff period To create anew TOU schedule 1 Click Manage in the TOU Schedule section of Step 2 The TOU Schedules dialog box appears 2 Click New The TOU Schedule Properties dialog box appears with a blank TOU schedule with a single tariff Use the lefthand pane to select the item you want to edit then use the righthand pane to enter modify or set the values Z NOTE If an existing configured TOU Schedule appears in the list you can use it as a template to create a new one with similar On Peak Off Peak periods See Copying an Existing TOU Schedule on page 328 3 Select New TOU Schedule then use the TOU Schedule Name box to rename it for example 2007 TOU Schedule Page 327 Creating a Report Page 328 PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide 4 Select Tariff 1 to display the Tariff Details on the right pane then use the Name box to type a name for it for example Off Peak Use the rate boxes kWh kW etc to enter the tariff rates 5 On the left pane click the beside the tariff to expand it Select the text underneath it All Day Every Day to display the Tariff Period fields Use the From and To boxes to set a time range and a date range for the tariff period To create another tariff period select the tariff period you just configured then click New to add a new tariff Set the time range and date range for this new tariff period
104. you are interested in Then right click in the display window area or on a network component to display the shortcut menu The menu items available vary depending on the network component selected New displays the options available for adding new network items Duplicate creates one or more copies of a selected item A NOTE For the Duplicate command each one of the duplicates needs to be opened individually in order to configure them Duplicate and Configure allows you to create and configure multiple devices at the same time Duplicate and Configure lets you perform batch cloning of devices When multiple devices are selected this right click shortcut becomes Configure Selected Devices which lets you perform setup functions such as batch renaming of devices Delete removes the selected items Connect and Disconnect let you manually connect to or disconnect from the selected site Page 29 The Management Console Interface PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide A NOTE You cannot connect or disconnect an individual serial device in a site you can only connect or disconnect the site for that serial device Connect Ethernet and Disconnect Ethernet let you manually connect to or disconnect from the selected Ethernet device Security accesses the Meter Security Settings dialog box This is used by the software to gain access to security enabled devices e g ION8600 or ION7650 it is only available
105. 0 AM Note that the disk usage monitor starts at 7 00 AM and takes only a few seconds to complete Right click Scheduled Jobs or ION_SystemLog and select Trim to display the Scheduled Trim dialog box Ensure that Schedule enabled is selected if you want to enable the scheduled trim The System Events database has the scheduled trim task configured and enabled by default Changing the Schedule Click the Change button in the Schedule section The Edit Schedule dialog box appears where you can reconfigure the frequency and time of the scheduled trim The Edit Schedule dialog box differs depending on what you select in the Occurs section 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Scheduled Backup 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Scheduled Backup Daily Set the frequency in days For example to set the trim to occur every seven days set the frequency to 7 Weekly Set the frequency in weeks and select the days of the week on which you want the trim to occur You can select multiple days of the week For example to set the trim to occur every two weeks on Monday and Thursday set the frequency to 2 and select Monday and Thursday from the list of days Monthly Set the frequency then select Fixed Day or Relative Day to set the day of the month on which the trim occurs Frequency Depending on your version of SQL Server click Select Months to sele
106. 007 0 LOGINSER 255 PowerMeasurt Object refer ALARM 718 ES J 0 RACK P765 200 Sag Swell 1 Disturbance E 51 DistStat Normal 03 28 2007 0 guest 7 16 Ga 7 ORACK P765 200 Sag Swell1 Disturbance S 51 DistStat Disturbance 03 28 2007 0 guest 716 E 03 22 2007 0 LOGINSER 255 PowerMeasurt Collection cf ALARM 6 13 8 03 22 2007 0 LOGINSER 255 PowerMeasurt Collection ci ALARM 6 13 E J 0 RACK P765 200 Sag Swell1 Disturbance E 551 DistStat Normal 03 28 2007 0 guest 487 10 03 18 2007 0 RACK P765 200 Sag Swell 1 Disturbance 5 551 DistStat Disturbance ALARM 486 w n 7 GF Tip To temporarily hide the Global Event Log Viewer clear View gt Show Global Event Viewer You are not notified of any alarms while the Global Event Log Viewer is hidden If you want to continue to be notified of alarms you can minimize the Global Event Log Viewer rather than hiding it 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Acknowledging Alarms Acknowledging Alarms 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Every type of event has a prioritized value that identifies its relative significance on a scale of 0 zero to 255 By default Vista identifies any event with a priority of 128 default or greater as an alarm The event record is highlighted in red and identified under the ack_time column as ALARM The cause_value column lists the source of the alarm and the effect_value
107. 09 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Scheduled Jobs Scheduled Jobs Database Manager has a number of preconfigured scheduled tasks most of which are configurable and enabled by default See the following table for details Database Enabled by Scheduled Task Default Default Time Configurable ION database ION_Data 12 00 am 1st Saturday of every third month or Archive No of every quarter depending on the version of Yes SQL Server ION Enterprise is using Backup Yes 12 00 am Friday Yes Maintenance Yes 2 00 am daily No Network Configuration database Backup Yes 1 00 am daily Yes ION_Network Maintenance Yes 7 30 am daily No System Events database Trim Yes 1 30 am daily Yes ION_SystemLog Maintenance Yes 7 05 am daily No 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Viewing Schedule Information To view schedule information For all databases right click on Scheduled Jobs and select Schedule Information or Fora specific database right click on the database for which you want to view information and select Schedule Information The Scheduled Jobs window appears This window lists the following information for scheduled jobs database name job type whether or not the job is enabled the last run date and the next run date Editing Scheduled Tasks To edit a scheduled task Double click a scheduled task in
108. 1 035 274 883 280 31 102 548 296 108 236 5 258 81 89 472 273 843 277 472 92 008 292 215 240 2 261 499 89 394 276 379 279 894 102 634 296 559 244 6 250 242 83 904 263 947 272 501 91 157 287 078 4 Each Data Log Viewer displays data as a table of columns and rows Each labeled column contains a single type of data and each numbered row represents a single data record Plotting a Range of Data from the Data Log Viewer You can plot data from a Data Log Viewer in the Log View Plotter 1 QF Highlight the cells containing the data that you want to plot The range of data can be selected in one of three ways To graph trends for all parameters over a particular time span select a group of rows To graph the trend for a specific parameter using all available records select the entire column To graph multiple parameters over a specific time span click on the first cell in the desired range then drag to highlight the last cell of the range Select Edit gt Plot Selected Data or click W The Log View Plotter window appears displaying a graphical representation of the selected data See Plotting Logged Data on page 108 for more information TIP To quickly plot a single waveform double click on its waveform symbol in the Data Log Viewer Copying a Selection to Another Application 1 2 Highlight the cells containing the data that you want to copy Select Edit gt
109. 2003 _ SQL Instance Databases ION_Data ION Network _ Databases ION_SystemLog El Scheduled Jobs ION_Data ____ Scheduled Jobs ION_Network Trim Maintenance Job History gt Schedule Information I Show Archives SQL Server Instance The default SQL Server instance that ION Enterprise uses for its databases is named COMPUTERNAME ION where COMPUTERNAME is the name of the server where the database resides Databases Use the Databases section of the tree to view information about the databases or to perform manual tasks For information on the manual tasks you can perform see Manual Tasks on page 260 Page 256 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Database Manager Interface Viewing Database Properties To view the properties of a particular database right click on that database and select Properties The properties listed are Size The current size of the database Primary File Location The file path for the primary database mdf file Transaction Log Location The file path for the transaction log ldf file Creation Date The date and time when the database was created Last Backup Date The date when the last backup was performed gt Disk Space Available The amount of free
110. 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Creating a Report Date Range Select the date range you want to use for your report Ask for Date Range when report is generated prompts you to supply a date range when the report is run interactive mode Pre specified Date Range lets you select a specific period For example select Last Month to set Reporter to run the report using data from the previous month Select Fixed Range to specify a start and end time date Select Custom Relative Range to specify a date range relative to the current time and date A NOTE In applications where a report is generated based on a power quality system event or similar setpoint condition specifying Custom Relative Range can include data that shows how the system was behaving before the event occurred Distribution Select any or all of the Distribution options you must select at least one Show report on screen is selected by default this displays the report on screen each time the report is generated Clear this box to disable displaying of the report Save Excel report to folder stores the report in the folder you specify using the Browse button Save HTML report to folder saves an HTML version of the report in the folder you specify using the Browse button Note that there are certain elements and behaviors in the HTML report that may appear differently from the original Excel report This is due to the HTML c
111. 3 User connection e Schedules 3 24 2009 1 38 12 000 PM DIAGNOSTIC LOGINSERTER TECHPUBS YM2003 Computer General TECHPUBS M2003 Started 3 24 2009 1 37 57 000 PM DIAGNOSTIC TECHPUBS M2003 SiteServer Computer General TECHPUBS M2003 sitesery started su f 3 24 2009 1 37 57 000 PM INFORMA TECHPUBS M2003 Router Computer Conn TECHPUBS M2003 User connection e g 3 24 2009 1 37 56 000 PM INFORMA TECHPUBS YM2003 Router Computer Conn TECHPUBS M2003 User connection e 3 24 2009 1 37 55 000 PM DIAGNOSTIC QUERYSERVER TECHPUBS YM2 Computer General TECHPUBS M2003 Started Systm Log 3 24 2009 1 37 19 983 PM INFORMA Real Time Data Service Computer Confi TECHPUBS YM2003 Started 3 24 2009 1 37 19 110 PM_INFORMA Real Time Data Service Computer Confi TECHPUBS M2003 Tcp TECHPUBS 3 24 2009 1 37 13 000 PM INFORMA TREEMON TECHPUBS M2003 Computer General TECHPUBS M2003 Validator caught 4 3 24 2009 1 37 13 000 PM INFORMA TECHPUBS M2003 Router Computer Conn TECHPUBS M2003 User connection e 3 24 2009 1 37 06 000 PM INFORMA TECHPUBS M2003 Router Computer General TECHPUBS M2003 Network Router st 57 Event s Displayed q lt m Er Select All Deselect All QF Tip For instructions on filtering and sorting columns and customizing the display see Customizing and Navigating Interface Displays on page 22 Viewing System Log Events To view System Log Events 1 Select System Log
112. 50 652 7100 295 Tech Park Drive Suite 100 Lavergne TN 37086 USA Tel 1 615 287 3400 Electropole 38 EQI 31 rue Pierre Mend s France F 38050 Grenoble C dex 9 Tel 33 0 4 76 57 60 60 Getting technical support Contact your local Schneider Electric sales representative for assistance or go to the www powerlogic com website ION ION Enterprise Modbus Modicon Power Measurement PowerLogic and Schneider Electric are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Schneider Electric in France the USA and other countries All other trademarks are property of their respective owners Electrical equipment should be installed operated serviced and maintained only by qualified personnel No responsibility is assumed by Schneider Electric for any consequences arising out of the use of this material 70002 0298 00 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved 06 2009
113. 7 04 30 00 000000 AM 235 48 Cursor 2 03 28 2007 04 45 00 000000 AM 225 87 Delta 900 000000 9 62 Min 225 87 Max 235 48 dpeak 9 62 Avg 225 867000 RMS 225 867000 Int H 56 466750 Each parameter is plotted in a different color The legend identifies the color of each curve in the selection and what it represents Click on a curve to select it or right click on it to display additional options The timestamp at the top of the tab identifies the first point in the selected curve The vertical axis y axis represents the specified range the horizontal axis x axis represents time Vista automatically adjusts the scale of the y axis and x axis to accommodate the largest parameter s in the selection Right click on either axis to change the scale of its properties right click on the axis numbers to change their format The time unit indicator in the lower right corner identifies the time scale of the x axis for example h indicates an hourly scale Possible time scale units include months days hours minutes and seconds Zooming in on the Plot Display Tab To zoom in on the Plot Display tab click on the Zoom button P then drag a selection box around the area you want to view To view the entire plot click the Restore to 100 button fj Page 112 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Viewing the Plot Display Tab Cal
114. 70002 0298 00 06 2009 PowerLogic ION Enterprise 6 0 Power management software User guide Schneider Notices This section describes the symbols used in this guide Danger gt Caution z me e R7 BFS This alerts you to things that may cause serious injury to a person Only qualified properly trained personnel should perform these procedures This alerts you to things that may cause loss of data damage to your computer or your device A note provides you with additional information that you might want to consider This draws your attention to information that can help you perform a task more quickly or easily Documentation Conventions This section describes the terms used to describe common methods or procedures used throughout this guide Clear Place the mouse cursor over the check box then click the mouse button to remove the check mark from the box Click Place the mouse cursor over a button or item then press and release the mouse button Double click Place the mouse cursor over a button or item then press and release the mouse button twice Drag Hold down the mouse button while moving the mouse cursor to highlight the selection or move the selected item then release the button Enter Type the information then press ENTER on the keyboard Hover Move the mouse cursor over an object i e a button and pause over the obje
115. 91 Register Properties Defined Page 292 PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Z NOTE The register label string has a maximum character limit of 50 including spaces Keep this in mind especially when creating labels for downstream devices since they may require additional space in the label name Make this Register a Constant Value If this check box is cleared then the ION register is mapped to a Modbus register and when viewing it in Vista you see the real values from the meter If this check box is selected then it is set to a constant value You can use a constant value to hold dynamic constant values device identification or other values ION Setup Register You can configure any register to be an ION setup register Setup registers do not appear in the Vista register list unless you select to view the setup registers A NOTE This does not affect the read write capabilities of a valid Modbus register it is a feature specific to Vista Data Type This data type is used for decoding the values returned from the meter The selected data type format must match the format delivered by the device Each supported data type is explained in Additional Information on page 299 Register Type This is a convenient way to change the Modbus register type It only changes the most significant number in the Modbus address to correspond to the specified register type This register type must match the register typ
116. Click OK to add the component Configuration Dialog Box Shortcut Menus Right click the Configuration dialog box to access the following shortcut menu options Property Details This opens a window that contains information on the selected property including minimum and maximum allowable values if applicable Advanced Properties This exposes all the property fields that are hidden in the default basic view Reset All To Default Resets all properties to their original values Click the Servers icon right click in the display window and select New gt Computer Fill in the mandatory Name field Page 33 Setting Up Devices for Direct Serial Communications PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Setting Up Devices for Direct Serial Communications To set up devices for RS 232 or RS 485 communications on a direct serial loop first add a direct site in Management Console and specify a serial communications port on the computer Step1 Adding a Direct Site Click the Sites icon Right click in the display window and select New gt Direct Site Fill in the Name and Serial Port fields Configure the other fields as you require Step 2 Adding a Device to the Direct Site Click the Devices icon Right click in the display window and select New gt Serial Device on Direct Site Fill in these fields Group Type a name for the group or select an existing group from the list Name Type the name you want to give the device
117. Communication Status vs Site Status This section explains the difference between the statistics provided on the Communication Status tab and those on the Site Status tab Total Errors in the Communication Status tab is an ION Site Service derived statistic while Bad Responses in the Site Status tab is a client derived statistic To explain this difference consider a situation where a direct site is experiencing timeouts Communications with the device is attempted according to two parameters Connect Attempts an advanced site property in the Management Console and Maximum Attempts Multiple an advanced device property in the Management Console Multiplying the values of these two properties determines the number of attempts made to re establish communications with the device For instance if Connect Attempts is set to 1 and Maximum Attempts Multiple is set to 3 the device will go offline after 3 attempts i e 1 x 3 The Total Errors statistic increases by one every time ION Site Service detects a timeout However the Bad Responses statistic only reports a problem if the device goes offline i e when Connect Attempts and Maximum Attempts Multiple are exceeded Using the previous example consider the case where four timeouts occurred and the device went offline In this case Total Errors increases by four while Bad Responses only increases by one If only two timeouts occurred Total E
118. Components on page 14 ION Enterprise Services on page 16 ION Enterprise Databases on page 18 Starting a Component of ION Enterprise on page 19 Logging into a Component of ION Enterprise on page 19 Ending a Session on page 19 Additional Information on page 21 o Customizing and Navigating Interface Displays on page 22 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Page 13 ION Enterprise Software Components PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide ION Enterprise Software Components This section outlines the ION Enterprise software components and how they are used to build monitor maintain and customize your ION Enterprise system Monitoring Applications These ION Enterprise programs are most commonly used in day to day power management tasks Vista The Vista component of ION Enterprise displays graphical representations of your power monitoring system Vista displays real time and historical information visual objects that indicate the current status of your system and interactive objects that you can use to perform certain actions such as acknowledging alarms A NOTE In this document Vista refers to the Vista component of ION Enterprise The Microsoft Windows Vista operating system is referred to as Windows Vista WebReach The WebReach component of ION Enterprise displays Vista user diagrams in a web browser Web R
119. Configure Stale Data Settings dialog box Mark data stale after Enter the time you want to elapse before data from this register is marked stale in the data recorder The valid range is 0 to 7200 seconds When data is stale Select how you want stale data values logged The setting log an empty row logs an empty row in the data recorder while use last known value logs the last non stale value in the data recorder until the end of the current interval amp NOTE Stale data settings are global they apply to all registers 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Page 303 Configuring Downstream Device Functionality PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Configuring Downstream Device Functionality You must select the Show downstream device columns check box before you can edit downstream device functionality The screen appears as follows Select this check box to make the downstream Is Downstream Downstream Include Name device columns appear Device Device of Device E Confie Logging and Calculation Select rows in the grid beld IW Show downstream device columns Use the Editors below the grid to configur the selected rows All Interval Is Downstream Downstream Device Include Name of Device z Fore eea a nnn VoltsB MeterO1 300 K Meter01 m VoltsC MeterO1 900 J Meter01 m zI i D Register All L
120. Copy or click This copies the selection to the Windows Clipboard Switch to another application and paste the selection Page 101 Using the Event and Global Event Log Viewers PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Using the Event and Global Event Log Viewers Events and alarms that occur in your system are recorded by the meter and transferred via Log Inserter to the database Vista provides two ways to view event records stored in the database The Event Log Viewer displays events and alarms from the device s represented in the active user diagram Use it to monitor low priority events and alarms associated with the active user diagram The Global Event Log Viewer displays events and alarms for your entire system Use it to monitor high priority events and alarms for the entire system The Global Event Log Viewer operates independently of any user diagram The difference between the Global Event Log Viewer and the Event Log Viewer is essential when setting up alarming The Event Log Viewer is associated with a single user diagram so alarms only update when the user diagram is open The Global Event Log Viewer does not require a user diagram and updates as soon as you start Vista NOTE See Using the Query Options on page 148 for information on log viewer configuration GF Tip To quickly display the user diagram for any device represented in an Event or Global Event Log Viewer double click on the node name in
121. Events from the System Setup pane 2 Select the system components for which you want to view events i e servers sites devices If there are no events for a particular system component that check box is unavailable 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Page 41 System Log Events Page 42 PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide 3 Select the minimum priority level of events to be displayed see below for more information on priority levels 4 Click Modify to change the date time filter applied to the System Events Log display See System Log Filter Setup on page 42 5 To view details of an event double click on the entry in the event log Priority Priority classifies what type of event has occurred The value corresponds to the severity of the event the higher the number the more severe the event The priority is contained in the ION_SystemLog database as a number In the System Events Log display the priority levels are displayed as text strings The priority numbers are mapped to the text strings as follows Diagnostic 0 5 Warning 21 63 Critical 192 255 Information 6 20 Error 64 191 By default the Cutoff setup register of Log Inserter s System Log Controller module is set to 192 This means that system events with a priority less than 192 are not transferred to the ION_Data database and therefore cannot be viewed in Vista using the Global Event Log Viewer If you want to view lower priority even
122. Factory Communications and Diagnostics modules are not pasted because they could disrupt the operation of the device s communications If you need to change the settings of these modules you can do so manually Copying a Node s Complete Configuration 1 Open the node diagram of the node you want to copy Ensure that you are in the main or root window of the diagram 2 Select Edit gt Select All All core modules standard modules grouping windows and text icons are selected 3 Select Edit gt Copy to framework The Copy to framework dialog box appears 4 In the File name box type a name for the framework and then click Save The framework filename extension fwn is added automatically and the complete node configuration is saved in this framework file After you have saved the source node s configuration as a framework you can paste it to other nodes of the same type This file can also serve as a backup in case you want to restore the configuration of the source node Pasting a Node s Complete Configuration into Another Node 1 Open the node diagram of the node to which you want to paste the configuration Ensure that you are in the main or root window of the diagram 2 Select Edit gt Select All Press the Delete key to remove the node s existing configuration A dialog box appears listing the standard modules that will be deleted and the core modules that cannot be deleted Click OK to continue The standard m
123. For instructions on exiting Designer see Ending a Session on page 19 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Node Diagrams and the Designer Interface Node Diagrams and the Designer Interface This section describes the components of the Designer interface and of node diagrams Toolbox Core module indicated by double border Workspace with open Be File Edit Options Window Help node diagram Menu bar Toolbar Communications Setup Demand Setu Baud Rate Protocol Period of Sub wz gt Ay a ame ee ai i to m t m 0 DNP DNP mE X r n Zlorm a Fea Meter Clock Sptup ea as a Nie Ea Ds Kii ME Be M BEMI we b Log Trigger Setup Setpoint Setup Logging Frequency Limits delays learning Time Zone DST a peee Clock 1 R hen hen 5 os erate yr Display Setup Time Of Use Setup Factory Information Ee m as ME Po Firmware Version Parameters Auto Scroll Seasonal Rates Sample TOU ION7650 Grouping object Shortcut icon Module link Module icon 4 Alert Module 1 02PM Time display Progress indicator Communication status lights The Designer Interface The Designer interface consists of a main screen with a title bar a menu bar a toolba
124. Master site to which you want to add a Modbus device Expand the tree to display Settings and Devices Select Devices then click Add Device The Add Modbus Device s dialog box appears 2 Enter the Name and Unit ID of the Modbus device in the appropriate fields For Ethernet devices set Unit ID to 100 The Name must be unique among all the sites serviced by the Virtual Processor The Unit ID must be unique inside a given site Click Add 3 Repeat the previous step to add more Modbus devices to the same site When you have finished connecting all the Modbus devices to that site click OK NOTE A Modbus device name must start with a letter followed by letters numbers and or underscores The Modbus device name must not contain spaces The supported range for a Modbus device Unit ID is 1 to 247 Do not use 0 zero as it is reserved for broadcast messages Renaming a Modbus Device 1 Select the Modbus device you want to rename Click Rename Device The Modbus Device Name dialog box appears 2 Type the new name then click OK A NOTE If you rename or delete Modbus devices all Modbus Export or Modbus Import modules that previously referred to that renamed or deleted Modbus device are mapped to not_a_valid_device when you restart the Virtual Processor Designer displays these modules as offline outlined in red Deleting a Modbus Device 1 Select the Modbus device you want to delete 2 Click Delete
125. ON Real Time Data Service Manages and provides access to real time data from the power management system Automatic ION Report Subscription Service This service manages Web Reporter report subscriptions Automatic Page 16 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide ION Enterprise Services ae Manual Service Name Description P Automatic Manages communication links to and from ION Enterprise ION Site Service is responsible for handling packet communications to system devices and controlling direct device ications i i i ion le oft ION Site Service communications The service reacts to changes in network configuration for example often Automate changes to certain channels gates ports or device parameters can interrupt a connection You can add delete or change channels gates ports and devices without restarting the ION Site Service ION Network Router Service and ION Connection Management Service Provides coordinated data collection data processing and control functions for groups of ION Virtual Processor Service meters For more information on the Virtual Processor and its functionality see Virtual Automatic Processor Setup on page 75 Manages subscriptions to XML data for Vista user diagrams This service is used only by ION XML Subscription Service WebReach When you open a Vista user diagram in a web browser the ION XML Subscription Aut
126. ON condition of a motor relay and Stopped for the OFF condition You can show this register label together with the status label using the alphanumeric display style You can override the meter labels on the Link tab Click ON Color and OFF Color to specify the colors associated with each condition Customizing the Display of a Grouping Object The grouping object can be displayed as the default image a custom image or no image You can customize the display to change any of these default elements To view the display options of a grouping object right click on the object then select the Display tab The Display tab has three options Select Default image to use the default image for a grouping object that appears in the toolbox Select Custom image to display a custom image Enter the filename of the image you want to use The filename should include the file s extension for example bmp wmf emf or avi Select None to hide the grouping object With no image specified the grouping object is transparent unless you select it displaying the handles If you move the mouse over a transparent object the status line displays the size and object type for example 30x30 Grouping Object in the status line means the hidden object is a grouping object and its size is 30 pixels by 30 pixels Hiding a grouping object is especially effective when using a custom background image you can integrate your transparent gr
127. RECORDS gt 9 j LA Column Selector E TER Drag a column header here to group by that column INFORMATION Timestamp Priority Source Description ID WV Timestamp M Priority J 3 24 2009 1 54 15 203 PM ERROR Report Subscription Service OnStart ION Web General TECHPUBS M2003 Error Starting sery VW Source s 3 24 2009 1 54 08 000 PM INFORMA TECHPUBS YM2003 Router Computer General TECHPUBS YM2003 Network Router st M Target Peves 3 24 2009 1 53 59 937 PM WARNING WebReach XMLSubscriptions DLL Computer Confi TECHPUBS M2003 There is no valid Id pao 3 24 2009 1 51 15 000 PM DIAGNOSTIC LOGINSERTER TECHPUBS M2003 Computer General TECHPUBS M2003 Shutdown Y Description ae 3 24 2009 1 39 00 517 PM INFORMA Report Subscription Service Computer General TECHPUBS V M2003 Report Subscriptio 3 24 2009 1 38 22 000 PM DIAGNOSTIC VIP TECHPUBS M2003 Computer Upgr TECHPUBS M2003 Upgrade Factory N Dial Out Modem 3 24 2009 1 38 22 000 PM DIAGNOSTIC YIP TECHPUBS M2003 Computer Upgr TECHPUBS M2003 Upgrade Module 3 24 2009 1 38 21 000 PM DIAGNOSTIC VIP TECHPUBS M2003 Computer Upgr TECHPUBS M2003 Upgrade Module 3 24 2009 1 38 21 000 PM DIAGNOSTIC VIP TECHPUBS M2003 Computer General TECHPUIBS V M2003 Initializing a new O 3 24 2009 1 38 19 000 PM INFORMA TECHPUBS YM2003 Router Computer Conn TECHPUBS YM2003 User connection e Connection 3 24 2009 1 38 12 000 PM INFORMA TECHPUBS YM2003 Router Computer Conn TECHPUBS YM200
128. Service runs in archive mode This can take a significant amount of time If you do not want to run the service on pre existing data you can still generate power quality reports on that data using Reporter see Appendix A Reporter on page 325 for more information 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Page 193 Running the ION Power Quality Aggregation Service Manually PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Page 194 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Chapter 7 Designer Use Designer to configure nodes on your network that are based on ION Architecture The node can be a software component or a hardware device amp NOTE Only nodes based on ION Architecture can be configured using Designer Designer s graphical user interface helps visualize a node s configuration You can link ION modules together to customize a node for your particular application You can also cut copy and paste functionality within a single node or between different nodes For more information on ION Architecture ION modules or ION registers see the ION Reference In This Section Getting Started with Designer on page 196 Node Diagrams and the Designer Interface on page 197 ION Module Overview on page 207 Using ION Modules on page 209 Adding a New ION Module on page 210 Deleting or Cutting an ION Module on page 211 Linking ION Modules on page 217 Configuring ION
129. Summary dialog box to review and modify the proposed changes to the node diagram The Paste Summary dialog box lists each module to be pasted and indicates its destination in the node For each module this box provides a short summary of the proposed modification as well as a more detailed description of how the module is pasted or why it cannot be pasted as requested Page 233 Copying and Pasting ION Modules Page 234 PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide B Paste Summary x Here is what will happen in the paste v AAA ERRE Ext Bool 7 Will be created M kw swd SWinDemand 1 SWinDemand 21 Will be created M Over kw swd Setpoint 5 Setpoint 1 Will be created M Power Meter Power Meter will not be affected Details Over kW Enble Ext Bool 11 gt Ext Bool 7 You have asked to free paste this module ION Designer will attempt to create this module X J7 Maintain external inputs Cancel The following sections describe the various areas of the Paste Summary dialog box Source The Source column lists each module that was copied to the clipboard or framework Each source module is listed by its default label unless a custom label has been specified in which case the default name appears in brackets after the label Select a module in this column to view additional information in the Details box at the bottom of the dialog box Destination The Destination column indicates where the copy of ea
130. U schedule you need to 1 Adda schedule See Adding or Editing a Schedule on page 81 2 Adda sub schedule if you need more than one sub schedule See Adding or Editing a Sub Schedule on page 82 3 Adda season if you need more than one See Configuring Seasons on page 83 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide 7 Adding or Editing a Schedule Configure special days i e holidays to include in your TOU schedule See Adding Special Days on page 85 Add day groups if you need groups other than the default day groups See Configuring Day Groups on page 86 Add TOU names if you need names other than the default names See Defining TOU Names on page 87 Assign TOU periods to TOU names Defining TOU Periods on page 88 To view a sample schedule right click in the navigation pane and select Import Schedule Select SampleSchedule tou from the ION Enterprise system etc folder and click Open Adding or Editing a Schedule This section describes how to add a blank schedule and import or copy an existing schedule 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Adding a Blank Schedule 1 2 Select File gt New Schedule The Add a Schedule dialog box appears Type aname and description for the schedule Click the arrow beside the effective date to bring up a calendar where you can select the effective date of the schedul
131. You can use the Paste Summary box to review your changes and make modifications as necessary Z NOTE The lock paste option in the Paste Summary box instructs Designer to overwrite existing destination modules as necessary Use lock paste with caution to avoid accidentally overwriting required modules See Using the Paste Summary Dialog Box on page 233 for more information Pasting ION Modules into a Node Diagram 1 Open the window where you want the modules to go Click in the background of the window to clear any selected modules 2 Doone of the following To paste a selection from the clipboard select Edit gt Paste To paste a selection from a framework select Edit gt Paste from Framework In the Paste from Framework box select the file you want and then click Open 3 The Paste Summary dialog box appears Use the Paste Summary box to review the proposed changes see Using the Paste Summary Dialog Box below for more information When you are satisfied with the summary click OK to complete the procedure The selection is pasted into the active window The entire selection is automatically selected so you can easily move it to a clear area in the window All module icons in the selection appears as pending until you click Send amp Save to save the changes to the node Using the Paste Summary Dialog Box Before Designer pastes a selection it displays the Paste Summary dialog box Use the Paste
132. a 0 cece 164 Viewing Meter Events sorena saa rasai aa KEE EERE A RTEA EREN SAA 166 Adding a Global Event Log Viewer seris iretiinpritit triti kedaS E PRIR 166 Stale Data or Error Indicators 00 0 eee eens 167 Advanced WebReach Configuration eee e cece cece eee 168 Custom Network Diagram Setup 0 6 66 c cece eee eens 168 WebReach Registry Settings 2 0 6 6 cnet 169 Troublesh ohing sesei aaa aaran anarias he Bk a BW acts oe ate 170 Web Reporter eesseessoesseessoessoesseesooesoeesoessoesseessosesees IZT Infroduction sse aaeeei sia stg Stan SE oo e a oh r aaa 172 Reporting Configuration ss essees sesno rrre rnrn rnern eens 172 Web Reporter Interface o o cece cece cece eee teen cease 173 Report Definitions s soccero sortaa ia kaka AES D 175 Default Report Definitions 6 ccc cece cee 175 Creating a New Definition from a Default Report Definition 179 Generating and Viewing a Report cece eee eee eee 180 Report Ownership and Access oseese erir EE ccc EARE ERRES 180 Entering Report Inputs ieena in c cc cece eee eee ete A 180 Saving a Report with its Inputs Defined 00 e cece ee 184 Generating a Report arra i a eens 184 Viewing a Report mepri ai eE aes Vee Ses i Dee Rhee Renee se Mies 184 Printing a Report ei eandtie bhai ease eG eae Be Pee aE Yee ba Renee 185 Saving a Report Ea ou de bei ved onan s deh chee oa A R 185 Exp
133. a from waveform recorders You can select any data displayed in a Data Log Viewer and plot it as a graph or copy it to another application for example Microsoft Excel where you can perform advanced calculations or include it in a report A NOTE See Querying the Database on page 148 for information on log viewer configuration Displaying a Data Log Viewer Click on a Data Log Viewer object in your user diagram The Data Log Viewer appears 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved W Main Keating_7600 User Diagram 7600_FAC 4WYE_ 1 3 0 Using a Data Log Viewer kw tot mean timestamp KVAR tot mean kVA tot mean kW tot high kVAR tot high kVA tot high Kw 00 000 230 719 87 27 246 713 257 202 102 922 272 783 217 1 234 953 89 187 251 333 259 776 101 116 277 514 219 2 03 15 00 000 243 108 87 965 258 54 260 256 100 622 278 926 221 9 00 00 000 266 496 88 515 280 822 284 193 101 754 301 023 239 6 45 00 000 262 837 85 959 276 549 284 077 92 887 298 24 245 1 02 30 00 000 268 021 97 17 285 097 288 052 101 876 305 035 248 7 7 02 15 00 000 271 257 98 469 288 582 290 808 100 828 307 778 257 0 257 574 91 311 273 289 283 248 110 32 303 471 240 1 262 245 94 492 278 756 279 757 100 335 296 092 242 4 260 692 94 545 277 313 275 462 106 613 291 95 248 4 259 347 93 264 275 61 273 52 95 472 289 537 248 6 259 358 9
134. a Pa Pa Bd Pa When the waveform is displayed you may need to zoom in to view the area of the waveform you are interested in To zoom in drag a selection box around the area you are interested in Page 118 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Adding Parameters to a Log View Plotter Adding Parameters to a Log View Plotter 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved After you have created a graph and the Log View Plotter window is visible you can add additional parameters to the graph by copying and pasting them into the graph These parameters can be copied from the same data log viewer a different data log viewer or from a different Windows application such as Microsoft Excel The x and y axes are automatically re scaled to accommodate the new parameters When adding waveforms to the log view plotter you can correlate all of their trigger times See Customizing Graph and Legend Options on page 124 for more information Adding Data from a Data Log Viewer You can add additional parameters from any data log viewer configured to provide compatible time based data Any added parameter is plotted using the same x axis used by the existing curves To avoid confusion ensure that the column you selected for your x axis in the data log viewer from which you are adding data contains the same parameter typically a timestamp as the original data log viewer Adding Additio
135. a typical query configuring a Data Log Viewer to display waveforms for three phases V1 V2 V3 Step 1 Selecting the node s The Available list displays the available nodes device or software and the Selected list displays the currently selected nodes Select a node or nodes for your query If anode has already been specified or you select Use Parent Node on the Query tab the Query Wizard proceeds directly to Step 2 Specifying logs 1 Click Edit Query on the Query tab of the Log Viewer Configuration dialog box to start the Query Wizard 2 Highlight the name of the node that you want from the Available list and click Add The node appears in the Selected list Repeat this procedure to add additional nodes for this query if required If you want to remove a node from the Selected list highlight the node and click Remove The node disappears from the Selected list 3 Click Next to continue Page 150 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Using the Query Wizard A NOTE If you want to view or edit a node s SQL statement directly highlight the node in the Selected list and click the SQL button The Windows Notepad displays the SQL statement for the specified node Step 2 Specifying logs Specify one or more data logs to query If a valid query has already been specified the Query Wizard proceeds directly to Ste
136. abase ION_Network stores information about your network topology the network connections computers and every connected device including dialout modems This information is used by the communications services e g ION Network Router Service ION Site Service and other software components to manage data and control requests to and from the devices and the other ION Enterprise components i e Vista Designer The System Events Database The System Events database ION_SystemLog stores data about events that occur during the operation of ION Enterprise components For example the event details about the communication service s interactions with devices details about controls initiated through Vista and general or alarm level events that occur in the Virtual Processor are all inserted into the System Events database These can then be viewed when you click the System Log Events icon in Management Console or through access to the ION_Data database using Vista Event Log Viewer ION_SystemLog is not backed up Some contents of the System Log System Events with a priority of 192 or greater are automatically inserted into the ION_Data database on a regular basis and can be viewed in Vista The ION Database The ION database ION_Data contains all the information collected from devices that have the ability to record data and from ION Enterprise components This database uses the ION Log Inserter Service to gat
137. abase Manager allows you to perform and schedule maintenance tasks on your ION Enterprise databases See Database Manager on page 255 Designer allows you to configure devices and add custom functionality to them see Designer on page 195 Diagnostics Viewer provides detailed records of all system and network events as well as communication states and problems Device Upgrader allows you to upload new firmware to network meters or devices Remote Modem Setup allows you to configure dialup modems that will be used at remote power management networks ION Virtual Processor Setup allows you to configure the ION Virtual Processor Service for user programmed functionality Modbus Device Importer allows you to add Modbus devices to the ION Enterprise network see Modbus Device Importer on page 277 Event Watcher Manager allows you to set event conditions to report on and link those conditions to devices Time of Use Editor allows you to define a time of use schedule that is used by selected reports such as Energy and Demand Commands for Optional Components Page 54 The Update OPC Server and PQDIF Exporter commands appear in the Tools menu if these optional components were purchased with ION Enterprise or activated later using the appropriate upgrade software license See the OPC Server Assistant and PQDIF Exporter documentation for more information on these features 2009 Schneider Electric All rights res
138. able logging of the register Interval This value determines the logging frequency for the register Note that this value also controls the reset interval for the min max and averaging modules even if these calculations are not being logged The valid range is 1 to 4 000 000 seconds 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Configuring Low High and Mean Calculation and Logging Configuring Low High and Mean Calculation and Logging To edit the suffix used for Low High and Mean click on the applicable link For example if you change the suffix to Maximum VoltsA High becomes VoltsA Maximum Low Select Calculate to enable calculation of low minimum values for this register Select Log to enable logging of this value Note how the label is appended to reflect that this is the low value High Select Calculate to enable calculation of high maximum values for this register Select Log to enable logging of this value Note how the label is appended to reflect that this is the high value Mean Select Calculate to enable calculation of mean average values for this register Select Log to enable logging of this value Note how the label is appended to reflect that this is the mean value Configuring Stale Data Settings The staleness of data is measured from time data was last read from a physical device until the current time Click the All Stale Data link to open the
139. about your report template such as revision history To insert a line break hold down CTRL and press ENTER Previewing the Report To see what the report will look like without saving or distributing it click Preview Click Back To Report Generator button to return to the main Reporter window Modify the settings if necessary Otherwise click Finish to save your report and return to the main Reporter screen Generating a Report 1 On the main Reporter screen select Generate Reports 2 Select the name of the report you want to run If you want to view its option settings click Summary Click OK to close the summary window 3 Click Generate A window displays the progress of the report generation 4 Click Close to view the report Modifying the Finished Report Page 330 This describes how to edit the Microsoft Excel presentation sheet for your report 1 On the main Reporter window select the report you want to modify then click Preview 2 Use the Presentation Sheet to create references to elements in the data sheets that you want to include in the final report Use Microsoft Excel s data analysis and charting tools to process the information in the data sheets then add the appropriate references to the presentation sheet A NOTE The company name that appears in the report is the Company name entered when Microsoft Excel was installed on the computer 3 Lay out and format the elements as you wa
140. aced a module in a node diagram you can configure the various setup parameters of the module It is not necessary to do this before you link the modules but you should ensure the module is set up correctly before sending the configuration to the node Module setup parameters include the module s label its setup registers labels and values and its output register labels To access these right click on the symbol in the center of the module icon id m The ION Module Setup dialog box appears ION Module Setup Setup Registers Dutput Registers DEMO Module Label Use Default Label Use Custom Label Power Meter OFC Modify ox Cancel The Setup Registers box lists all the setup registers of the module along with their current values or settings To change any of the settings or assign a custom label to a setup register select the register then click Modify or double click on the register The Modify Register dialog box appears where you can make modifications In most cases configuring a setup register is a simple matter of entering a number entering text or choosing an option from a list To determine the options or ranges available for a setup register refer to the module s description in the ION Reference When you have completed all your modifications to the module click OK to return to the node diagram The module icon appears pending until you send and save your chang
141. ag a Text Box object H from the toolbox onto the node diagram A text box appears in the diagram with the default message Your text goes here 2 Right click on the text box to replace the default text with your own text The Text Box Configuration dialog box appears 3 Select the Edit Text tab then do one of the following To display the name of the node in the text box select Use Default To display your own message select Use Custom and type your text into the field provided 4 Click OK The text box displays your specified text Resizing a Text Box To resize a text box 1 Select the text box 2 Doone of the following To make the object larger or smaller drag a corner handle To stretch the object horizontally or vertically drag a middle handle Changing the Font of a Text Box The font size and style of the text used in the text box is based on the default setting specified for the active window If you want to use a different font you can specify a new font for the text box 1 Right click on the text box The Text Box Configuration dialog box appears 2 Select the Text tab 3 Inthe Font section do one of the following To use the font specified for the parent window select Inherit from parent window To use a different font select Custom then click Font The Font dialog box appears Specify a font style and size Click OK to continue 4 Click OK 2009 Schneider Electri
142. age 180 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Entering Report Inputs voltage for each duration and depth presented in the dialog box before the component is considered non compliant Short and Long Interruptions Type the maximum percentage of intervals in an observation period that the RMS value can be less that 1 of the nominal voltage for the given duration before the component is considered non compliant Temporary Overvoltages Type the maximum percentage of intervals in an observation period that the RMS value can exceed the nominal voltage by each magnitude for each duration presented in the dialog box before the component is considered non compliant A NOTE The EN50160 standard defines the observation period for the above components as one week Event Priority Select the priority level s of the alarms or events that you want report on Flicker Baseline High Type the Flicker Baseline High if the default is not appropriate for your needs Flicker Baseline Low Type the Flicker Baseline Low if the default is not appropriate for your needs Frequency Baseline High Type the Frequency Baseline High if the default is not appropriate for your needs Incident Interval Select the incident interval that you want to use in the report i e 20 seconds 10 minutes 1 week Include Data Warnings Select whether o
143. agram objects are configurable graphic icons that display your system information Each diagram object displays a single piece of information from somewhere in your power monitoring network In some cases diagram objects are stored within grouping windows Grouping object In some cases a user diagram stores related information within a grouping object Click on a grouping object to open a grouping window and display its contents A NOTE To configure a grouping object to open a grouping window see Specifying Action for Numeric Status or Grouping Objects on page 142 Grouping windows are a type of folder or sub window that contain diagram objects Vista uses grouping windows to logically organize diagram objects within a user diagram When closed a grouping window is usually represented by a grouping object icon User diagram contains diagram objects and grouping objects User Diagram nes Ioi x Diagram object Keating Prodfction BLDG_A_FL1 Click a grouping oT object to open its grouping window GF Tie It is better to use grouping objects to open other user diagrams rather than to open grouping windows Large numbers of grouping windows in a user diagram can slow the performance of Vista 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Page 93 Vista User Diagrams Page 94 PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide You can create as many user d
144. al l l O kW Y unbal l Vin average vat mron ovm ven Oy 0 kVAR Status Bar kerage I average kVA total l i l v DA 0 kva l i olts In a E Pwa Logs Long term min max Click this grouping object to open another window containing more data Device Time 3 25 2009 12 35 23 591 PM Device Type 7650 Data Log Viewer Toolbar The toolbar offers quick access to the commands that are used most frequently Each command on the toolbar is also available from the menus Page 90 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved The Vista Interface Restore to Up One Open Zoom 100 Cut Paste Level Save Fit to Plot Copy Layout Help Window Selected Data Zoom Select View gt Zoom In or click the Zoom button to change the mouse pointer to a crosshair Use this pointer to drag an outline around the area you want to enlarge Restore to 100 Select View gt Restore to 100 or click the Restore to 100 button to return to the normal view Fit to Window Select View gt Fit to Window or click the Fit to Window button to force the user diagram to fit in the current window Up One Level Select File gt Up One Level or click the Up One Level button to return to the previously displayed window Note that this also closes the current window If you want to be prompted when you reach the t
145. ample if you have linked the Vlna output register of a Power Meter module to a Thermal Demand module and in turn linked the ThrmDemand output register to a Maximum module you may want to label the Maximum module s output register as Va TD Maximum instead of using the default name of Maximum 1 1 Inthe ION Module Setup dialog box select the output register in the Output Registers box and then click Modify The Modify Label dialog box appears 2 Do one of the following To create a custom label select Use Custom Label and then type a name for the label in the box To use the default label select Use Default Label 3 Click OK to return to the ION Module Setup dialog box Customizing Boolean ON OFF Labels If the output registers of the module are Boolean you can create custom labels to associate with the ON and OFF conditions of these registers These labels can clarify exactly what the ON or OFF conditions represent For example if a Boolean output register is used to switch a fan on and off you could create a Boolean ON label called Fan Running and an OFF label called Fan Not Running 1 Inthe ION Module Setup dialog box select the Boolean output register and then click Modify The Modify Boolean Register dialog box appears 2 Doone of the following To create custom labels select Use Custom Labels and then type names for the Register Label ON Label and OFF Label in the appropriate boxes T
146. an action clear the check box beside the option Updates Setting the Time Interval Data that is not updated is considered stale data Vista detects stale data as it occurs and identifies it with a colored border around the diagram object the default color is yellow On the Updates tab you can specify how often Vista updates the data displayed the interval of time Vista uses to detect stale dataVista The Updates tab has two sections Update Period allows you to specify how often data in that window is refreshed Stale Data allows you to specify whether data is highlighted and how old data must be to be considered stale NOTE The Update Period and Stale Data settings also apply to WebReach Changing the Update and Stale Data Settings 1 Right click in the background of the window select Properties The Window Properties Configuration dialog box appears Select the Update tab 2 Enter a numeric value in seconds in the Update data period or Stale data timeout fields to set the intervals 3 Select or clear the Highlight stale data check box to enable or disable checking for stale data 4 Click OK to save your changes To change the color of the stale data border close the Window Properties Configuration box then select Options gt Flag Colors In the Flag Colors box click Edit beside Stale Flag Color to display a dialog box where you can select a different color Page 159 Configur
147. and Pasting ION Modules Page 232 PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Z NOTE After you have saved a framework it can be used in another node diagram as long as the node supports the modules included in the framework Although it is possible to create a framework from one node type and use it with another node type it is advisable to restrict your use of frameworks to nodes of the same type Copying a Group of ION Modules to a Framework 1 Select the group of module icons you want to copy 2 Select Edit gt Copy to Framework The Copy to Framework dialog box appears 3 In the File Name box type a name for the framework then click Save The framework filename extension fwn is added automatically and the selection is saved as a framework file After you have copied a group to a framework you can select Edit gt Paste from framework to paste it into a node diagram Pasting ION Modules You can paste a saved copy of one or more modules into any node diagram Designer offers two ways to paste modules Paste inserts a selection that has been placed on the clipboard using the Cut or Copy command Paste from framework inserts a selection that has been saved as a file Pasting modules is a little more complicated than copying them because the action of adding modules to the node may require you to replace existing modules Whether you choose Paste or Paste from framework Designer displays a Paste Summary dial
148. ange click Refresh If you want to print a copy of the text view information click Print When you are finished viewing the text view information click Close Creating a Shortcut to an ION Module Page 214 To save time switching between modules in different windows create a shortcut icon in one window that represents the original module in the other window A shortcut icon is identified by a 2 symbol in the lower left corner of a module icon Creating a Shortcut Icon Hold down SHIFT CTRL then drag the module icon s to the window where you want to place the shortcut s After you have created a shortcut icon you can use it in the same way you use the original module icon Both icons support the same features However if you delete the shortcut icon the original module icon is not deleted whereas if you delete the module icon it deletes all shortcuts to that module A NOTE You cannot create more than one shortcut icon per window for a single module 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Adding a Text Box to a Node Diagram Adding a Text Box to a Node Diagram You can place a text box anywhere in a node diagram and move it or resize it as necessary You can use a text box to describe any process or function in your system for example you can label individual components of your system or display a block of descriptive text or instructions Adding a Text Box 1 Dr
149. ange is from 100 to 60000 milliseconds A NOTE For Ethernet sites the protocol used is Modbus RTU which does not identify packets Therefore specifying too small a value for Receive Timeout may cause timeout errors which could result in packet mix up Specify a value that avoids timeouts 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Page 76 PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Configuring the Virtual Processor s Modbus Service Baud Rate serial sites only The Baud rate used for Modbus communications to serial sites Supported values are 300 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 Parity serial sites only This setting specifies whether or not parity is active and if it is active the type of parity i e Odd Even Mark or Space Parity refers to a technique of checking whether data has been lost or overwritten when it is moved from one place in storage to another or when transmitted between devices and or computers Stop Bits serial sites only The number of stop bits supported by the site Supported values are a minimum of 1 1 5 and 2 Stop bits signal the end of a unit of transmission on a serial line Data Bits serial sites only The number of data bits i e bits that contain information or data supported by the site Supported values range from a minimum of 4 and a maximum of 8 Adding Modbus Devices 1 Select the Modbus
150. aption tab contains three sections Caption Font and Position The Caption section determines whether a diagram object displays a textual comment along with the diagram object s icon This section has three options Select None to display no caption Select Use default to display the default Vista caption i e the device name or data source Select Use custom to display the text that you type into the field provided The Font section allows you to change the font used in a caption This section has two options Select Inherit from parent window to use the default font Select Custom to specify a custom font Click Font to display the Font dialog box and change the font size style or color The Position section has two options Select Top to place the caption above the diagram object Select Bottom to place the caption below the diagram object Some diagram objects have a text label integrated into the display To edit the appearance of this label use the options offered on the Text tab The Text tab is available for the following diagram objects Numeric Status Control and Text A NOTE You can edit the text displayed in a text label For a numeric status or control object use the Label section of the Link tab For a text box object use the Edit Text tab To view the Text options right click on the object then select the Text tab The Text tab has two sections Font and Position The Font section
151. archive For the Start Date select The beginning of the database or select Date and enter a date and time Enter a date and time for the End Date 6 Select whether or not you want to trim the database after the archive When you select a start date for the archive procedure instead of using the beginning of the database the option to trim the live database is disabled even if you selected the trim option before you set the date range 7 Click OK The Progress field displays the current progress of the archive task If a manual archive fails a message appears and the Database Archive dialog remains open with the OK button grayed out you can examine the Progress field to discover where the task failed If the archive is successful the dialog box closes automatically Page 261 Attach Attach Backup Defragment Detach Page 262 PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Use this task to reattach a detached database 1 Stop all ION Enterprise services 2 Right click Databases then select Attach The Attach Database dialog box appears 3 Click the browse button to navigate to the database that you want to attach Specify a name in the Attach as field 4 Click OK Restart ION Enterprise services Use this task to create complete backups for the ION_Data ION_Network and ION_SystemLog databases 1 Right click on Databases ION_Data or ION_Network and select Backup The Backup Database dialo
152. ard modules that have been converted to core modules These modules are created at the factory and can never be removed from the meter frameworks Persistent modules are represented by icons with single borders An example of a persistent module is External Pulse module 1 on the ION8600 meter This module pulses when the Demand Reset switch is pressed on the meter 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Using ION Modules Using ION Modules 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved You can change the function of a node by editing the appropriate module s in the node diagram and linking modules together This section describes how to locate an existing module how to add anew module and how to delete a module It also explains how to create a shortcut to a module and how to view the contents of a module in text format After you have located or added the module you want you can configure it using the procedure described in Linking ION Modules on page 217 Using the ION Modules Toolbox The ION Modules toolbox is a collection of ION modules and generic tools that you can add to a node diagram To display the ION Modules toolbox select Options gt Show Toolbox B Jas Mnbeles x oon The type and quantity of modules offered on the toolbox varies depending on the type of node you are configuring however the generic tools the grouping and text ob
153. asingle measurement for multiple sources Creating a New Definition from a Default Report Definition 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved You can create a new report definition by copying one of the existing default definitions To create a new report definition 1 Click File gt New The New Report from Definition dialog box appears Click to expand the navigation tree to view the default report definitions 2 Select the report definition you want to copy and click Next 3 Type a name for the new report definition in the Name field Select a location for the new report definition from the navigation tree or click New Folder to create a new folder 4 Click Save The new report definition is added to the report definitions in the report selection pane Page 179 Generating and Viewing a Report PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Generating and Viewing a Report This section describes how to generate and view reports Report Ownership and Access Access to a report is user specific and can be assigned by a user with supervisor level access or the owner of the report The owner of the report is the user who saved the report see Saving a Report on page 185 Entering Report Inputs Some reports require that you enter inputs such as the date range of data to be included in the report When this is the case the report parameter input area displays when you select a report from the report sel
154. at the top of the pane Report Options This bar located above a generated report allows you to Create a subscription to the report See Adding a Subscription on page 188 for more information Navigate through pages of the report See Viewing a Report on page 184 Print the report See Printing a Report on page 185 Export the report in formats such as PDF Excel and TIFF See Exporting a Report on page 186 Report Parameter Input Area This area of the report display pane appears when you select a report that requires you to enter inputs The inputs vary depending on the report selected See Entering Report Inputs on page 180 for information on the inputs for default reports After generating the report you can click the show inputs or hide inputs links in the top right corner of the report display pane to show or hide the report parameter input area 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Report Definitions Report Definitions This section outlines the default report definitions included with Web Reporter and how to create a new definition by copying one of the existing default report definitions Default Report Definitions 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved The default report definitions are preconfigured for the most common reporting needs The following is a list of the default report definitions
155. ate through the tree view by clicking on the specific objects or by using the arrow keys on the keyboard When the application is started or the File gt New menu is selected a default configuration is loaded The only object included in the default configuration is the factory manager and associated registers By default you cannot specifically see the factory objects so a blank template is displayed 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Page 283 Main Toolbar PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Main Toolbar File Menu Select File on the main toolbar to access the following menu items New Creates a new blank map file Open Opens an existing map file Save Saves the current map file template and the corresponding ION tree file template Save As Lets you save the current map template to a different location Exit Closes the program The File menu also lists the most recently opened device templates Edit Menu You can add new objects by either right clicking in the ION Map Information pane or selecting the appropriate option from the Edit menu Objects are placed either as children or siblings For example you may add a new manager to the device sibling of an existing manager or anew module to an existing manager child of a manager The same relationship applies to modules and registers New Manager Adds anew manager Adding a New Manager 1 Click Edit gt New Manager The Add New Ma
156. ater When you select Edit gt Copy to framework Designer copies the layout linking and configuration information of each module in the selected group It saves the framework as an fwn file You can then use the Paste from framework command to paste the group in another node diagram You can use frameworks to simplify the process of programming multiple devices with similar configurations For example if you wanted to program a single function into several nodes you could program the first node and then copy the configuration to a framework You could then quickly program the other nodes by simply opening their node diagrams and pasting the framework you created You can also use frameworks to program an entire node at once considerably reducing the amount of time required to set up a large installation Before you save a group of modules as a framework consider carefully which modules you want to include If you include core modules in your framework you will not be able to paste them unless you overwrite the existing core modules that correspond to those in your framework Another approach is to select the modules downstream of the core module and save them as a framework Then when you paste the framework into another node diagram you can use the Maintain External Inputs option to preserve your links to the original core modules See Using the Paste Summary Dialog Box on page 233 for more information Page 231 Copying
157. ation dialog box appears 2 Select the Link tab The Link tab contains two sections Link and Label Use the Label section to define a label for the diagram object see Link Options on page 135 for information on the Label section and use the Link section to choose a real time source 3 Select one of the following Inherit from parent window The selected diagram object defaults to the same node used by the parent window the window in which the object resides You must specify a real time register within the node but the node itself is pre selected Custom Allows you to select a new node Select ION to choose a different device than that used by the parent window 4 Click Edit Link The Create Link dialog box appears 5 Specify a node manager module and output register Double click the node in the Nodes box that contains the data source you want If you chose Inherit from parent window in step 3 the node is preselected Double click the manager you want e g Power Meter modules from the Managers box Double click the module you want from the Modules box e g Power Meter Double click the output register you want from the Output Registers box e g Vl avg Page 146 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Linking a Diagram Object to a Data Source 6 Click OK in the Create Link dialog box to save yo
158. ator toggle a relay reset a counter or adjust the value of an analog output device To add a function to a user diagram choose the type of diagram object you want drag it into the user diagram then link it to the appropriate register in a node The following sections explain how to add and link a diagram object See Monitoring Your System in Vista on page 96 for more information on the function and basic use of each type of diagram object Adding a Diagram Object to a User Diagram 1 Select Options gt Show Toolbox if the toolbox is not displayed The toolbox appears in the workspace 2 Click on the diagram object you want and drag it from the toolbox to the diagram In most cases the object appears in the window as the icon from the toolbox However there are two exceptions A text box appears in the window as a rectangular box that displays the default message Your text goes here A numeric object appears in the window as a rectangular box with a only colon This indicates that the object is not yet linked to a node The object is now ready to be linked to a real time or logged data source See Linking a Diagram Object to a Data Source on page 146 for details on linking an object to a source NOTE When a diagram object is placed in a window it automatically uses the same node as the window If you want to change this source either relink each diagram object or change the default wind
159. ault appearance of a control object depends on the function it has been configured to perform a a Boolean Pulse Numeric Regardless of their appearance all control objects are used the same way to use a control object click it A NOTE For information on configuring the message appearance and access level of control objects see Customizing the Action for a Control Object on page 143 and Customizing the Display of a Control Object on page 141 When you click on a control object one of the following happens depending on how the control object is configured Vista performs the specified action immediately Vista displays a confirmation message Click Yes to proceed or No to cancel the operation Vista requests a password Type your logon password then click OK to proceed Depending on the function a dialog box requesting the meter password may also appear If so type the meter password then click OK to proceed Page 107 Plotting Logged Data PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Plotting Logged Data This section describes how to use and customize the Log View Plotter to view logged data in a graphical representation Use the Log View Plotter to graphically show trends in numeric data display logged waveforms display phasor diagrams and perform harmonics analysis on waveform data You can also plot Sag Swell voltage disturbances and compare them to industry standard voltage tolerance curves
160. ay the harmonics of more than 16 parameters at a time Viewing the Phasor Diagram Tab Page 116 If you have plotted waveforms for all three voltages and or currents of your system you can view this information as a phasor diagram The phasor diagram graphically displays the three phases voltages and or currents showing their relative magnitudes and angles You can use a phasor diagram to evaluate important aspects of your power system such as voltage balance per phase loading and type of load or generator operating mode A phasor diagram also provides a way to identify PT or CT wiring problems A NOTE The timestamp at the top of the Phasor Diagram tab is based on the time of Cursor 1 on the Plot Display tab To display a phasor diagram select the Phasor Diagram tab from the Log View Plotter window Log iew Plotter Main Keating_ 600 User Diagram 7600_fac 4wye_v 1 3 0 pq Plot Display Harmonics Analysis Phasor Diagram I1 Analysis Start 03 12 2007 04 48 34 279 AM 1 Cycle 90 TT Calculations Log View Plotter V1 Positive seq 344 48 0 17 V1 Negative seq 2 00 51 26 V1 Zero seq The Phasor Diagram and calculations are derived from a one cycle window starting at Cursor 1 on the Plot Display tab The magnitude and angle of the selected phase is displayed in the Calculations window 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Gui
161. bal Parameters eu E Er EA E 252 Chapter8 Database Manager ccsscsssscssssssssscssssessssessssess 255 Database Manager Interface 0 cece eee eee eee eeeeee 256 Common Database Management Procedures 20000 258 Detaching then Re attaching Databases 0 c cece eee eee 258 Chapter 9 Attaching a Database Using Database Manager rrr 258 Restoring an ION Database from a Backup 00000 0s eee 259 Ma al Tasks oeeaaeaii sah a So Sd os Sala oste Ae Tolar a Sah 260 Alarm Configurations s aV sith eva vieu adatom dead aaa das ils 260 AT CHIVE dno wetted ake Sok Piet be E Bee E LA AE RE ie Se OS 261 Attachi s 5 25 Ses beats Bile faye Spb go a ES a6 Tate ashe GNE HR BSD CELEB Wad Sotelo SaaS 262 Backups aona i te cei 3 25 Se beeen a at a eh SE 262 Defragment orei eg earns thi Ce eee cas 4A ae 262 Petach sus cscde teas eee wesc hil Ges eee is Te ee oan dd 262 Export Registry Setting 2 6 aiora cence eens 263 Modify Log veror t easiest aioe 44 sii ee awa Mian 4 ans eed i 263 New ION Databases 0 c ccc cence e nent n teen nes 264 REStOLE oss eel ea hae eee EEG ER WAG Ve ee ee HE ERAS See EES 264 COU H Ait etninen eee esa eine ee eee DEE eee eee 265 PAIN fe tue a See se Soe yl Rte SRY See Ao Hi A acta a Ae Soe REAL ballet PEO 0 Rt 265 Update Statistes EA tad ei stk ek etek died E RENAR ERRETEN ERRA 266 Upgrade Database os iii tak ees
162. c All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Monitoring Your System in Vista Changing the Flag Settings for Stale Data To change the flag color 1 Click Options gt Flag Colors 2 Click the Edit button for the flag color you want to change select the new color and click OK Identifying Errors in Communication Vista detects errors such as disabled devices security access restrictions or configuration errors and identifies these with a colored border around an object orange by default The border color can be customized see previous section Changing the Flag Settings for Stale Data Position the mouse pointer over an object that Vista is indicating has an error to display a ToolTip that explains the error Page 97 Viewing Real Time Data PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Viewing Real Time Data Vista uses numeric objects and status objects to display real time data Numeric objects display real time numeric values and status objects display real time Boolean ON OFF information Viewing Data with Numeric Objects Vista uses numeric objects to display real time numeric data from your power monitoring system Numeric objects can display many types of data such as line voltage or current power or energy levels harmonics or demand parameters Depending on their configuration numeric objects can display data in different formats alphanum
163. c All rights reserved Page 215 Adding a Text Box to a Node Diagram Page 216 PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Changing the Position of the Text To change the position of the text in the text box 1 2 3 4 Right click on the text box The Text Box Configuration dialog box appears Select the Text tab In the Position section select Left Center or Right Click OK Adding a Border or Background Color to a Text Box To add a border to a text box or change its background color 1 2 3 Right click on the text box The Text Box Configuration dialog box appears Select the Box tab Do one or more of the following To add a border select Show in the Border section and click Color to select a border color To set the width of the border type a border width in the Width in pixels field in the Border section To add a background color select Custom in the Background Color section and click Color to select a background color Click OK 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Linking ION Modules Linking ION Modules Linking ION modules together is the foundation of programming ION compliant nodes in ION Enterprise Although an ION module can perform a function in isolation the strength and flexibility of the ION architecture comes from the ability to interconnect modules to build more sophisticated functions Choosing which ION Modules to
164. c ION Enterprise User Guide Firmware Upgrade Error Codes Firmware Upgrade Error Codes The following table describes the various error codes that may occur when you upgrade your device s firmware Error Code Description 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 or 9 Indicates a negative acknowledgment to a request Contact Technical Support for assistance 100 Device timed out while downloading firmware Probable causes a poor communication or b the device stopped functioning 101 102 103 104 105 Indicates a bad response to a request Contact Technical Support for assistance Device Upgrader was unable to prepare the device to accept new firmware Try to upgrade the device again 106 Contact Technical Support for assistance if the problem persists 107 Device Upgrader was unable to verify the device s new firmware Try to upgrade the device again Contact Technical Support for assistance if the error persists 108 Device Upgrader was unable to download a firmware packet Try to upgrade the device again Contact Technical Support for assistance if the error persists 109 Device Upgrader was unable to retrieve the device framework Probable causes a time out or b device not functioning 110 Device Upgrader was unable to retrieve the device s firmware revision Probable causes a time out b device not functioning or c cannot access the device s firmware revision register Device Upgrad
165. cal Source This identifies the name of the physical device e g a Modbus Master device or the Virtual Processor that is performing the data logging for a downstream device Measurement This column displays either the ION label e g VIn avg or the descriptive name of the measurement e g Average Voltage Line to Neutral depending on the setting in the Options dialog box see Downstream Device Assistant Options on page 318 Additional Columns in Advanced View Only Updated Measurement This lets you redefine what is currently assigned in the Measurement column Click the cell to display the list of measurements to choose from Depending on the setting in the Options dialog box you can select from a list containing only the most common measurement definitions or from a complete list of all available measurements see Downstream Device Assistant Options on page 318 This column displays a measurement s register handle either in hexadecimal format or decimal format Handle depending on the setting in the Options dialog box see Downstream Device Assistant Options on page 318 Entered By This identifies which user made a change to the source measurement definition Update Historical Database The Update Historical Database check box is automatically selected after entering changes in the Updated Assigned Source or Updated Measurement cell This means that all historical database en
166. cal cursor lines at either end of the curves in the Log View Plotter These cursor lines define the start and end points used by the Calculations window By default Cursor 1 is located on the leftmost point of the selected curve and Cursor 2 on the rightmost point To define a new start point drag Cursor 1 along the curve to the new start point Repeat this procedure with Cursor 2 to define a new end point You can also use the arrow keys to move the active cursor left or right The active cursor is identified by asmall box that appears where the cursor line meets the curve Use the TAB key to switch the active cursor between Cursor 1 and Cursor 2 As the cursor line moves from point to point along the curve the information in the Calculations window is updated You cannot drag Cursor 1 past Cursor 2 or vice versa Page 113 Viewing the Plot Display Tab Page 114 PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide De indexing Parameters and Specifying Y offsets If you are plotting multiple parameters with different magnitudes the lower magnitude values may be difficult to see in the default graph Vista allows you to index any parameter to a different axis that can be scaled and offset independently from the other axes The new axis automatically assumes a scale appropriate for the selected parameter In this way you can plot parameters of different magnitudes on the same graph such as voltage and current De indexing a Parameter or Of
167. cations Page 250 The Virtual Processor can be used to create numerous analysis recording and control functions This section describes three common Virtual Processor applications Event Driven Report Generation using Reporter Data Aggregation Logging Data from Meters The examples shown on the following pages assume that you understand the functions and options of the various modules used Refer to the ION Reference for module details See the previous sections for common Modbus and Distributed Control applications 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Common Virtual Processor Applications Example Event Driven Report Generation using Reporter The Virtual Processor can be used in conjunction with a device and the Log Inserter to generate reports in response to system events In the following example a Power Quality report is automatically generated in the event of a system disturbance Meter Log Inserter Log Acquisition Module ers aa Data Recorder Module Transient Source Module Records Processed Data Log1 El Log Monitor Module Source Virtual Processor Arithmetic Module One ShotTimer Module Setpoint Module For A A Source Source Start Formula IF S1 P1 1 gt 0 1 0 High Limit 0
168. ce see Customizing and Navigating Interface Displays on page 22 Opening Event Watcher Manager To access Event Watcher Manager select Tools gt Event Watcher Manager in Management Console Symbols Used in the Updated Column The following symbols are used in the Updated column to display the status of information in a row Information in the row has been modified since it was last saved There is an error in the information in the row The row is new since the event watcher or template information was last saved 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Creating a Template Creating a Template Before adding an event watcher you must have a template that defines the conditions to be watched You can use one of the default templates or create your own Use the Templates tab to define and edit templates amp Event Watcher Manager Lx Event Watchers Templates New Revert Updated Name Description Setpoint Event Setpoint Event Breaker Trip Event Breaker Trip Event List of ae PQ Event Power Quality Event vi wer Quality Ever templates gt Comm Loss Event Communication Loss Event General High Priority Event Any event with a priority greater than 200 Template editing area cea New Template Name Template Conditions Select From Event Log New Delete General High Priority Event P
169. ce information to labels Z NOTE Only numeric output registers can be calculated and logged All other types of registers for example enumerated do not appear on the Configure Logging and Calculation screen Click the Configure Logging and Calculation button from the main Modbus Device Importer screen to open the application The following screen appears make the downstream device columns appear Per register Stale data edit area link Low area High area Mean area Help link are Logging and Calculation Silect rows in the grid below Show downstream device columns Use the Editors below the grid to configure the selected rows Help Register All Low High Mean Label Modbus Register Log Interval Calculate Log Label Calculate Log Label Calculate Log Label 4 0 mj B g 0 VoltsB 40003 oO 900 a C YoltsB low OD voltsB high m O voltsB mean voltsC 40004 g 900 a YoltsC low voltsC high m voltsC mean Register All Low High Mean I Log Log Interval a00 al Seconds I Calculate I Calculate TF Calculate M Log M Log M Log TF Is Downstream Device o Downstream Device Name M eter01 JT Include Name of Device Instance Global register edit area Use this area to globally edit all rows selected in the upper pane 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved
170. cece teen eee eees 74 Using Remote Modem Setup 0 ccc cece eee 74 Virtual Processor Setup 0 cece ccc e eee cece eee e eens 75 Configuring the Virtual Processor s Modbus Service 0004 75 Modifying the Global Parameters 0000 c cece cece eee eee 79 Time of Use Editor of a teacis Races A ie ee ene eee ee Sas 80 Adding or Editing a Schedule 0 0 ccc ence ence nnn 81 Adding or Editing a Sub Schedule 6 666 c cece eee cece 82 Configuring S asons nci2ccua views deere seanteaue OEE EAA 83 Adding Special Days cresp tota aa wees y a3 geen sy a Saran y 85 Configuring Day Groups i 20 ceasassye Beeld dee ete Wh She A eae 86 Configuring TOU Names and TOU Periods 0 0000004 87 WISN aeeoa a T E OF The Vista Interface e550 5a ao oo oasis a a ca ii sa tae eae ear eee Ne onde 90 Vista User Diagrams 0 cece cece ee cece etre eee eens 93 Monitoring Your System in Vista cece eee eee eee eens 96 Viewing Real Time Data ccc cece eee eee cece eens 98 Viewing Data with Numeric Objects 6 sesser rererere 98 Viewing Data with Status Objects 6 eee eens 99 Viewing Logged Data cece cece cee ee eee e eens 100 Using Data Log Viewer wisn cuts Boutin ese sum ghee aan ae 100 Using the Event and Global Event Log Viewers 0 0 0 errer 102 Displaying the Global Event Log Viewer
171. ch source module will be placed in the node diagram The module label listed in the Destination column may or may not match the module label listed in the Source column If the destination module is to be overwritten it is reused otherwise the next available module is used Summary The Summary column indicates whether the source module is copied into the destination as a new module or if it replaces overwrite an existing module This column also indicates if a module will not be pasted Z NOTE You can sort the paste summary information alphabetically by source or destination or by importance of summary Click on the Source Destination or Summary column headers to sort the list by the chosen criteria Details The Details box located at the bottom of the dialog box provides more detail than the description in the Summary column When you click on a module in the Source column you can view a description of the proposed transaction in the Details box This description explains how a module is pasted or offers reasons why it will not be pasted 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Copying and Pasting ION Modules QF Tie You can create a copy of the information displayed in the Details section of the Paste Summary box To copy it use the mouse to highlight the text you want right click on the selection then select Co
172. clnterval Sox Timesynclnterval3720 Right click to create a new Device TimeSynchintervalE themet TransmitDelay UseAcknaks Mouse hover text CO StartupConnected O ByteSize StopBits Parity Enabled Name Type Address Site Protocol sti MFg a Oaa Y Mfg Load1 ION 6200 MODBUS 10 168 69 76 502 111 Gateway1 MODBUS Site Y Mfg Load2 ION 6200 MODBUS 10 168 69 76 502 160 Gateway1 MODBUS Site vY Mfg Load3 ION 7300 10 168 69 74 7802 105 Gateway2 ION Site RIKI KIRK a Devices System Setup pane 5 and icons Display window This area displays the contents of the selected system setup icon E 3 Device s Displayed Bg 2 Protocol TON oean Like Modbus And Name Like Mfg T Edi Filter lt m gt Current filter applied Edit Filter button Window Title The window title displays the name of the software program and the current user Maxattemprsm uliple M i i aiaa Select All Deselect All System Setup Pane The icons in the System Setup pane represent categories of items you can add remove set up and view Click an icon to go to the associated display window Display Window The Display window shows the contents of the item cur
173. create a new user diagram The various types of diagram objects and how to use each type to add function to your user diagram Z NOTE You must have the appropriate security clearance to edit or create a user diagram To determine if you can edit a diagram select Options gt Show Toolbox If you can select this option then you can edit a diagram Consult your network administrator if you need to change your access privileges A NOTE Any changes you make to a default diagram affect all other devices using the same diagram Creating a New User Diagram To create a new user diagram login to Vista and select File gt New A new blank user diagram appears You can only create a new user diagram if you have Supervisor level access To automatically generate a network diagram based on devices added using Management Console see Generating a Network Diagram on page 94 Saving a User Diagram To save changes you made to a user diagram 1 Select File gt Save to save a new or existing user diagram or File gt Save As to save a user diagram under anew name The Save New Diagram box appears 2 Type a name for the diagram in the File name box then click Save By default Vista points to the root of the ud directory when you attempt to save anew diagram If required you can create a new folder within that directory to store your customized diagrams rather than storing them in the ud folder A NOTE This u
174. crosoft Windows documentation Page 188 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Creating Report Subscriptions 6 Inthe Subscription Schedule section define the schedule on which you want the report to be generated and delivered On Alarm Select this option to configure the subscription to run on an alarm Select the event you want to trigger the subscription from the list To use this option you must first configure an Event Watcher See Event Watcher Manager on page 62 for information on creating an Event Watcher Once Select this option to run the report once at the specified day and time Use the arrow beside the Date field to bring up a calendar where you can select the date Type the time into the Time of Day box or use the up down arrows to change the hours and minutes Hourly Select this option to run the report every hour Select the time from the dropdown list i e on the hour 15 minutes after the hour etc Daily Select this option to run the report once per day at the specified time Type the time into the Time of Day box or use the up down arrows to change the hours and minutes Weekly Select this option to run the report once per day at the time and on the day of the week that you specify Select the day from the dropdown list Type the time into the Time of Day box or use the up down arrows to
175. cs PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Node Details The node details are organized in these tabs Node Information displays Log Inserter statistics for the selected node s Node Performance displays aggregate log performance statistics for the selected node s Log Performance displays log performance statistics for each log in the selected node s Communications Diagnostics Page 68 Communications Diagnostics provides diagnostics information for sites and devices connected to the workstation Site Overview Diagnostics information for the sites are contained in these tabs Site Summary displays communications statistics for each site NetUser Status displays the number of ION programs currently in the ION Network Router Service queue awaiting processing and the total number of ION programs already processed A NOTE Requests and responses transmitted between the ION Enterprise components are referred to as ION programs Site Device Diagnostics Diagnostics information for sites and devices are summarized in these tabs Communication Status displays error rates and connection statistics for the selected site or device The following information is available from the Communications Status tab Column Description Node The device or software node name Requests The number of communications requests transmitted to the meter Responses The number of successful responses rec
176. ct Point Position the mouse cursor over an item such as a menu command Press Press the specified key or combination of keys for example CTRL ALT DEL on your keyboard Right click Place the mouse cursor over an item then press and release the right mouse button Select Place the mouse pointer over an option or check box then click the mouse button to mark your selection Type Type the information in the space or box DO NOT press the ENTER key 1 Mouse button means the primary mouse button left by default while right mouse button means the secondary mouse button This configuration can be switched for accessibility Contents Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Introduction cccccsscecccsssssccccccssscccccccscsscccessssscscssess TO ION Enterprise Software Components ssssssssecseceeesso 14 Monitoring Applications se enese ea EEES eee n RA 14 Management Applications e isara LOEN ERRANA AAA TESE ERR RAR AA 14 Programming Applications crasas ee UNE EE PEA EIA EEE ERR R RERA 15 ION Enterprise Services 0 cece cece ee eee ee eee eee ee eeee 16 ION Enterprise Databases cece cece cece eee eens 18 Gething Stared 3 6 eenen ee ae echoes ein a aa Naas ee dedas 19 Starting a Component of ION Enterprise 6 cece eee eee 19 Logging into a Component of ION Enterprise 000 0c e eee eee 19 Endinge SOSSIOM a Adicts eit Stayt
177. ct the months in which you want the trim to occur or set the Frequency in number of months Fixed Day The trim occurs on the specified date at the frequency specified in months For example to set the trim to occur on the 15th day of every month select every month or set Frequency to 1 then set Fixed Day to 15 Relative Day The trim occurs on the specified day of the month at the specified frequency in months For example to set the trim to occur on the second Sunday of every third month set Frequency to 3 or select which months you want to trim to occur in and select 2nd and Sunday from the Relative day dropdown lists Right click Scheduled Jobs ION_Data or ION_Network and select Backup to display the Scheduled Backup dialog box Both the ION_Data and the ION_Network databases have scheduled backup tasks configured and enabled by default The save location is a different folder for each database although both databases share the same parent directory ION Enterprise config cfg DBBackups From the Database to backup list select the database for which you want to configure the scheduled backup Inthe Save backup to field enter the location where you want to save the backups Inthe Number of backups to keep section specify the number of backups 1 to 4 that Database Manager keeps available Ensure that Schedule enabled is selected if you want to enable the scheduled backu
178. ctric All rights reserved Chapter 11 Downstream Device Assistant Downstream Device Assistant lets you manage downstream devices With this tool you can rename downstream sources change which measurement is associated with specific data from a source and apply these changes to previously recorded data in ION_Data historical database You can also display and manage all the physical sources devices in your network Downstream Device Assistant is an advanced application and should only be used by users with advanced technical skills and a clear understanding of how data is interpreted and stored in the ION Enterprise databases In This Section Detecting Downstream Devices on page 314 Downstream Device Assistant Basics on page 315 Basic View versus Advanced View on page 315 Columns Descriptions on page 316 Displaying Physical Sources on page 318 Downstream Device Assistant Options on page 318 Downstream Device Assistant Functions on page 321 Renaming the Assigned Source on page 321 Changing the Measurement Mapping on page 322 Adding a New Downstream Device Mapping on page 322 Updating the Historical Data at a Later Time on page 323 ooo ooo o Downstream Device Assistant Commands on page 324 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Page 313 Detecting Downstream Devices PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Detecting Downstream Dev
179. cts the operation of any modules that depend on it For this reason you should be aware of all dependent modules also known as owners before you delete anything Checking for Dependent Modules When two linked modules are located in the same window Designer depicts the link as a line that runs from the output register of one module to the input of another You can easily identify the dependent module or owner by the line running to its input However if one of the linked modules is located in a different window the connection is not visible A more effective way to locate a module s owners is to view the owners of its registers Viewing the Owners of a Module s Setup and Output Registers You can view a register s owners to quickly identify all dependent modules on the node You can determine what purpose the modules serve and then decide whether to delete them or not 1 Do one of the following To view the owners of a module s output registers right click on the output symbol To view the owners of a module s setup registers hold the CTRL key and then right click on the output symbol The Owners dialog box appears It lists all of the module s registers and any dependent modules on the node dependent modules on other nodes are not displayed 2 Click a register in the Registers list to display the owners of that register in the Owners list on the right Owner information includes the module name or label and it
180. culates several values for every line or bar in the graph You can view the results of these calculations in the Calculations window The Calculations window updates automatically displaying a range of calculated values based on the currently selected parameter By default all values displayed in the Calculations window are calculated from the first parameter To view the calculations for a different parameter select the line or bar you want For example to view the calculations for a curve on the Plot Display tab click on the curve line in the graph or on its line pattern in the legend When you click a different tab the Calculations window displays the values relevant to that tab Displaying the Calculations Window 1 Right click on the background of the Log View Plotter window 2 Select Graph Options from the pop up menu The Graph Options dialog box appears 3 Select the Show calculations check box then click OK Changing Graph Options When using the Log View Plotter you can adjust the graph options to change the title of a graph or the way data is displayed 1 Right click on the graph background then select Graph Options The Graph Options box appears Type aname for the graph in the Title box This name appears in the title bar of the Log View Plotter window The default is Log View Plotter Select or clear the Show legend and Show calculations check boxes to show or hide the legend and Calculations window Selec
181. culations Window Parameters for the Plot Display Tab The Calculations window updates automatically displaying the following values for the currently selected curve Value Label Description Cursor 1 The timestamp and the y value of the selected curve at Cursor 1 Cursor 2 The timestamp and the y value of the selected curve at Cursor 2 The time difference between Cursor 1 and Cursor 2 and the difference between the Delta C y values at Cursor 1 and at Cursor 2 Min The minimum value of the selected curve between the two cursors Max The maximum value of the selected curve between the two cursors The maximum peak to peak value of the selected curve between the two cursors dpeak Max Min Avg 1 The average value of the selected curve between the two cursors RMS The root mean squared value of the selected curve between the two cursors Int H 1 The integration of the selected curve between the two cursors with respect to time in nt H hours for example if the curve is in kW the information is displayed in kWh The last three values Avg RMS Int H on the Calculations window are only available on plots where the x axis represents time They are not offered on other types of plots for example CBEMA plots Both numeric data and waveform data can be plotted in the same graph On waveform plots the trigger time is represented by a red vertical line Using the Cursor Lines There are verti
182. d Changing the Font of a Text Box on page 215 for more information Page 206 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide ION Module Overview ION Module Overview After you have opened a node diagram you can view the node s configuration or edit it by working with its ION modules As described earlier each module performs a specific function Using Designer you can add remove or link modules together to customize the function of the node This section explains how to add and remove ION modules from your node diagram It describes the basic types of modules and explains how you can organize your node diagram by grouping modules together arranging them and labeling them For more information on ION modules and architecture refer to the ION Reference Working with ION Modules The following sections outline some considerations to remember when working with ION modules Output and Setup Registers A register is a type of memory bank that stores a module s linking and configuration information Each module uses two types of registers output registers and setup registers Module Status Online and Offline The terms online and offline describe whether a module is currently active or not A module is described as online when it is functioning normally monitoring its input and updating its output registers An offline module is inactive Anytime you send and save cha
183. d Bars Shows bars stacked one on top of the other vertically 3 Select a hatching style for the selected bar from the Hatching list This selection is applied to the currently selected bar only 4 Set how wide you want each bar to be in the Width text box The specified width is applied to all bars in the graph The default depends upon the number of parameters 5 Click OK to save your changes Changing the Color of a Curve 1 Right click on the graph background to display the pop up menu Highlight the curve from the menu to reveal the sub menu You can also right click the curve in the diagram or its entry in the legend to access the sub menu directly 2 Select Curve Color from the sub menu The Color dialog box appears Select the color you want or click Define Custom Colors for more options 4 Click OK The curve changes to the color you selected Customizing Graph and Legend Options After you have plotted data in the Log View Plotter you can change the color of the graphing area and the legend and define a font for the legend Changing the Color of the Graphing Area 1 Right click anywhere in the graph background and select Background Color The Color dialog box appears 2 Select the color you want or click Define Custom Colors for more options 3 Click OK The graphing area changes to the specified color Changing the Font Used in the Legend 1 Right click on the background of the legend The Font dialog box app
184. d by using a configuration tool such as Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio Using SQL Server 2005 Management Studio to Limit Memory Usage 1 On the Object Explorer pane right click the SQL Server instance that corresponds to the ION Enterprise database i e the database icon at the root level of the tree view then select Properties 2 Inthe Select a page section select Memory 3 Use the controls on the Memory page to adjust the memory allocation 4 Click OK Page 273 Log Inserter Log Inserter Page 274 PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide The Log Inserter component of ION Enterprise automatically configures itself to collect data from every available recorder in every device or ION Enterprise software component and inputs this data into the database Log Inserter is typically run only on the Primary workstation Most systems use only a single Log Inserter which is automatically configured to perform all required logging functions The default configuration will work for most systems Situations where changes may be required include systems with large numbers of devices with logs systems with primary and secondary servers or cases where only specific devices and or logs need to be monitored for new records If any of these situations apply to your system contact Technical Support for more information on the operation of Log Inserter its different modes of operation and the functions of its internal components
185. d devices in the Table Editing area changes made in this area are applied to all devices including the original Configure Unit IDs This section is disabled by default since unit IDs do not apply to typical Ethernet devices To enable this section you must first set up the Table Editing area so that the Unit ID column is visible Serial devices have the following sections Configure Names Use this section to create the duplicates Configure Unit IDs Use this section to create a sequence of unit IDs to assign to the duplicates after they have been created Configure Serial Sites The serial site used in the original device is automatically assigned to all the duplicates If required use this section to select a different serial site for all the displayed devices in the Table Editing area changes made in this area are applied to all devices including the original OPC devices have the following sections Configure Names Use this section to create the duplicates Configure OPC Address Use this section to create a sequence of addresses to assign to the duplicates after they have been created Configure OPC Sites The OPC site used in the original device is automatically assigned to all the duplicates If required use this section to select a different OPC site for all the displayed devices in the Table Editing area changes made in this area are applied to all devices including the original The Table E
186. d directory should be located on a networked drive where it can provide multiple users with access to saved user diagrams 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Page 127 Editing a User Diagram PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Editing a User Diagram To edit a user diagram the Diagram Objects toolbox must be displayed To open the toolbox select Options gt Show Toolbox If the Show Toolbox option is grayed out your user account does not have sufficient access contact your system administrator The Enable Undo Option The Enable Undo option enables or disables the undo feature in Vista With this option active you are allowed to undo or step backward up to three times This feature is enabled by default If you disable the undo feature you lose the ability to undo any previous changes You cannot enable the feature and undo changes made prior to enabling the feature A check mark appears beside Enable Undo in the Options menu when this option is selected A NOTE The Show Toolbox option must be selected for the Enable Undo option to become active it remains unselectable otherwise Adding a Diagram Object to a User Diagram You can add a new diagram object to a user diagram by dragging it from the Diagram Objects toolbox Types of Diagram Objects Diagram objects provide the interface to ION registers in your network Each diagram object performs a single function For example a single
187. d display the node icons contained within 3 Click a node icon to display the user diagram for the associated device 4 Save the network diagram A NOTE Regenerating a network diagram and saving it overwrites the previously saved network dgm file Opening a User Diagram To open a user diagram 1 Select File gt Open 2 Navigate to the user diagram you want to open and select it from the Open Diagram dialog box 3 Click Open to open the selected user diagram 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Vista User Diagrams Specifying the User Diagram that Opens for a Given User To set a specific Vista workspace and set of diagrams to open every time a given user logs on 1 Log on to Vista using the particular user s logon credentials 2 Organize Vista to appear as you want it to appear on startup 3 Click Save then close Vista 4 Use Windows Explorer to navigate to the ION Enterprise config cfg ud folder 5 Locate the wsu file for the user you are setting up i e lt username gt wsu Right click and select Properties 6 Select the Read only attribute then click OK A NOTE Applying the Read only attribute prevents the workspace information from being modified so Vista opens the same way for a given user every time The user can still to modify and save user diagrams if allowed by
188. d grouping windows Edit mode allows you to configure the node and the appearance of the node diagram In Edit mode double click grouping objects to open associated grouping windows Right click objects or icons to view configuration options For more information on the Toolbox see Using the ION Modules Toolbox on page 209 Designer Shortcuts Data Rec 36 Designer provides several shortcuts to assist in programming the nodes aR 5 pui Output The following table lists the different mouse and keyboard combinations you can perform on a module s input or output symbols and their corresponding functions Action Result Left click on input The list of inputs appears you can select an input and link it to another module s output register SHIFT left click on input The list of inputs appears with the current input values displayed in square brackets Right click on input The Delete Links dialog appears you can break links from this dialog SHIFT right click on input The Delete Links dialog appears showing inputs and current input values in square brackets Left click on output The list of output registers appears SHIFT left click on output The list of output registers appears with the current register value displayed in square brackets Page 200 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Designer Icons Action Result
189. d in Management Console Contact Technical Support for assistance Click the Devices icon Right click in the display window and select New gt OPC Device Fill in the Group Name Device Type and Site select the OPC site you previously set up Configure the other fields as you require Page 35 Adding a Modem Adding a Modem PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide 1 Click the Dial Out Modems icon right click in the display window and select New then select either Serial Modem hardware modem or WinModem Windows modem 2 Fill in the values for the mandatory fields For Serial modem select the Modem Type from the list If your modem is not in this list select Generic ION Modem Other Select the Serial Port where your modem is connected For WinModems select the Modem Name from the list Configure the other fields as you require 3 Click OK WinModem Installation Notes Before you can use a WinModem you must first install it on your computer follow the instructions that came with the WinModem product After you restart the computer set up the WinModem 1 In Microsoft Windows click Start gt Settings gt Control Panel then double click Phone and Modem Options 2 Click the Modems tab select your WinModem then click Properties Click the Advanced tab then click Change Default Preference 4 Set Port speed to match the baud rate that is used between the meter and the modem on the remot
190. d selects the latest console message Clear this option to disable scrolling i e select and view an older console message without jumping to the latest one when Diagnostics Viewer refreshes Displays the Options dialog box where you can change the diagnostics refresh Options rate Note that changing this value can affect ION Enterprise performance 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Device Upgrader Device Upgrader Use Device Upgrader to upgrade the firmware on one or more ION meters of the same type in a single session Supervisor level access is required to upgrade devices To reduce the risk of upgrade errors make sure the computer power option is set to always stay on and screensavers are disabled If you are using a laptop plug it into a wall outlet and set the power option to do nothing if the lid is closed Z CAUTION If you have data in the meter you want to keep make sure you upload and or save it before upgrading Stored data in the meter s memory is completely erased during a firmware upgrade This data includes waveforms data recorders min and max values and integrator values e g kWh Using Device Upgrader 1 Obtain the applicable upgrade upg files for your device from the website or from Technical Support Save the files in a folder accessible on the computer Stop the ION Log Inserter Service and ION Virtual Processor Se
191. d value returned in four consecutive 16 bit registers The highest order word is returned in the U64 21 87 fourth register the lowest order word in the first In effect the 8 bytes are returned in 2 1 4 3 6 5 8 7 or little ENDIAN format 16 1 15 A 16 bit signed value Bits 1 to 15 bits are unsigned data If bit 16 is O the value is positive if bit 16 is 1 the value is negative IEEEFloat or F32 4321 A 32 bit IEEE floating point value returned in two consecutive 16 bit registers The high order word is returned in the first register and the low order word in the second In effect the 4 bytes are returned in 4 3 2 1 format SwappedFloat or F32 2143 A 32 bit IEEE floating point value returned in two consecutive 16 bit registers Contrary to F32_4321 the high order word is returned in the second register and the low order word in the first In effect the 4 bytes are returned in 2 1 4 3 format MaskedBool or A 16 bit value that is interpreted according to the bit pattern described by the Mask attribute Bits exposed by the mask can be read or written without affecting the value of other bits Unmasked bits are interpreted as 0 on a read and are unaffected on a write Undeclared bits of a mask are interpreted as unmasked i e mask 0x7F is PackedBool interpreted as 0x007F The value that is read or written is determined by using enumeration ordinals described below If used for read only Boolean data enumerations are not
192. dated Assigned Source and Physical Source columns If the source is a physical device i e not downstream the same name must be entered exactly in both columns Click the Updated Measurement cell then select the measurement from the list 4 Inthe Handle cell type the register handle for this measurement 5 By default the Update Historical Database check box is selected this applies the change to existing data in the database if for example the source and measurement mapping you are adding already exists To make the change only to data going into the database from this point forward clear the Update Historical Database check box 6 Click File gt Save A dialog box prompts you with the changes Click Yes 7 If prompted select which database to update Click OK Page 322 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Updating the Historical Data at a Later Time Updating the Historical Data at a Later Time Activity Log 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved When you save your changes using the Downstream Device Assistant a record of changes to the source measurement definitions is saved in the folder ION Enterprise config Diagnostic Downstream Device Assistant with the following filename Downstream Device DefinitionsY YY Y MM DD_hh mm ss csv where YYYY MM DD_hh mm ss means current YEAR MONTH DAY_hour minute second If you cleared
193. de 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Introduction It also defines how to convert the module register value into the value shown in the ION register Map File Format Each distinct Modbus device type has its own special address ranges and requires its own Modbus map file Vin avg on an ION6200 for example is located at 40103 It could be in a different location on any other device In either case it would be most logically mapped to the Power Meter Module s Vin avg output register 0x5803 in the default tree The example map file shown below illustrates the map file format lt xml version 1 0 encoding UTF 8 gt lt Created by Modbus Device Importer v 3 21 0 at 3 22 2007 10 41 56 AM gt lt ModbusMap xmlns x schema modbus schema xm1 gt lt DeviceInfo Type Example Device MultiplePresetSupported 0 GlobalNotA vailable NotSpecified MaxRequestRegisters 125 LowSpeedUpdateRate 30 HighSpeedUpdateRate 5 gt lt ModbusInfo IONHandle 134217729 Name Baud Rate ModbusAddress 40001 RequestType RW Format UINT16 Scale 1 Offset 0 Multiplier 1 DefaultEnumValue Invalid Data gt lt Enumeration Value 300 Baud gt lt Enumeration Value 2400 Baud gt lt Enumeration Value 9600 Baud gt lt Enumeration Value 115200 Baud gt lt ModbusInfo gt lt ModbusInfo IONHandle 134217985 Name VoltsA DeviceName Meter01 ModbusAddress 40002 RequestType R Format UINT16 Scale 1
194. de 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Viewing the Phasor Diagram Tab A NOTE The Log View Plotter conforms to the convention where all phasors are plotted with respect to V1 always at 0 and rotate in a positive counter clockwise direction On a balanced power system all three phases should appear 120 degrees apart To edit a phasor displayed on a phasor diagram right click on a parameter in the legend to display a pop up menu where you can change the phasor s color or delete the phasor from the diagram Symmetrical Components The Log View Plotter calculates the symmetrical components of your power system the positive negative and zero sequences relative to the first phase for the cycle selected If you have plotted waveforms for three voltages and or currents you can access their symmetrical component calculations To produce correct symmetrical components the waveforms must have been plotted in the correct order for example V1 V2 V3 not V1 V3 V2 The analysis of an unbalanced system such as determining the effects of a system fault is made simpler by using symmetrical components Symmetrical components are a mathematical tool that allows any system of three unbalanced phasors to be represented by three balanced phasor systems The total current or voltage in any phase wire is expressed as the sum of three balanced three phase components Positive Sequence Components 1 these cons
195. der and select Ungroup To show or hide the Group By box right click the column header and select or clear Group By Box Sorting Data in a Column Click a column header to sort table rows according to data in that column You can sort in ascending or descending order indicated by an up or down arrow respectively To cancel sorting and return the column to its default state right click the column and select Clear Sorting Filtering Data in a Column The following sections describe the available filtering options Using the Simple Column Filter When the mouse is positioned over a column header the Filter icon appears in the top right corner of the header Click it to select one of the listed filter conditions and apply it to the data in that column Select Custom to apply one or two logic conditions to filter the data To cancel filtering and return the column to its default state right click the column and select Clear Filter 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Grid Table Controls Using the Dynamic Column Filter Some tables have a row between the column header and the table data This is the dynamic filter area To use the dynamic filter area start typing the entry you want to filter on in the space above the applicable column You can use an asterisk at the beginning of the filter as a wildcard Once you achieve
196. devices added m the future 1 Click New to add a new event watcher A new row appears in the main table for the new event Use the Event Watcher Editing Area to define the event watcher Type a name for the event watcher Select the template you want to use from the Template dropdown list Type a description of the event watcher if desired DE i From the Devices table select the devices you want to include in the event watcher Click the check boxes to the left side of the devices to select or clear a device NOTE Checking Select All will include any Query Server Log Inserter or Virtual Processor instances in the system It also includes any devices or software nodes added in the future 6 Click Apply to save your changes click OK to save your changes and exit Event Watcher Manager or click the Templates tab to edit the templates Deleting and Reverting To delete an event watcher select the event watcher from the table and click Delete To undo changes click Revert 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Page 65 Diagnostics Viewer PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Diagnostics Viewer Diagnostics Viewer is the ION Enterprise tool for troubleshooting network communications problems and related network errors Starting Diagnostics Viewer 1 Start Management Console and log in 2 Click Tools gt System gt Diagnostics Viewer QF Tip For instructions on using filte
197. different measurement for one that is incorrectly mapped to a particular register handle Select whether or not to update historical data for a changed source name or measurement definition by selecting or clearing the Update Historical Data check box respectively Changing a name or definition automatically selects this check box Select whether or not to allow Log Inserter to resolve the register handle to a particular source measurement by clearing or selecting the Manual check box respectively The default setting is cleared i e Log Inserter automatically resolves the register handle to the source measurement definition If you want to force the change so Log Inserter does not resolve the handle to the new measurement select the Manual check box Page 317 Displaying Physical Sources PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Displaying Physical Sources Sorting Data The default view for Downstream Device Assistant displays only the downstream devices To display the physical sources as well 1 Click View gt Select Physical Sources 2 Select the check box beside the physical sources you want to display Select the Select Clear All check box to select all physical sources or clear it to select none Click OK NOTE The Physical Sources are not displayed if you restart Downstream Device Assistant By default only downstream devices are displayed when Downstream Device Assistant is started Click a colum
198. dimension Select Shrink to smallest or Grow to largest to adjust the width and or height to match that of the smallest or largest object in the selected group Select Pixels to enter the exact width or height in pixels You can also combine horizontal and vertical options on a single selection For example if you select Shrink to Smallest in the Horizontal section and 30 pixels in the Vertical section the entire selection is resized to the width of the shortest object and the specified height of 30 pixels 5 Click OK to save your changes Aligning Diagram Objects Relative to Each Other The Align tab of the Layout dialog box lets you specify the horizontal and vertical arrangement of the selected objects 1 Select the diagram objects that you want to align 2 Select Edit gt Layout or click E The Layout dialog box appears 3 Select the Align tab to specify the horizontal and vertical alignment of the object s The options in the Horizontal and Vertical areas determine the criteria by which you can align diagram objects For example if you select Left sides under Horizontal and Space evenly under Vertical Vista aligns all objects in the selection by their left sides using the leftmost object for reference and distributes them evenly along a vertical axis 4 Select the options you want then click OK Aligning Diagram Objects on a Grid The Grid tab of the Layout dialog box lets you activate and configure an invis
199. diting Area When making configuration changes in the Duplicate and Configure interface these changes are applied only to the rows that are visible in the Table Editing area See Customizing and Navigating Interface Displays on page 22 for instructions on filtering and sorting data in the table NOTE To discard your changes since the last saved state click Revert You can also press CTRL Z to undo the last action To redo the last action press SHIFT CTRL Z You can only undo your last action one undo 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Creating Multiple Copies of a Device Creating Multiple Copies of a Device 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved This section describes how to duplicate and configure devices Step 1 Configuring the First Device 1 Add the first device using your logical naming scheme For example you can use a scheme like FL1_PNL1A CCTO01 to name a device that is installed on the 1st Floor of the building electrical panel 1A and Circuit breaker 1 Type FL1_PNL1A as the group name and CCTO01 as the device name when you configure the first device 2 Right click the device you want to duplicate and select Duplicate and Configure The Duplicate and Configure interface appears Step 2 Configuring Names In the Configure Names area the device name is displayed Each letter and number is sel
200. dl Update List Delete Close From here you can delete old device types that are not being used Note that you may see multiple entries for the same physical device in the device type listings for example 6200 RTU and 6200 ModTCP The Modbus Device Importer classifies each different protocol as a separate device type Page 289 Settings Menu Settings Menu Help Menu PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide A NOTE You cannot delete a device type that is currently being used by Management Console Calculator This loads the default Windows calculator Select Settings on the main toolbar to access the following menu items Change Default Template Path The default template path is used for loading a new template Use this command to change the path if required Enable Auto Validation This is selected by default Start Application Maximized This sets the Modbus Device Importer window to open in a maximized state Show Properties Window on Double Click Allows an object s property window to open if the object is double clicked in the ION Map Information pane Auto Select Text on Edit in Register Information Allows a field that is clicked on in the Modbus Register Information pane be fully selected when the edit screen opens This is useful if you need to change the entire field Advanced You can access two features from this sub menu Show Factory Objects Makes the factory objects v
201. drag to pan 1 Click the meter icon to open its diagram then click the link or tab that contains the button for the trending information you want to view 2 Click the Data Log Viewer button that corresponds to the data log you want to view The date selection screen displays 3 Select the timeframe for which you want to view data To specify a date range select Between these dates then click the calendar icons 74 to set a start and end date 4 Click Show Table The data log screen displays 5 Select the check boxes for the parameters you want to graph 6 Click Show Graph 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Viewing Historical Trend Data Z NOTE The first time you click Show Graph you may be prompted to install software from Steema Software SL Click Install to install the software and view the graph 7 Select or clear the check boxes in the legend to show or hide the corresponding data in the graph 8 Manipulate and control the displayed screen by doing the following To zoom in on the graph drag the mouse pointer around the portion you want to zoom in on To move across the graph right click and drag your mouse in the direction you want to move Z NOTE To return to the original view of the graph refresh your browser display Click Show Table to return to the data table screen Editing the Graph To change the appearance of th
202. e Click OK That schedule name appears in the list in the navigation pane Copying an Existing Schedule 1 2 3 4 In the navigation pane right click the schedule that you want to copy Select Save as New Schedule The Save as New Schedule dialog box appears Enter a name and description for the new schedule Click OK The new schedule appears in the navigation pane with the attributes of the copied schedule Importing a Schedule 1 Place the schedule that you want to import into a folder that can be accessed from the computer In the navigation pane right click an empty area of the navigation pane then select Import Schedule The Open dialog box appears Navigate to the folder where you placed the schedule Select the schedule and click Open The schedule is imported with the extension _imported For example a schedule named ScheduleA becomes ScheduleA_imported Page 81 Adding or Editing a Sub Schedule PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Exporting a Schedule To export a schedule to use in another TOU installation 1 Right click on the schedule you want to export in the navigation pane Click Export The Save As dialog box appears 2 Select the folder where you want to save the schedule 3 Enter a schedule name in the File name box 4 Click Save The schedule is saved with the extension tou For example ScheduleB becomes ScheduleB tou Editing an Existing Sc
203. e Viewing Setup Register Information A module s setup registers contain its configuration information When a module processes data it manipulates the data according to the guidelines stored in its setup registers Setup register information includes the module s available setup registers the setup register settings and the setup register owners Each of these can be accessed from the output symbol located on the right side of the module icon Frequenc r Viewing Setup Registers Press the CTRL key and click the output symbol or right click the graphic in the center of the module to display the ION Module Setup dialog box Viewing Setup Register Settings Press CTRL SHIFT and click the output symbol or right click the graphic in the center of the module to display the ION Module Setup dialog box Viewing Setup Register Owners Press the CTRL key and right click the output symbol Viewing Input Information Input information includes the module s inputs and a sample of its real time input values Each of these can be accessed from the module s input symbol Frequency Viewing Inputs Click the input symbol Viewing Real time Input Values Press the SHIFT key and click the input symbol Page 240 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Time of Use TOU Program Management Time of Use TOU Program Management Tariff schedules or Time of Use programs are easily created After
204. e order in which the bytes representing the data are returned over Modbus The high order nibble of a 32 bit value is selected as Oxf0000000 regardless of whether the format is U32_4321 or U32_2143 It should also be noted that the resulting value of a masked integer is NOT bit shifted A mask of Oxf000 applied to a 16 bit value of 0x1234 results in Ox1000 4096 decimal and NOT 1 Register Scale and Register Multiplier This specifies what the scale factor of the data being requested should be The scale can be set to any constant decimal value within the range of 3 402823466 E 38 to 3 402823466 E 38 If you can obtain the scale for a specific register from the device then you can map the scale value to another register You can only map the scale factor to registers already created in the Modbus Device Importer The mapped register used can be a valid Modbus mapped register or a register with a constant value Mapping the scale to a constant register is a convenient feature you can change the scale for many registers by changing the constant value in one location Mapping the Scale Factor to Another Register 1 Select the Reference another register for the scale check box The Select Register for Reference dialog box appears Select Register for Reference Managers Factory Modules 7 Modules Factory Module 1 bo Registers FAC1 Compliance FAC1 Options FAC1 Revision FAC1 Se
205. e 151 Using the Query Wizard Page 152 PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide If you selected multiple logs in step 2 this box contains a tab for each log Specify the column and filter information for each tab Specifying Columns to Appear in the Log Viewer The Available list displays the available columns and the Selected list displays the currently selected columns The Selected list displays the columns in the same order left to right that they will appear in the log viewer top to bottom To specify the columns to appear in the Log Viewer 1 Highlight the name of the column s you want then click Add The column s appears in the Selected list Select the asterisk at the top of the Available list to select all available columns For example if you want to select some basic columns for the first waveform log you chose in the last step you could highlight timestamp node and V1 in the Available list NOTE The column option shows all inputs connected to a recorder for Data Log Viewers For example use the option if you are using a framework and the configuration of the data log is different for several meters The option is not available if more than one table is selected as in the example To support alarm annunciation an Event Log Viewer requires the following three columns priority ack_time and recordID 2 Repeat this procedure for each column that you want and for each tab 3 Adjust t
206. e 46 PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Example For example if you select the first 1 from the example naming scheme and set the End spin box to 2 two names are generated the original plus one duplicate If you select a letter and set its Start value to A and the End value to C three names are generated the original plus two duplicates The total number of generated names is the product of the first range multiplied by the next and so on until the last range as indicated in the following graphic Configure Names Fe Ba P NoE coc Tt oo stat A Ne Cc a a L Upper Case The total generated names is the product 2 x 3 x 10 60 Edit Exceptions lt none gt This pattern will generate 60 names 59 devices will be created Reset Duplicate Configure Setting Exceptions to Generated Sequences The Exceptions option applies to the Configure Names and Configure TCP IP Addresses sections only 1 To set exceptions to the range of generated values click Edit this button is unavailable until you change the name or IP value List of current exceptions amp Edit Exceptions To 101 110 Exceptions to 101 110 103 105 107 amp Edit Exceptions To A G Add Exceptions Exceptions to A G D F Add number Add Exceptions Remove Exceptions Add character Remove character stat ios E end A A Remove character
207. e end of the connection i e both modems must be set to the same baud rate 5 Set Flow Control to None 6 Click OK to save your changes A NOTE You may need to restart your computer for the settings to take effect Editing a Network Component Page 36 1 Click the icon in the System Setup pane for the type of component you want to edit 2 Inthe display window right click the network component you want to edit and select Configure lt Network Component gt with lt Network Component gt being the type of component you want to edit 3 Make the required changes To display all configurable fields right click in the Configuration dialog box and select Advanced Properties 4 Click OK when you are finished to save your changes 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Deleting a Network Component A NOTE If you rename a group or device in Management Console you will not be able to access the data that is already stored in the database using the previous group or device name New data will be added to the database using the new name Deleting a Network Component 1 Click the System Setup icon for the type of component you want to delete 2 Inthe display window right click the network component you want to delete and select Delete or select the item and press the DELETE key 3 Click Yes to confirm the deletion or No to cancel amp NOTE
208. e graph click Edit Graph near the top right corner of the screen The Editing dialog box displays where you can set parameters that change the graph s appearance You can also export the graph to various image formats and configure options for printing the graph RMS Waveform Plotting WebReach plots the calculated RMS values for waveforms To show or hide these RMS values select or clear the appropriate box Device Diagram Change Date Range Show Table it Graph Main Entrance7650v321 RMS RMS RMS RMS RMS y ez amp amp ge amp amp Re ge ou B B B R pB p RE BE E E RE RS RE E Timestamp Left click and drag to zoom Right click and drag to pan 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Page 165 Viewing Meter Events Viewing Meter Events Viewing meter events is similar to viewing historical data A NOTE PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide You cannot acknowledge alarms on the screens generated by WebReach since control functions are not supported Viewing the Meter Events 1 Click the meter icon to open its diagram then click the link or tab that contains the Meter events button 2 Click the Meter events button The date selection screen displays 3 Set the date range then click Show Table The Meter events screen displays Main Entrance7650v321 Device Diagram Change Date Range Timestamp priory enure_lon eaure_valo oroc on efiecvokie node eck i
209. e interval of the waveforms a waveform showing the digital input status The timestamp for the time the waveforms were triggered The sampling frequency of the waveforms To return to the PQ Summary report use the browser s back button System Configuration Use the System Configuration report definition to create a report containing details about devices in your network including device names and types communications information i e IP address unit ID protocol for devices sites to which devices belong status of sites offline or online and descriptions of the devices in the system if a description was entered in Management Console 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Creating a New Definition from a Default Report Definition Tabular Use the Tabular report definition to create a report of data in a tabular format You can create a report with multiple measurements from multiple sources This data can then be exported for use in another program such as Microsoft Excel The generated report contains the following information source measurement timestamp and value Trend Report Use the Trend report definition to create a report that displays trend information in a line column bar or pie chart You select devices and measurements for a selected period of time You can choose to report on either one or more measurements for a single source or
210. e into the field provided and do not specify a directory Vista defaults to ION Enterprise config diagrams ud Customizing the Action for a Control Object To view the action options of a control object right click on the control object and select the Action tab The Action tab offers three options that you can use to define how the control object responds when clicked Select No confirmation to have no confirmation message displayed Select Message box confirmation to display a message box when the object is clicked The message box requires the user to click either OK or Cancel Select Password confirmation to request the user s logon password when an object is clicked The Level to operate list allows you to specify the access level required to perform the action See User Manager on page 55 for more information on access levels and their permissions Box Options To view the Box options right click on the object then select the Box tab Use the Box tab to add a border or background color to a diagram object The Box tab is available for the following diagram objects Numeric Text Box and any status object that has been configured as an alphanumeric display The Box tab has two sections Border lets you adjust a border s width and color as well as whether or not it is displayed Select Hide to remove the border or Show to display it If you select Show click Color to define a border color and type a n
211. e specified by the device documentation The register type also determines the Modbus function code used when talking to the device Modbus Address This is the physical address of the specified register You can find this number in the device documentation and you can enter the number in either decimal or hexadecimal format Address ranges correspond to register types as follows COIL STATUS 0xxxx INPUT STATUS 1xxxx INPUT REGISTER 3xxxx HOLDING REGISTER 4xxxx A NOTE When entered in hexadecimal format the value is only the register offset and does not include the Register Type identification Request Type This tells the system whether or not it can read R write W or do both RW actions to the specified register 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Register Properties Defined Register Mask This mask is applied to the raw data received from the register The mask is applied in an AND fashion For example if the mask 0x4 is applied then the register value displayed is only nonzero if the 3 least significant bit in the register is a 1 You can apply masks to both numeric and Boolean data types To apply custom masks scroll down the list and select Custom When prompted enter the value in Decimal Binary or Hexadecimal format A NOTE For integer values the bit order of the mask corresponds to the bit order of the actual data and NOT th
212. e too large or too small select Scientific 1 0 x 10 2 2 0 x 10 2 3 0 x 10 2 or Engineering 1m 2m 3m Determine the axis title select None to have no axis title or Text to enter your own title For time based plots the default x axis title is s if the timestamps of the data spans a number of seconds mn for minutes h for hours d for days m for months This applies to the Plot Display tab only For non time based plots CBEMA or harmonics you can change the title Select Text and type the title in the edit box The title must be nine characters or less Click OK to save your changes A NOTE If the first column of the source data includes a space or sign the Log View Plotter assumes time on the horizontal axis and automatically determines the units based on timestamp information The axis title is updated whenever the window is updated Changing the Font Used on All Axes 1 Right click anywhere in the graph background and select Graph Font The Font dialog box appears Specify the font style size effects and color options that you want to use for the axes labels Click OK to save your changes 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Customizing the Log View Plotter Display Customizing Curve Style When displaying multiple parameters Vista distinguishes be
213. eName gt csv Validate Template This command lets you validate the current configuration Doing this performs various validation and integrity tests on the current configuration of the ION and Modbus objects It lists potential errors such as registers that share the same Modbus register address or registers that have conflicting masks The error checks that are performed can be toggled on or off using the check boxes in the dialog box general issues address conflicts handle conflicts label conflicts and name conflicts Z NOTE You must manually fix any errors or else you cannot add or update the device type View current Device Types This command allows you to view the device types currently in the ION_Network database 3720 3720 ACM 420 3800 3800 RTU pm dl 7300 ON 7300 7330 ON 7330 7350 ON 7350 7500 ON 7500 7600 ON 7600 7700 ON 7700 8400 ON 8400 8500 ON 8500 6200 ON 6200 6200 ion 6200 xml xlmod ll 9600 ACCESS S600 6200_RTU ION 6200 ModRTU 6200 ion 6200 xml ximod di 8300 ON 8300 7500 ATU ION 7500 ATU 7550 ON 7550 7650 ON 7650 7550 ATU ION 7550 ATU 9510RTU ACCESS 9510 ATU 8600 ON 8600 8800 ON 8800 PM710_ATU PM710 ModRTU pm710ion pm710 xmi MODATU ximod di PM710_TCP_ PM710 ModTCP pm710ion pm710 xml MODTCP xImod dl 6200 TCP ION 6200 ModTCP 6200 ion 6200 xml MODTCP mod dl PM750_RTU PM750 ModRTU pm750 ion __pm 50 xml MODATU mod PM750_TCP PM750 ModTCP pm750 ion __pm B0 xml_ MODTCP mod
214. ears 2 Specify the font style size effects and color options that you want to use for the legend text 3 Click OK to save your changes 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Overlaying Curves in the Log View Plotter Removing Graph Parameters After you have plotted data in the Log View Plotter you can remove a parameter from the graph 1 Right click on the graph background to display the pop up menu Highlight the curve you want to remove from the menu to reveal the sub menu You can also right click the curve in the diagram or its entry in the legend to access the sub menu directly by right clicking on the curve 2 Select Delete Curve from the sub menu The curve is deleted without further prompting Overlaying Curves in the Log View Plotter After you plot data in the Log View Plotter you can overlay a curve onto your graph to help analyze sag swell data This applies to devices that measure disturbances in voltage and store the magnitude and duration of these disturbances When these values are inserted into the ION_Data database they provide a series of coordinates that can be plotted on a voltage tolerance curve A voltage tolerance curve is often used to categorize the severity of a voltage disturbance amp NOTE Most Vista queries are plotted against timestamps with the timestamp as the x axis however any query that uses the ION Sag Swell module must be plott
215. eated in the module of the currently selected register but the register properties window is not displayed Delete A prompt is displayed asking to confirm the delete of the selected registers ALT dragging one or more The selected registers can be dragged and dropped over to a new module of similar class in the tree view objects It is equivalent to F1 F2 or F3 depending on which object is currently selected If Insert F are a register is selected then the Enumeration window is displayed If a manager is selected a prompt to delete the manager is displayed Delete If a module is selected a prompt to delete the module is displayed If a register is selected a prompt to delete the register is displayed 5 i i i int th Holding ALT If the object is a module it can be dragged and dropped into another manager whiledresaita of a similar class If the object is a register it can be dragged and dropped into another module an object nae of a similar class CTRL C The selected registers are copied CTRL V The registers that have been copied are pasted into the current module CTRL B The registers that have been copied are clone pasted into the current module CTRL Z The registers that have been copied are pasted multiple times into the current module A prompt comes up asking how many copies to paste 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Additio
216. ecify for particular user 95 stale data 96 159 users add edit 56 user groups 58 V virtual processor VIP common applications 250 Modbus communications 248 modify global parameters 79 set global parameters 252 setup 75 Vista customizing diagram window 155 framework 130 generate network diagram 94 navigate 95 plot data 101 query wizard 150 view diagrams online WebReach 163 view logged data 100 view real time data 98 Vista diagram object action options 142 alarming options 144 annunciation options 144 box options 143 display options 136 edit text options 135 link options 135 link to data source 146 query server options 136 text options 134 W waveforms plot 118 Web Reporter default report definitions 175 display 174 export report 186 generate report 180 inputs 174 180 navigation 174 print report 185 report administration 187 report subscription 188 save report 185 share report 187 subscription configuration 61 172 upload reports report packs 191 WebReach access WebReach 163 advanced configuration 168 communication errors 167 network diagram 163 RMS waveform plotting 165 stale data 167 troubleshooting 170 view events 166 view global events 166 view historical data 164 WinModem 36 PowerLogic ION Enterprise User guide For further assistance please contact us at Schneider Electric Power Monitoring and Control 2195 Keating Cross Road Saanichton BC Canada V8M 2A5 Tel 1 2
217. ectable A group of numbers is treated as a single entity For example in the name MY8600 the entities you can select are M Y and 8600 Leading zeroes are also supported so you can set sequences such as 01 02 03 or 001 002 003 Configure Names F L 1 2 _ P N L 186E c c T 0 0 Start a End C S Remove Parameters UpperCase Lower Case Exceptions lt none gt Edit This pattern will generate 60 names 59 devices will be created Duplicate Configure Reset 1 Select a letter or number in the device name The Start box displays the selected number letter which is the start value Use the up or down arrow in the spin box to change the start value or simply type it in the box 2 Click the up or down arrow on the End box edit the range or type the end value in the box To clear the range and start over click Remove Parameters 3 For letters select Upper Case or Lower Case depending on whether you require upper case or lower case letters 4 Set exceptions for individual values or a range of values if required Exceptions reduce the number of names created i e total generated names minus the exceptions See Setting Exceptions to Generated Sequences on page 46 Once you have finished configuring names you can duplicate the device See Step 3 Duplicating the Device below for more information Page 45 Creating Multiple Copies of a Device Pag
218. ection of the Seasons and Rate Definitions screen A dialog appears that lets you add a setup register override or delete or modify an existing setup register override 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Page 241 Advanced TOU Schedule Configuration PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide amp Setup Register Overrides x Click Add to add a new setup register to the overrides list Select an existing setup register to modify it or to delete it from the list 3 To add a new setup register override click Add Add Setup Register Override OF x Register Name Season 1 7 Register Value 4 Select a setup register from the drop down list then type in the register value available registers are Seasons 1 2 3 and 4 and Alt 1 and 2 Days A NOTE Be sure to follow the syntax rules described in the TOU module section of the ON Reference If the syntax is incorrect the meter will not accept the configuration To delete an existing setup register override select it from the list and click Delete then OK To modify a register select it from the list and click Modify Make your changes and click OK Modify Setup Register Override of x Register Name Season 1 Register Value Nun 26 2001 dec 31 2001 jun 27 2002 dec 31 2002 jun 28 2003 dec 31 2003 jun 29 2004 dec 31 2004 Page 242 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User G
219. ection pane You must complete the necessary inputs before you can generate the report When you display a report that includes inputs you can display or hide the report parameter input area To do this click the show inputs or hide inputs link in the top right corner of the report display area after the report has generated Inputs for Default Report Definitions The following sections outline the inputs for the default report definitions The inputs available vary depending on the type of report Aggregation Interval This input determines how data is aggregated for the report i e day week etc From the dropdown list select the aggregation interval that you want to use Chart Type Use the dropdown list to select the type of chart you want to use to display the report results i e line bar etc Evaluation Limits Click Configure to configure the EN50160 parameters used in the report Default values are provided based on the EN50160 standard Click the links in the dialog box to access configuration options for various measurements included in the report Basic Configuration Type the maximum percentage of intervals in an observation period that the component can fail to meet the EN50160 N1 and N2 requirements before the component is considered non compliant Supply Voltage Dips Type the maximum percentage of intervals in an observation period that the RMS value can drop below 90 of the nominal P
220. ed Archive Hard Drive Space This section lets you enable or disable the alarm that monitors your hard drive s You can monitor all hard drives or just the hard drives that contain the ION Enterprise databases You can also adjust the threshold for the minimum amount of space remaining before you receive an alarm notification Configure Alarming Method This section lets you specify the name of the SMTP server as well as the email addresses of the recipients you want to send alarm notifications to Use this task to create an archive of the selected database A NOTE The Database to archive list only shows your live ON_Data database unless Show Archives is selected 1 Right click on Databases or ION_Data and select Archive to display the Database Archive dialog box If necessary select the database that you want to archive 2 Click the browse button L to select a location to save the archive to The directory ION Enterprise config cfg Archives Data is the default location where the archive is saved but you can specify another local directory you can only save an archive to directory on the local machine not to a location on the network 3 Type a name for the archive After you select the location the archive is given a default filename but you can rename the archive to follow your conventions 4 Select the data types you want to archive 5 Specify the date range of the data that you want to
221. ed or Advanced View if it is selected Handle Available in Advanced View only this option specifies whether register handles are displayed as the hexadecimal value with the Ox prefix or as the decimal value To change the setting 1 Click View gt Options and ensure the Advanced is selected 2 Inthe Handles section select display hex to display the register handle in hexadecimal format or display decimal to display it in decimal format If you want to manually resolve a register handle to a specific measurement edit the value in the Handle cell then select the Manual check box before saving the changes 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Downstream Device Assistant Functions Downstream Device Assistant Functions This section describes different functions you can perform using the Downstream Device Assistant Renaming the Assigned Source 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved One of the primary reasons for using the Downstream Device Assistant is to change the default name assigned to a downstream device by the Log Inserter For instance instead of Modbus 34 you may want to rename that device to something more meaningful such as SM_Bldg2_Boiler7 Renaming an Assigned Source typically only applies to downstream devices Renaming the Assigned Source for ALL its Measurements 1 Switch to Basic View 2 Find the source you want to
222. ed against duration When plotting sag swell data select Duration as the X parameter of the Log View Plotter Vista provides common curves or voltage tolerance envelopes that can be used as overlays in the Log View Plotter CBEMA ITIC These curves described by the IEEE 446 standard define an upper and a lower bound on the types of disturbances that electrical equipment is likely to tolerate It plots disturbance magnitude against disturbance duration and indicates at what points a voltage disturbance is likely to disrupt or damage equipment Points near or outside the voltage tolerance envelope indicate events that could interrupt or damage electrical equipment Prot Display 300 he GA Ret upper CBEMA 1S96 ITIC im 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Page 125 Overlaying Curves in the Log View Plotter Page 126 PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide SEMI F47 0200 This specification defines the voltage sag tolerance capability required for semiconductor processing equipment though it is now used by other industries According to the specification equipment must tolerate sags to 50 of nominal voltage for up to 200 milliseconds sags to 70 of nominal voltage for up to 0 5 seconds and sags to 80 of nominal voltage for up to 1 second Points above the voltage tolerance curve indicate disturbances that exceed these specifications Overlaying Curves on Plotted Data To overlay
223. ed in the node diagram Pending A pending module is one where changes have been made to the module in the node diagram and not yet sent to the node so the node diagram does not match the node The borders of pending module icons appear as a dashed line If you change a module in the node diagram for example re link it or edit its setup registers it does not match the node until you select File gt Send amp Save Until it is saved the edited module is depicted as pending to indicate that it does not match the configuration on the node When you send and save your changes to the node the module becomes programmed Core Modules and Standard Modules There are two basic types of ION modules core left and standard right Power Meter Over kw sd R P z r Core modules are required ION modules that are fundamental to the operation of the node You cannot add or delete core modules and in some cases you cannot configure them Core module icons are identified by a double border around the edge The Power Meter module is an example of a core module Standard modules are reusable ION modules Generally most modules in a node are standard modules You can add or delete standard modules as required Standard modules icons are identified by a single border The Setpoint module is an example of a standard module Persistent Modules Similar to core modules in that they cannot be added or deleted persistent modules are stand
224. egister to be added Find an appropriate register to map to in the ION tree Select appropriate data format scaling factors etc Configure additional Modbus device functionality if required 4 Validate and check the device type 5 Add the new Modbus device type to the ION_Network database After it is defined in the ION_Network database the new Modbus device is available in ION Enterprise just like any other device Simply select the Modbus device type from the dropdown list Default Modbus Device Types ION Enterprise is shipped with numerous pre configured Modbus device types For a complete list navigate to Tools gt View current Device Types from the Modbus Device Importer main console These pre configured device types can also be modified as required using the Modbus Device Importer The ION Tree File The Modbus Device Importer creates and edits ION tree files ion for the device which are then saved and entered into the ION_Network allowing ION Enterprise to recognize and use the device The tree file defines the organization of the ION managers modules and registers The Modbus Map File The Modbus Device Importer creates and edits mapping files for the device linking Modbus registers with ION registers A Modbus map file is an XML file that must refer to the XML schema defined in config translators modbus schema xml 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Gui
225. eived Total Errors The total number of errors Total Error Rate The ratio of Total Errors to Requests The error rate in the last 64 requests This can indicate a trend in Sliding Error Rate soe communications performance Average Response Time Average time in seconds for the meter to respond Last Response Time The last response time in seconds 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Communications Diagnostics Column Description The number of timeout errors A timeout occurs when no data is Timeouts received in response to a request The number of bad packets received i e those that failed the error Bad Checksums detection checksum Broken Connection Errors Number of times the connection was lost to the meters on a site The number of incomplete packets received i e those that did not have lete F EE eee all the expected bytes Bad Frames The number of received packets that had an internal error Hardware Errors Number of errors reported by the computer s communication hardware Misc Errors Number of other errors that do not fit any of the above descriptions Site Status displays site statistics such as connection status and totals Polling Status displays the number of programs currently in the ION Site Service queue awaiting processing and the total number of programs already processed
226. el Use Default Label Use Custom Label DB1 Destination a J Reset register value 3 Inthe Modify Address Register dialog box double click on the node manager module and output register you want to use Click OK to continue 4 Inthe ION Module Setup dialog box click OK A NOTE You can clear the value of an address setup register On the Modify Address Register dialog box select the Reset Register Value box and then click OK 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Configuring ION Modules Parent Module and Shared Setup Registers Setup registers that are surrounded by asterisks e g PM1 PT Sec indicate that the module shares its setup registers with another parent module An example of this is the High Speed Power Meter or Meter Units Power Meter module HS Power Meter MU Power Meter They share their setup registers with the parent Power Meter module If you try to modify a shared setup register a prompt identifies the register as shared and gives the name of the parent module Navigate to the parent module and change the setup register there Using Custom Labels You can assign custom labels to modules setup registers output registers and Boolean ON OFF conditions All modules and registers have a default label and this label is what you see in node diagrams us
227. em when no users are logged on In the event of a power outage your system automatically resumes power monitoring when the power is restored The table below outlines the ION Enterprise Services and whether the service is configured to start automatically or manually by default A NOTE ION Network Router Service has many dependent ION Enterprise services For example the Virtual Processor ION Log Inserter Service ION Site Service and DDE services cannot start and operate without it running Service Name Manual Description Automatic ION Alert Monitor Checks the ION Enterprise computer s communications ports continuously for high priority events occurring at remote modem sites When this happens Alert Monitor initiates a Manual communications connection to the remote modem site ION Component Identifier Service Locates local and remote ION Enterprise components Manual ION Connection Management Service Determines the connection status of sites and devices in the ION Enterprise system and handles allocation of resources such as modems This service manages the state of site and device connectivity for the ION Enterprise system In order to establish the most appropriate Automatic state for the system each connection and disconnection request is evaluated against the overall state of the system and availability of communications channels Provides Dynamic Data Exchange DDE connectivity between de
228. ements to the Energy Cost report definition but does not use a TOU schedule Power Quality Use the Power Quality report definition to create a report that summarize the number and severity of voltage sags swells and transients over a period of time The finished report also includes a graphical representation of the disturbances The power quality report allows you to view historical PQ data aggregated into power quality incidents An incident is a summary or aggregated event which represents a number of individual events sags swells that was registered by the same device in a small window of time Throughout this section disturbance refers to a sag swell or transient event in the Event Log while incident refers to a group 1 or more of disturbances A NOTE To run power quality reports in Web Reporter the ION Power Quality Aggregation Service must be started This service is run by default only on new data To run the service on pre existing data see Running the ION Power Quality Aggregation Service Manually on page 193 The generated report displays A summary of incidents incident interval and number of disturbances The details of the worst disturbances for each power quality incident in the report Statistics for each power quality incident in the report for example first timestamp duration and the number of transients sags and swells within the incident From the report you can view eithe
229. en setting up your Modbus network make sure that your Modbus port is different from the port that connects to your ION devices The Virtual Processor requires a communications port for Modbus separate from any communications port defined as a site in the Management Console Setting up a Virtual Processor s Modbus Network 1 Start Management Console 2 Click Tools gt System gt ION Virtual Processor Setup The Virtual Processor Setup utility VIP ComputerName where ComputerName is the name of the workstation is displayed as an item in the tree view 2 ION Virtual Processor Setup x TECHPUBSXP1 VIP TECHPUBSXP1 Add COM Pott Global Parameters Modbus Network Delete Master Sites COM1 Modify Settings Devices COM4 Settings Unit ID 100 Baud Rate 9600 Save Parity NONE Stop Bits 1 P Data Bits 8 hd et Double click an item to expand or collapse it The buttons available vary depending on the item selected in the tree 3 Expand Modbus Network to show Master Sites and Slave Ports Page 75 Configuring the Virtual Processor s Modbus Service PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Adding a Modbus Master Ethernet Site 1 Select Master Sites then click Add Site 2 Select Ethernet RTU then type the following in the appropriate fields TCP IP Address the TCP IP address of the Master site or gateway TCP IP Port the TCP IP port number used to connect to
230. energy provider s tariff schedule such as On Peak and Off Peak times If you do not need to use a TOU schedule simply create anew TOU schedule with only one time period defined The Aggregate Energy amp Demand tab contains a summary of the combined energy and demand values Energy and demand information from different sources are stored in separate tabs in the workbook Load Profile Use the Load Profile template to create a graphical representation of demand or load levels over a period of time The profile shows peak loads points on the graph where peak electricity demand is high A load profile report can be used to analyze the electrical loads at the time of maximum demand This information creates opportunities for developing strategies to improve energy management Similar to the Energy and Demand template the Load Profile template uses data from the Energy and Demand log kW Demand kVAR Demand kVA Demand except it does not use a TOU schedule The Load tab contains a graphical representation of the power usage of your system over time total load profile Load profiles from different sources are stored in separate tabs in the workbook Page 331 Types of Default Reports Page 332 PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Power Quality Use the Power Quality template to create a report that summarizes the number and severity of voltage sags swells and transients over a period of time The finished report also include
231. eporter The Web Reporter component of ION Enterprise is the tool you use to create and generate common energy demand or power quality reports Management Applications The following ION Enterprise programs help you set up and maintain your power management system Management Console Use the Management Console component of ION Enterprise to add and configure network components such as servers sites communication links and devices Management Console also provides access to system and database applications and utilities to manage items such as user accounts and software licenses These are described in the following topics Database Manager on page 255 e User Manager on page 55 Page 14 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Programming Applications License Manager on page 60 Reporting Configuration Manager on page 61 Event Watcher Manager on page 62 Designer on page 195 Diagnostics Viewer on page 66 Device Upgrader on page 71 Remote Modem Setup on page 74 Virtual Processor Setup on page 75 Modbus Device Importer on page 277 gt gt OO O Time of Use Editor on page 80 Optional Components The following optional components are also available if they have been ordered and then activated via License Manager OPC Server Assistant This component checks the ne
232. eps a copy of your current framework template during the upgrade After the firmware upgrade is complete Device Upgrader restores your framework template A NOTE The Device Upgrader loads new meter firmware that does not contain any framework templates If you want to preserve customizations you have made to your device framework make sure Save Restore framework is selected However if you intend to replace the existing meter framework with a new one e g a new default meter template that you have downloaded clear Save Restore framework 10 If you are upgrading multiple devices specify in the Failure Handling area how the Device Upgrader responds to an unsuccessful upgrade Select Halt After then enter a number in the box to specify how many attempts Device Upgrader should make before stopping during a failed upgrade By default the utility is set to stop after the first failed upgrade Select Ignore All to attempt to upgrade all of the selected devices regardless of the number of devices that fail to upgrade 11 Click Upgrade to upgrade the selected devices The Upgrade Status box shows the stages of the upgrade process The completed progress bar indicates what percentage of the upgrade is complete Each completed upgrade is listed in the Upgrade Status box 12 Restart the ION Log Inserter Service and ION Virtual Processor Service Page 72 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogi
233. er cannot save the device framework to the file lt device_name gt conf Make sure the ION 150 Eanes Enterprise config upgrade directory exists and that you have write permissions The Device Upgrader failed to successfully upgrade a device and left a lt device_name gt conf file Probable 151 155 cause you are attempting to upgrade a different device than the one that the Device Upgrader previously failed 152 The information in the file lt device_name gt conf is corrupted or unrecognizable by the Device Upgrader Contact Technical Support for assistance 154 Device Upgrader was unable to restore the device setup Probable causes a time out or b device not functioning 156 Device Upgrader was unable to restore the device framework completely to the file lt device_name gt conf This error is most likely caused by a full hard drive 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Page 73 Remote Modem Setup PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Remote Modem Setup Use Remote Modem Setup to preconfigure dialup modems that will be connected to meters at remote locations Hardware based and software based WinModems modems are supported Remote Modem Setup provides access to a database that contains configuration data for a variety of modems you can pick from Remote Modem Setup also provides direct access to your modem so you can customize settings and troubleshoot its operation Preliminary Setup Follow the ins
234. er defined factory registers that you can change if the required registers are not already present in the default list 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Main Console Screen Main Console Screen To open Modbus Device Importer start Management Console then select Tools gt System gt Modbus Device Importer The main console screen appears Configure Logging and Calculation button File Edit View Tools Settings Help ION Map Information Modbus Register Information Configure Logging and Calculation Example Device Modbus Register Request Type Format _ Mask Scale Multiplier Oftset_ Enumeration ConstantValue i E External Numerics Baud Rate 40001 0 3 8 Control Module UINT16 E i Baud Rate VINT16 abe 0 300 Baud VINT16 abe 1 2400 Baud 123 9 9600 Baud 133 3 115200 Baud 5 8 Power Meter Module Mig VoltsA Hy VoltsB Hy VoltsC ION Map Information Pane Modbus Register Information Pane The main console is where most actions are performed and ION objects are managed The device managers modules and registers are displayed in the ION Map Information Pane on the left hand side of the screen Information specific to registers is displayed on the right hand side of the screen in the Modbus Register Information Pane If you select an object in the tree all registers below it have their information displayed Navig
235. er diagrams and event logs unless you specify a custom label Creating custom labels allows you to clearly describe what the module and its registers have been set up to do However carefully consider which modules and registers should be assigned custom labels There is a fixed number of labels available but there are thousands of registers you can assign them to Many of these registers do not benefit from custom labels For example most setup registers can be left at their default names since the only place their names might appear is in the event log amp NOTE Some devices such as the ION7300 and ION7700 have a 15 character limit for labels Customizing a Module Label The ION Module Setup dialog box allows you to edit the module label The module label is the text that appears across the top of the module icon in the node diagram It is also the label that is used in event logs and in the dialog box for the ION tree 1 Inthe ION Module Setup dialog box do one of the following To create a custom label select Use Custom Label and then type a name for the label in the box Touse the default label select Use Default Label 2 Click OK to return to the node diagram Page 227 Configuring ION Modules Page 228 PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Customizing an Output Register Label By providing a custom label for an output register you can clearly indicate the information that register contains For ex
236. er you have used Designer to add and link modules in the Virtual Processor you can create a user diagram in Vista and link it to the modules in the Virtual Processor You can then use your user diagram to display system data monitor alarms and control basic functions in your Virtual Processor framework Configuring the Virtual Processor to Interact with the Desktop 1 Open Control Panel gt Administrative Tools gt Services 2 Right click the ION Virtual Processor Service and select Properties 3 Select the Log On tab 4 Select the Allow service to interact with desktop check box and click OK 5 Stop and restart the ION Virtual Processor Service Distributed Control 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Virtual Processor Distributed Control modules are a means of transferring information between the different devices in your network These modules can be used to build frameworks for control processes such as alarm annunciation plant wide demand control power factor control load shedding paging and generator switching Before you decide to use a Virtual Processor to implement a control system it is important to understand the various factors that influence the speed with which the Virtual Processor is able to generate a control action Some of these factors include network traffic the number of polled devices in your network the reliability of your communications network and the Virtual Processor workstat
237. erial device use an RS 232 to RS 485 converter Modem Site In a modem site communications occur between a remote modem at the Modem Site and a local modem on the server A NOTE Remote sites that use radio modems or leased line modems are configured as Direct Serial Sites not as Modem Sites Modem sites can include traditional hardware modems those that are configured and controlled by ION Enterprise or WinModems Windows modems If multiple modems are set up in the modem site ION Enterprise selects the first available modem to establish communications this is referred to as modem pooling Ethernet Gateway Site An Ethernet gateway site for example EtherGate or Modbus gateway consists of an RS 485 chain of devices that communicates with an Ethernet network via an Ethernet device The Ethernet device acts as a gateway that transfers data between an Ethernet network and the devices connected to it via RS 485 The gateway device converts RS 232 RS 485 communications to and from Ethernet Page 31 Management Console Network Components Page 32 PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide OPC Site An OPC site consists of an OPC server that communicates with OPC compliant devices on the network Devices A device is a meter or other component that communicates and gathers data and is installed on a network Serial Devices Serial devices belong to direct sites modem sites or Ethernet gateway sites
238. eric dial horizontal or vertical bar or scrolling graph Display Styles for Numeric Objects kw tot 219 8 kw tot 219 8 800 1200 1600 400 1200 800 KW tot 219 8 kW tot 219 8 kW tot 219 8 O 400 800 1200 1600200 0 Alphanumeric Partial Dial Full Dial Horizontal Bar Vertical Bar kw tot 219 8 kW tot 219 8 3 19 2007 04 01 59 147 PM 800 1200 Timestamped 400 ee kW tot 3 19 2007 04 01 59 147 PM 0 2000 PC Timestamped 0 i i an oe ene wil Fae KW tot 219 8 PC 3 19 2007 04 00 58 468 PM Scrolling Graph Arc Meter Timestamp Only See Customizing the Display of a Numeric Object on page 136 for more information on configuring numeric objects Using Flags on a Numeric Object In some cases a numeric object may use flags to indicate the low and high limits of the displayed parameter When used on a dial display flags appear as colored areas at either end When used on other types of numeric objects flags change the object s background color to indicate that a low or high limit is currently exceeded By default the low flag color is blue and the high flag color is red Flags are stored in the workspace file on a per user basis They are configurable and can be customized by anyone who has the necessary access level Configurable settings include flag color low limit and high limit See Display Options on page 136 for more in
239. ert Module in the ION Reference for more information 2 The Alert module initiates modem communication and calls the phone number specified in the Alert module s Destination setup register 3 The ION Enterprise workstation answers the modem call from the ION meter and completes the communication connection The meter then sends the following information to ION Enterprise a timestamp indicating when the alarm condition occurred the node name and the message i e contents of the Alert module s Message setup register 4 Alert Monitor receives the alarm data and places it in the queue for processing When the alarm is processed the commands specified in the COM port configuration settings are executed At the same time a connection request is sent to the node specified in the alarm data Page 308 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Setting Up the ION Alert Monitor 5 The new connection request is received and placed in the queue If other connection requests to the same site already exist the new request is merged with the others 6 ION Connection Management Service establishes a connection to the meter that originated the alarm then Log Inserter downloads all outstanding event and data logs A NOTE ION Connection Management Service uses a modem from the modem pool to establish connection to the remote site 7 ION Connection Management Service disconnects af
240. erved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide User Manager User Manager User Manager allows you to add users and edit user information such as passwords access level and organizational information You can also use User Manager to define groups of users for use in Web Reporter subscriptions You must have supervisor level access to use User Manager otherwise the menu option is unavailable Access Levels Access Level rey Db 5 se _ 8 5 28 gt O N 5 8 Type of Operation Allowed by Default 3 z 3 S g O gt 31 59 90 8 View Vista or Designer diagrams YES YES YES YES YES Acknowledge alarms YES YES YES YES Trigger events YES YES YES Connect disconnect sites or devices YES YES YES Modify network configuration using Management Console YES YES Edit Vista or Designer diagrams YES YES Administer software security i e add users 1 Supervisors can configure Vista objects i e control objects or the global event log viewer to allow g g different access levels to perform different actions i e trigger events or acknowledge alarms See Customizing a Diagram Object on page 133 for more information on configuring access levels for Vista objects Starting User Manager 1 Start Management Console Log in using an account with supervisor level access 2 Select Tools gt User Manager GF Tip You can custom
241. ervices Right click Databases then select Modify Login The Modify Login dialog box appears Type your password in the Password field this must be a SQL administrative password Click OK From the Login Name dropdown list select the instance for which you want to modify the login Type the new password in the New Password and Confirm New Password fields Click OK Restart ION Enterprise services Page 263 New ION Databases PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide New ION Databases Use this task to create a new blank version of the ION_Data database 1 Right click on Databases and select New ION Databases The New Historical ION Enterprise Database dialog box appears 2 Type a name for your new database A NOTE Do not name it ION_Data as this is the default name for the existing ION database 3 Click the browse button L to specify a location for the database 4 Click OK Restore Right click on Databases ION_Data or ION_Network and select Restore to display the Restore Database dialog box Depending on the database you are restoring this procedure replaces the existing ION_Network database ION_SystemLog database or ION_Data database with the database from the appropriate backup file By default these backup files are located in the directory ION Enterprise config cfg DBBackups A NOTE It is not possible to simply detach the live file copy the backup file into the live file locatio
242. es Page 224 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Configuring ION Modules Modifying Enumerated Numeric Bounded and String Setup Registers If the register you have selected is an enumerated numeric bounded or string register one of the following dialog boxes appear when you click Modify Enumerated Registers To modify an enumerated register select an option from the Options list Numeric Bounded Registers To modify a numeric bounded register type a number in the Value box The allowable range is shown under the Value box you are alerted if you type a number outside this range To enter a formatted numeric value click Format In the Time Interval Value dialog box you can enter the numeric value as a date offset from Jan 1 1970 ora time interval String Registers To modify a string register type your text in the String box Note that when you click Modify for a string register that is the connection string for a Log Acquisition module or Query module the Modify Database Connection Properties dialog box appears B Modify Database Connection Properties x m Connection Properties Data Source WORKSTATIONXNON 0 Initial Catalog JON Date User Id PML Password es Connect Timeout fo m Register Label Use Default Label Use Custom Label LAM1 Data Source Modifying Calendar Setu
243. ess Layer This provides a consistent way to access database resources for advanced users who are creating custom reports If you are using the default reports definitions that come with Web Reporter this application layer is transparent Starting Web Reporter See Getting Started on page 19 for information on starting and logging in to Web Reporter Once you have started and logged in click the Web Reporter tab Reporting Configuration Page 172 Use the Reporting Configuration Manager option in the Management Console Tools menu to configure options for Web Reporter such as the database to report on and subscription delivery options See Reporting Configuration Manager on page 61 for more information 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Web Reporter Interface Web Reporter Interface Menu Bar File Help There are three main elements of the Reports page interface report menu bar report selection pane and report display pane Default Reports Report Icon Saved Report Icon Saved Reports ma 100 ms Report fia EN50160 Mains Signal Summary Report Ree Mfg Electricity lia ENS0160 Summary Report lia Energy Cost Report Measurements Demand lia Energy Period Over Period Report Reporting Period last z Bays hapytkednd Server Local Time a SS x 114 2 y 4 20 2 ma Energy Usa
244. essages etc Enter the filename of the image in the appropriate box ON OFF or Unconnected To hide the status object in a given state leave the appropriate box blank Currently the custom image option supports the following graphic file formats BMP WMF Windows Metafile EMF and AVI without audio and uncompressed or compressed using RLE8 compression You can use three different files to represent the three display states ON OFF and Unconnected of a status object Each of these files can also be of a different type e g BMP AVI and WMF Page 139 Display Options Page 140 PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Z NOTE Vista no longer uses the 6 frame bitmap format for Boolean custom images However if you are a user of an earlier version of Vista and have upgraded your existing graphics still work If the 6 frame bitmap check box is selected you can use the same file for all three states Vista uses the first frame to display the Unconnected state the second frame for the OFF state and the last frame for the ON state If no file name is provided in the entry box of a state nothing is displayed when the status object is in that state Select Alphanumeric to display the Boolean state labels stored in the device and choose custom colors to visually indicate the corresponding states For example suppose Running has been stored in a meter as the label for the Boolean register that stores the
245. essed by one user at a time you can use the ION tree to link to a register on another node where the diagram is already open Linking Modules Using the ION Tree 1 Click the input symbol of the module icon A list of the module s inputs is displayed 2 In the list of inputs select the input you want to link 3 Click the ISIN button in the toolbar To link a module s setup register hold the CTRL key while clicking this button The Create Link dialog box appears providing access to the ION tree Nodes LOGSRY WORKSTATIONX Meter FeederA NewFacility PPC Production MainFeed Tolerance Feeder VIP WORKSTATIONX ART2 Result 8 Cancel 4 Specify a node manager module and output register Double click the node you want in the Nodes box All managers within the selected node appear in the Managers box You can then double click the manager you want and repeat this procedure for the modules and registers 5 Click OK The module whose inputs changed appears grayed out to indicate it is now pending If both modules are in the same window of the same node diagram a line appears to represent the link 6 Select File gt Send amp Save The new link is established and the module appears programmed The procedure described above can also be performed in the reverse order You can click the ISN button first select an output register and then click the input symbol of a module icon to select one of i
246. est with a Y yes or N no respectively Page 175 Default Report Definitions Page 176 PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide EN50160 Mains Signaling Use the EN50160 Mains Signaling report definition to create a report for signal line frequency statistics for multiple sources for each observation period Energy Cost Use the Energy Cost report definition to create a report on energy consumption and peak demand levels over a period of time categorized by time of use The Energy Cost report definition uses energy and demand measurements With an Energy Cost report you can use a time of use TOU schedule that you define using the Time of Use Editor see Time of Use Editor on page 80 or you can set a flat rate in the Set Rates dialog box see Entering Report Inputs on page 180 amp NOTE This report is intended to be used for positive power flow applications only where kW and kVAR are both positive Use with bi directional flow will give incorrect results Energy Period over Period Use the Energy Period over Period report definition to create a report that allows you to compare a measurement from multiple devices over specified time periods i e this week vs the same week from the previous month Energy Usage by Shift Use the Energy Usage by Shift report definition to create a report that allows you to compare a measurement from multiple devices for specified time periods or shifts This all
247. eting Links that are Not Visible on page 222 Deleting Links that are Not Visible If you cannot see a line that links the modules for example if they are in different windows or you need to know which output registers and which inputs are involved you must use a dialog box to delete the link between modules You can look either at the output register owners of the first module or you can look at the inputs of the second module to see what they are linked to and then delete the link from there Page 222 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Deleting Links Deleting a Module s Input Links Deleting links at a module s inputs is generally faster than deleting them at the module s output registers because Designer does not need to check the entire node On the other hand there is less information available if you view input links All you see is the label of the output register that is linked to the input If this is sufficient information proceed with this method if not go to the output registers to delete the link Viewing a Module s Input Links 1 Right click on the input symbol of the module icon The Delete Links dialog box appears 2 Each input and the label of the output register it is linked to are displayed in the dialog box To delete one or more of these links select the input and click Unlink The output register
248. ewer meaning that if the Log Viewer is closed then reopened the table is populated from memory and not from the database Any new records inserted into the database during the time the Log Viewer was initially open do not appear A NOTE Since it is recommended that Update automatically remain disabled in all but the most compelling circumstances it is important that the Delete query on close option remains enabled Use parent node With this option selected the log viewer uses the same node linkage as the parent window The node is also pre selected in the Query Wizard you should not select this option if you intend to query more than one node or query the global event log X Parameter for Log View Plotter For a Data Log Viewer the X Parameter for Log View Plotter section is offered at the bottom of the Query tab Use this section to specify a column to be used on the X axis of the Log View Plotter This section offers two options Timestamp is selected as the X parameter by default In some cases you may need to specify a different X parameter For example when you are plotting disturbances you need to plot your data against the Duration column Use column lets you specify a new x parameter In the field provided type the column number that you want to use as the X parameter e g 3 When you click OK on the Data Log Viewer Configuration box the specified column changes to blue A NOTE In the Data Log Vie
249. example a device called Test_Device could be Test_Device_Rev1 0 3 The template should reflect the device type as well as the current version to avoid future confusion if similar devices are added A NOTE Both of these registers must have constant values Modbus Device Importer does not support the Add Generate Network Diagram support feature for devices that get either of these register values dynamically i e mapped to a Modbus register After you enter the correct register values you can find the Add Generate Network Diagram support feature under the Tools menu This feature is very useful if you have multiple versions of a specific device type This feature creates the necessary registry keys and set up the required directory structure for generating a network diagram 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Tools Menu Z NOTE By default the diagram is a blank diagram You must modify this diagram to actually correspond to the specified device Save ION Handle List This command saves a list of the registers along with their corresponding ION handles You can use this list to create a Vista diagram without an active device connected The list is saved as a text file in the current Modbus Device Importer installation folder The name of the text file is in the format lt currentDevic
250. f these options right click anywhere in the background of the user diagram or window that you want to customize A NOTE Right clicking in the background of a window displays a pop up menu of available options however right clicking on any object in the window while in Edit mode including transparent objects such as text boxes or grouping windows displays the configuration options for that object The font you select becomes the default setting for all captions and text labels within the window Changing the Default Font 1 Right click in the background of a user diagram and select Default Font The Font dialog box appears 2 Set the default font style size effects color and format that you want 3 Click OK to save your changes The default background color is gray However you can display any solid color as a background for any window in your user diagram Changing the Background Color 1 Right click in the background of a user diagram and select Background Color The Color dialog box appears 2 Select the color that you want or click Define Custom Colors for more options 3 Click OK to save your changes Page 155 Configuring Window Properties PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Configuring Window Properties To view the Window Properties Configuration options right click in the background of any window in your user diagram and select Properties The Window Properties Configuration dialog box ap
251. f use schedule In the Set Rates section enter the rates for the select measurements In the Set Demand Calculation section select the calculation method used to determine demand Independent peak demand is calculated independently for each source or Coincident the demand measurements of the sources are correlated with the peak demand of the main meter If you select Coincident for the calculation method click Main Meter to select the source to which you want to correlate the demand measurements Click Wages to include WAGES Water Air Gas Electricity Steam measurements in the report Click the buttons to add or remove 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Entering Report Inputs measurements Enter a name for the measurement the click Select Source and Select Measurement to select a source and measurement Enter a rate for the measurement in the Rate field Click Additional Fees to add additional rate information to the report Enter a name in the Rate Name field and rate information in the Amount field Reporting Period Use this input to select the timeframe for the data you want to view in the report Select the reporting period from the dropdown list Most of the options in the timeframe dropdown end on the day that you are running the report To runa report that starts and ends in the past select Fi
252. fies the node receiving the data Distributed Boolean Module All Distributed Boolean modules have one input that must linked to an External Boolean output register Whenever this register s Boolean value changes state the new value is sent to the node defined in the Destination setup register Distributed Numeric Module A Distributed Numeric module s input must be linked to an External Numeric module This input s value is sent to the node specified in the Destination setup register This module has two additional setup registers that are used to determine when and how often new data is sent to the Destination node Distributed Pulse Module All Distributed Pulse modules have one input that must link to an External Pulse module This module s pulse is sent to the node defined in the Destination setup register Data Monitoring Module The Data Monitor module provides a means of alerting you to communication problems that may occur between the Virtual Processor and any ION node referenced by the Data Monitor s Source inputs amp NOTE ION meters with Advanced Security enabled do not accept control operations from the Virtual Processor In order to enable these control operations you need to provide a device password in Management Console for these applications to use See Accessing Meters with Advanced Security on page 38 for information on configuring Advanced Security Distributed Control Network Performance
253. follows PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Drag a column header here to group by that column Name Type Address Protocol Description BLDG_A_FL1 PNL_1A_CKT110 ION 8500 BLDG_A_FL1 PNL_1B_CKT110 ION 8500 BLDG_A_FL1 PNL_2A_CKT110 ION 8500 BLDG_A_FL1 PNL_2B_CKT110 ION 8500 BLDG_A_FL1 PNL_3A_CKT110 ION 8500 BLDG_A_FL1 PNL_3B_CKT110 ION 8500 BLDG_A_FL1 PNL_4A_CKT110 ION 8500 BLDG_A_FL1 PNL_4B_CKT110 ION 8500 BLDG_A_FL1 PNL_5A_CKT110 ION 8500 BLDG_A_FL1 PNL_SB_CKT110 ION 8500 Server M2003 COM25 10 Server M2003 COM25 11 Server M2003 COM25 12 Server M2003 COM25 13 Server M2003 COM25 14 Server M2003 COM25 15 Server M2003 COM25 16 Server M2003 COM25 17 Server M2003 COM25 18 Server M2003 COM25 19 ION ION ION ION ION ION ION ION ION ION 40999 85 WWn O gt E Name Like FL1 And Type Like TON Edit Filter Select the box to turn the filter on clear it to turn the filter off Click the x to cancel and exit the filter mode Click Edit Filter to configure the filter conditions 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Chapter 2 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Management Console Use Management Console to add remove or configure components such as metering devices in your ION Enterprise power management system You can set up different types of sites communication links such as Ethernet o
254. formation on configuring flags Page 98 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Viewing Data with Status Objects Viewing Data with Status Objects 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Vista uses status objects to display Boolean ON OFF conditions in your system A status object may display the status of a digital output such as a relay a digital input status input or a setpoint in your system The default status object appears as an indicator light that changes color to indicate various conditions Gray indicates the status object is not linked or not receiving data Like most diagram objects status objects can be modified by any user with an appropriate access level Depending on how a status object has been configured its appearance and function can differ significantly from the default settings A status object that has been customized can appear as an alphanumeric display for example ON or OFF or a custom image three images representing ON OFF and UNCONNECTED See Customizing the Display of a Status Object on page 139 for more information A NOTE In some cases the active state of a status object may have been changed inverted so that an active state appears as inactive and vice versa See Annunciation Options on page 144 for more information Page 99 Viewing Logged Data PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide View
255. fsetting a Parameter on the Y axis 1 Right click on the graph background to display the pop up menu In the last section of the pop up menu highlight the curve you want to change The curve s sub menu appears You can also access the sub menu directly by right clicking on the parameter curve or on its curve sample in the legend 2 Select Options from the sub menu The Curve Option dialog box appears 3 Choose one of the four axis options for the selected parameter The axis is indicated by the location of the tick marks Specify a Y offset if required This shifts the selected parameter up the y axis or down for a negative number by the amount you specify 4 Click OK A new axis appears with a default title and a scale appropriate for the selected parameter The scale of the default axis can also be adjusted to accommodate the remaining curves A parameter has an asterisk after it in the legend if it has been offset Repeat these steps for each parameter that you want to de index from the default axis You can assign more than one parameter to an axis and the scale adjusts accordingly to incorporate each new parameter For example if you have plotted three voltage parameters and three current parameters you can select the current curves and assign each of them to another common axis leaving the three voltage curves to share the default axis Displaying Power Factor Data If you have plotted power factor data from historical
256. g Alarms on page 105 Controlling System Functions on page 107 Plotting Logged Data on page 108 The Log View Plotter Interface on page 109 Customizing the Log View Plotter Display on page 121 Overlaying Curves in the Log View Plotter on page 125 Creating and Customizing a User Diagram on page 127 Adding a Diagram Object to a User Diagram on page 128 Customizing a Diagram Object on page 133 Linking a Diagram Object to a Data Source on page 146 Querying the Database on page 148 Customizing a Diagram Window on page 155 Page 89 The Vista Interface PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide The Vista Interface The Vista interface consists of a main screen with a title bar a menu bar a toolbar a workspace a status bar and in Edit mode a toolbox For information on opening or generating a Vista see Generating Opening and Closing a User Diagram on page 94 The Vista interface with a user diagram showing realtime values Menu Bar Toolbar 5 Eile Edit Options Yy Window Help Click a tab to display its data Click to return to the Network Diagram view Building2 PQ Volts Amps Power Quality Energy amp Dmd Inputs Outputs Setpoints Setup Diagnostic Raae to Current Power 4 Workspace Ac kW c A Frequency l v be l l V ca o4b 0 kW b I I Power Factor v0 7 l E kW tot
257. g a Report on page 185 for more information Install Report Definition allows you to upload or update a single report definition See Installing a Report Definition or a Report Pack on page 191 for more information Page 173 Web Reporter Interface Page 174 PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Install Report Pack allows you to upload or update a report pack See Installing a Report Definition or a Report Pack on page 191 for more information Help The Help menu displays the Web Reporter online help Report Selection Pane The report selection pane allows you to select a report to view or generate Select the report you want from the list of available reports and report definitions The report appears in the report display pane Report names are preceded by a reporticon Reports with a white circle in the report icon require you to enter at least some of the inputs Reports with a green circle in the report icon have been saved with all of their inputs defined you do not complete any of the inputs before the report is generated amp NOTE If the report definition you are interested in does not appear in the report selection pane select Install Report or Install Report Pack from the File menu to upload the definition Report Display Pane The report display pane is the area where the generated report displays If the report requires that you enter inputs the report parameter input area displays
258. g a Report Definition or a Report Pack on page 191 Custom Report Definitions on page 192 OAE E E E SE SE SE SE SE SE SE E E E E G Running the ION Power Quality Aggregation Service Manually on page 193 Page 171 Introduction Introduction PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide The Web Reporter interface allows you to define and generate reports from historical data You can modify save and export a report and create subscriptions to saved reports Users with supervisor level access can also install new report definitions See Generating and Viewing a Report on page 180 for information on generating and viewing reports Z NOTE Currently only Microsoft Internet Explorer version 6 0 and later is supported by ION Enterprise Web Reporter Terminology Report Definition The report definition defines such things as layout which inputs need to be completed to run the report and what information in the database is accessed for that report Default Reports The report definitions included in Web Reporter to address common reporting needs Report Input Parameters or Inputs Parameters that must be entered before a report can be generated Default inputs are included for most of the default report definitions Report A report that has been saved with some or all of its input parameters Defined Report A report that has been saved with all of its input parameters completed Data Acc
259. g box appears If necessary select the database that you want to backup If you have Show Archives selected you can also backup your archives 2 Click the browse button to specify a location to which you want to save the backup Backups are stored in the directory config cfg DBBackups Data by default You can save the backup to your local computer or to your network using a Universal Naming Convention UNC path or a mapped drive 3 Type a description in the Description of backup text field if you want to provide information about the nature of the manual backup 4 Click OK Right click on Databases and select Defragment to display the Defragment Database dialog box Select the database you want to defragment and click OK You can defragment the ION_Data ION_Network or ION_SystemLog database These databases are defragmented as part of the scheduled maintenance if 10 or more of the database is fragmented See Scheduled Jobs on page 267 for more information This task lets you detach a database from SQL Server so that the existing database files can be copied allowing the option to reattach alternate or default copies of these files if necessary 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Export Registry Setting To detach a database 1 2 Stop all ION Enterprise services Right click on Databases ION_Data ION_Network or ION_SystemLog and selec
260. ge by Shift Report O a i ma Event History Report Warnings lia 1EC61000 4 30 Report 5 z Generate T E m PQ Summary Report KI Dy System Configuration Report SI 4 fi of 2 gt Di Select a format 7 ma Tabular Report mA Trending Report Ha Manufacturing Energy Cost Last 30 Days 4 14 2009 12 00 00 AM 4 21 2009 12 00 00 AM Server Local Load Profile Report hide inputs A Load Profile Report Title Report Parameter e Input Area Include Data Guen Orks Report Options Load Profile Report Report Selection Pane Report Display Pane 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved User Supervisor Account Menu Bar The report menu bar contains the following options File and Help File The File menu has four options New allows you to create a new report definition by copying one of the default report definition Manage brings up the Manage Reports dialog box which allows you to do the following Select Manage to move delete rename or copy a report See Managing a Report on page 187 Select Share to make a report available to individual users and groups See Sharing a Report on page 187 Select Subscribe to schedule a report to be generated and delivered in a prescribed manner on a defined schedule See Creating Report Subscriptions on page 188 Save allows you to save the selected report See Savin
261. gned to the downstream Modbus device with a slave address 34 Page 314 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Downstream Device Assistant Basics Downstream Device Assistant Basics Use Downstream Device Assistant to edit the names assigned to downstream devices or to assign the correct measurement label for a register that has an incorrect measurement mapping IMPORTANT Before using the Downstream Device Assistant make sure you save a copy of the ION_Network and ION_Data databases in case you need to revert to the original configuration of these databases Starting the Downstream Device Assistant 1 Run the program named DownstreamDevices DownstreamAssistant exe in the ION Enterprise system bin folder 2 Log in using your ION Enterprise credentials A message displays to remind you to back up your ION_Network and ION_Data databases Click OK to continue 3 Downstream Device Assistant opens in Basic view or Advanced view depending on the last view it was in before it was closed The first time Downstream Device Assistant is started it opens in Basic view Basic View versus Advanced View The view determines what columns are available as well as whether an action is global applied to all rows containing a parameter or specific to a row Downstream Device Assistant ioi x 2 Edit View Help asurement Address Definitions Downstream devices only
262. gs Menu roteus are het ee edo ina Eo eee I 34 tienes 290 Pel Meni wisn tess teas E Nata hls TS oy E E ee IAN aay Pe Sec tienes 290 Configure Logging and Calculation Button 0 e eee e eee ee 290 Editing a Register 2 02 0 cece ccc ce cece eee eee ee eeees 291 Register Properties Defined 6 ccc ccc cece eens 291 Chapter 10 Chapter 11 Appendix A SiOrch Keys sc oe hee eset aces aed aad ats Senate one eer ine 296 General Key Shortcuts err i er e E deseo das pene ees 296 Register Quick Edit Mode seis erore ed aa E nn eee 296 ION Map Information Pane 0 0002 297 Modbus Register Information Pane 0 0 c eee e eee 298 Additional Information 0 cc cece cece e ee eeee 299 DatasFormats ini cach acts tates e wk ae ele ee RIAA Ate te cee athe amp 299 Configuring Logging and Calculation 0 cece eee ee eeee 301 Sereen OVELVIEW os oo eas ject E EE A AE AA E wee E See aerate ove 301 Configuring Register Logging 0 6 c cece cee ences 302 Configuring Low High and Mean Calculation and Logging 303 Configuring Stale Data Settings 26 6 c cece cece ee 303 Configuring Downstream Device Functionality 0000s eee 304 Saving and Exiting s lt 5 seb Gas seni Hib Spee ea a e EA a okies 305 ION Allert Monitor cccccsccccccccssssssssceccccccceessses S07 ION Alert Monitor 0 ccc ccc cee cece cect e eee
263. gs for the specified range Your changes affect only the currently selected priority range Click New to add a new priority range In the Priority dialog box type a number representing the lower limit of the new range then click OK The upper limit of the new range is automatically defined by the lower limit of the existing range For example if you have an existing range of 128 191 you can type 100 then click OK and the range 100 127 appears To delete an existing range select it and click Delete The Level to acknowledge list specifies the access level required to acknowledge alarms in the selected range Annunciation lets you customize the way Vista annunciates an alarm Select Beep to play a beeping sound Select Flash to have a flashing display Select Command line to have Vista to automatically launch another application in the event of an alarm Type the program s executable exe command into the field provided or click Browse to locate the appropriate file This option can be used to automatically alert other users of specific events through paging systems fax transmissions or any other command line capable application Select Message box to display an annunciation message When you select this option type your message into the field provided The first line of text appears as the title of the message box and the remaining text appears as the content of the message box By default Vista uses a beeping sound to
264. gy suppliers and energy consumers in European countries Three EN50160 templates are available in Reporter EN50160_General Use the EN50160_General template to create a report containing detailed analysis of all EN50160 compliance data logged by a single meter Data is recorded for each observation period The worksheets contain percentages of non compliant EN50160 measurements such as Power Frequency Supply Voltage Magnitude and Flicker The EN50160_General template uses data from these fourteen EN50160 log files EN50160 Vit Dp1 to EN50160 Vit Dp5 supply voltage dips EN50160 Ovrvlt1 to EN50160 Ovrvlt3 temporary overvoltages EN50160 Vunbal supply voltage unbalance EN50160 Hrm VIt harmonic voltage EN50160 Ihm VIt interharmonic voltage EN50160 Frq Mg frequency and magnitude EN50160 Flicker flicker o EN50160 Intrp short and long term interruptions EN50160_Summary Use the EN50160_Summary template to create a report containing comprehensive analysis of all EN50160 compliance data logged by multiple meters The compliance summary is based on the EN50160 limits for each observation period each default EN50160 measurement indicates a pass or fail on the compliance test with a Y yes or N no respectively The EN50160_Summary template uses data from the same log files as the EN50160_General template Page 333 Types of Default Reports Page 334 PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide
265. hanges and exit User Manager Page 58 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Groups Changing Group Information 1 Select the group associated with the information you want to change 2 Type the new information in the Edit User Group section of the Groups tab Use the right and left arrow buttons to add or remove users from the selected group as needed After you edit a group s name or description an asterisk appears beside that group in the list of groups until you click OK to save the information 3 Click Apply to save your changes or click OK to save the changes and exit User Manager Deleting Groups To delete a group select the group from the list and click Delete A NOTE You cannot use the Revert button to undo a deletion To undo a deletion click Cancel to exit out of User Manager without saving your changes 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Page 59 License Manager PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide License Manager For additional device or client user support e g Vista clients for your ION Enterprise system or to add OPC and or PQDIF options order the appropriate license from Schneider Electric When you receive your new license use License Manager to upgrade the number of supported devices and client users in your system 1 Log in to Management Console 2 Click Tools gt License Manager The License Manager dialog box appears
266. has two options Select Inherit from parent window to use the default font Select Custom to specify a custom font Click Font to display the Font dialog box and change the font size style or color The Position section has three options Left Center and Right to define the alignment of the text in relation to the diagram object Use the Preview area located beside the Text tab to view your proposed changes 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Edit Text Options Edit Text Options To view the Edit Text options right click on the object then select the Edit Text tab Use the Edit Text tab to specify a text message for the text box The Edit Text tab is available on the text box object only The Edit Text tab has two options Use default displays the window link information i e the node Use custom displays your custom text message If you select custom use the text box to enter your text The text box supports multiple lines of text If your message appears incomplete or truncated after you enter text and click OK you can adjust the dimensions of the text box object To resize a text box select it then drag its handles The font used in the text box is based on the default setting specified for the active window Use the Text tab to specify a different font or position for the text box Use the Box tab to specify a border style or change the background color
267. he Connection Schedules icon right click in the display window then select New gt Connection Schedule The Scheduled Site Connection dialog box appears The following sections describe the available tabs and how to configure them General Settings Tab On the General Settings tab Type the name of your connection schedule for example Daily Reading in the Name field Type a description of the connection schedule if required Make sure Enabled is selected if you want to enable the schedule Select the date from which the schedule is valid Sites Tab On the Sites tab Click the box beside the sites and devices to select those that you want to include in the connection schedule A check mark appears beside an item to indicate that it is included in the connection schedule Set your Site Connection Settings To enter the minimum and maximum time to stay connected type the time in the fields or use the arrows to change the time Set the Connection Priority The higher the number the greater the priority given to that schedule if there are concurrent connection requests General Settings Sites Schedule Sites to Connect a O Sites O Modem Sites O Direct Sites 0 Ethemet Sites Q Building Electricity O Building2 Electricity O Building2 PQ Gateway FAG ataman Site Connection Settings Minimum connection time 00 01 00 kE kp Maximum connection ti
268. he order of the items in the Selected column highlight the column name you want to move in the Selected in order list then click the up or down arrows to move it The columns are listed from top to bottom in the order they will appear from left to right For example if you want the Timestamp column to be the first leftmost column in your log viewer highlight timestamp in the Selected in order section then click the up arrow to move it to the top of the list After you have selected the columns you want proceed to specify filter settings Specifying a Filter Use the Filter section to construct one or more filter statements for your log viewer Filters are useful for restricting the scope of your query or specifying a priority range for alarms To edit an existing filter statement double click on it 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Select a column Click here to replace the Select an operator Using the Query Wizard Select a value Select an additional selected filter statement with a new one Click here to insert the new filter statement into the box below Click here to delete the selected filter statement from the box below 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Filt A Tigestamp Format BETWEEI flast_month_to_d v AND UR E timestamp BETWEEN jast month to date AND today_1 value Click here to add NOT
269. he selected measurement This mapping remains in place even if the device is reconfigured such that this register is used in an entirely different context This may cause unexpected problems in the ION_Data database It should be used only if you are certain that the configuration you have chosen is permanent Basic View To switch to Basic view click View gt Options In the Advanced section of the Options dialog box clear the enable advanced features check box Click OK In Basic view when you enter a new name in the Updated Assigned Source column all rows that contain the same Assigned Source name are automatically filled in with the new name Existing data in the historical database ION_Data is also automatically updated to reflect the change Advanced View To switch to Advanced view click View gt Options In the Advanced section of the Options dialog box select the enable advanced features check box Click OK In addition to the columns displayed in Basic view Advanced view displays all the other columns for editing individual source measurement definitions i e Updated Measurement Handle Entered By Update Historical Database and Manual In Advanced view you can Select and make changes to a specific row without affecting the other rows For example you may want to change the source name for one particular measurement while leaving the original source name unchanged for all the other measurements Select a
270. hedule To edit a schedule name or description 1 From the navigation pane right click a schedule name then click Edit Schedule The Edit a Schedule dialog box appears 2 Change the schedule name or description To change the effective date you must make the change to the sub schedule s See Editing a Sub Schedule Effective Date on page 83 3 Click OK Deleting a Schedule To delete a schedule right click the schedule name in the navigation pane then select Delete Schedule This deletes the entire schedule including any sub schedules Adding or Editing a Sub Schedule Page 82 When you add the basic schedule it contains one sub schedule with the effective date start date you entered for the schedule To add additional sub schedules with alternate effective dates follow the instructions in the following sections Expand a schedule to display its sub schedule s Sub schedules are listed in order of their effective dates QE Tip If you want to have more than one sub schedule with the same seasons day groups TOU periods etc contigure the first sub schedule then right click on it and select Save as New SubSchedule 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Configuring Seasons Adding a Blank Sub Schedule 1 Right click the schedule name and select New SubSchedule The New SubSchedule dialog box appears 2 Click the arrow beside the effective date to
271. her data from all of the available sources and then makes the data available to ION Enterprise components like Vista through the ION Query Service or Web Reporter through direct database queries Page 18 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Getting Started Getting Started This section describes how to start log on to and exit most components of ION Enterprise Starting a Component of ION Enterprise Use one of the following methods to start the main components of ION Enterprise i e Management Console Vista or Web Reporter Open the ION Enterprise Tools folder on your desktop and double click the icon of the program you want to start Double click the ION Enterprise icon to open the ION Enterprise Taskpad then click on one of the links Click Start gt Programs gt Schneider Electric gt ION Enterprise Tools and select the program you want to start or click Start gt Programs gt ION Enterprise to launch the ION Enterprise Taskpad Logging into a Component of ION Enterprise Ending a Session 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Most ION Enterprise programs require you to log in before you can access them At the logon prompt type your user name and password in the appropriate box then click OK Some actions are restricted to certain users or groups depending on how their login permissions were set up See User Manager on page 55 for
272. ht click to display its properties Click the Query tab Click Edit Query Select Global then click Add Click Next Select Global Event Log then click Add Click Next SY SY CST ae GS In the Available section select the columns you want to display then click Add If you want to change to order of selected columns select the column in the Selected section then use the up or down arrow buttons to move it accordingly Click Next 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Stale Data or Error Indicators 8 Select the column you want to assign as the first sorting criteria then click Add Repeat for the second sorting criteria and so on In the Sort Order section double click a column to change its sort order e g change from ascending to descending 9 Click Finish 10 Click File gt Save Stale Data or Error Indicators 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved WebReach uses the Vista stale data settings for its diagrams Stale data and errors are displayed in the web browser as follows A yellow border surrounding an object indicates stale data An orange border surrounding an object indicates an error in communications security access configuration or other system error A NOTE See Identifying Stale Data on page 96 for information on stale data Although you can change the stale and error flag colors in Vista the color indica
273. iagrams as you want and edit each one to suit your needs You can share user diagrams with multiple users over your network and users can view them simultaneously and share the same information For more information on creating user diagrams see Creating and Customizing a User Diagram on page 127 Default User Diagrams Vista provides a set of pre configured user diagrams that you can use to display data These default diagrams provide a standard set of options that you can use to access your device s most commonly required functions The default diagram displays real time data It includes a simple power system illustration that displays the various real time parameters measured by the device Generating Opening and Closing a User Diagram A user diagram is identified by its dgm extension You can generate open and close user diagrams as needed Generating a Network Diagram The network diagram displays your entire power monitoring system by linking to individual default user diagrams that display data from each device in your system When you generate a network diagram Vista automatically locates all devices in your system and displays them This diagram is saved with the default name network dgm 1 Select File gt Generate Network Diagram The network diagram appears in the workspace containing icons that represent groups of devices on your system 2 Click on one of the grouping objects to open a window an
274. iately removes the icon from the node diagram and deletes the module from the node The difference is when you delete a module it is discarded when you cut a module it can be restored by selecting Edit gt Paste NOTE You do not have to select Send amp Save Changes to delete a module Designer immediately removes the module from both the diagram and the node Removing an ION Module from the Node 1 Select the icon s of the module s you want to remove 2 Do one of the following To cut the module s to paste it in another location select Edit gt Cut To discard the module s press the Delete key A NOTE If a module has a dependent module on another node Designer does NOT alert you of the dependency when you delete it Before you delete a module ensure that you are aware of all links to modules on other nodes Designer displays a summary of the proposed changes Utility TempReader 5 The following modules will be affected eee me CANNOT be deleted Power Meter CANNOT be deleted kW swd Will be deleted dependents kWh imp int Will be deleted The selected module is a core module it cannot be deleted because it is required by the device for operation 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Viewing a Node or Module as Text The summaty lists all selected modules and identifies those in the selection that will be deleted includi
275. ible grid Objects placed onto the grid snap to the nearest gridline to help align and space them evenly To activate or deactivate the grid 1 Select Edit gt Layout or click The Layout dialog box appears 2 Select the Grid tab 3 Select one of the following options No grid turns the grid off Grid size in pixels activates the grid Type a number in the Grid size in pixels box to specify the size of the grid distance between grid lines 4 Click OK to save your changes 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Customizing a Diagram Object Customizing a Diagram Object After you have placed and linked a diagram object you can customize it Right click on a diagram object in edit mode to display the configuration options available for that object type Customizing a Diagram Object 1 Right click the diagram object The lt Object gt Configuration dialog box appears where lt Object gt is the type of diagram object selected 2 Select the appropriate tab and make your changes Repeat this step for the other tabs until you have made all your desired changes 3 Click OK to save your changes to the diagram object The options available vary depending on the tab and the object selected See the sections below for details on the options available for different tabs and objects The Preview Pane Use the Preview pane to view how your proposed changes will appear i
276. ice type to the ION_Network database but changes were made to the template then you can update the ION_Network database to reflect these changes You are notified if the update is successful or not If it fails you must remove any devices of the specified device type from Management Console and then update to the ION_Network database again A NOTE The ION_Network database update may fail if the device type you are updating is currently being used in Management Console If this occurs you must remove all devices of the specified type before the update will be successful or contact Technical Support for possible workarounds Add Generate Network Diagram Support If a Vista diagram has been created for a device type then you can set it up as the default network diagram in Vista This enables all devices which are of the new device type to have default diagrams in Vista when the Generate Network Diagram feature is utilized It is recommended that the default Vista diagram is created before running this feature You must configure the following factory registers in order for this feature to work correctly FAC Device Type register This register must have a constant value This is set in the Device Properties window as the Device Type Use a descriptive name that easily identifies the device FAC1 Template register This register must have a constant value Use something specific to the current register For
277. ices A downstream device is one whose data is logged by a remote data recorder for example A Modbus slave device whose output registers are logged by a device with Modbus Mastering capability see illustration below A Modbus device whose outputs are logged by the Virtual Processor Any of various multiple sources in which the same measurement is being logged on a single device e g an RTU that is collecting kWh pulses from multiple sources or a single branch circuit monitor that is collecting current readings on multiple circuits Data Recorder L ION Enterprise server Physical Source Modbus Master Downstream Devices Modbus Slaves ION Enterprise automatically detects downstream devices The Log Inserter component does this by looking for devices called physical sources that record or host data coming from various downstream devices for example an ION meter that utilizes a Modbus Import module to pass through data originating from a downstream Modbus device Log Inserter resolves the data from each of these downstream devices to the appropriate measurement for example the label VII ab resolves to the measurement Voltage Phases AB For data that cannot be resolved Log Inserter creates measurements whose names are based on the ION register labels Log Inserter uses a logical naming scheme to assign names to the downstream devices For example Modbus 34 is the name assi
278. ices that are running Right click Databases then select Detach The Detach Database dialog box appears Select the database you want to detach Click Clear to ensure there are no connections to the database In the Detach options section select whether or not you want to update statistics prior to detach Click OK Right click Databases then select Attach The Attach Database dialog box appears Click the browse button and navigate to the database you want to attach Edit the Attach as field or leave the default name Click OK Restart ION Enterprise services Attaching a Database Using Database Manager If you attach a database to the ION Enterprise system via Database Manager you must keep all ION Enterprise services running This differs from the Detach Attach procedure described in Detaching then Re attaching Databases above Attaching a Database Using Database Manager 1 Page 258 Right click Databases then select Attach The Attach Database dialog box appears Click the browse button and navigate to the database you want to attach Edit the Attach as field or leave the default name Click OK 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Restoring an ION Database from a Backup Restoring an ION Database from a Backup 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved To recover a database after a full backup replace the lost or corrupted database
279. ics Analysis Phasor Diagram Fz lss Dl m V2 First Point 03 12 2007 04 48 34 279 AM 8 SSi Di BE o 10 551 Di I j x Za Mi 400 A GE HAAN A alta PET fee SS1 oian ee 13 S51Di 395 T 100 i Dn n 2 aio is g Calculations 100 AREETA Log View Plotter Window 200 Info Timestamp Cursor 1 03 12 2007 04 48 34 279019 AM 448 35 300 Cursor 2 03 12 2007 04 48 35 1786786 AM 470 99 DeltaC 0 899767 22 64 400 u u i Min 495 42 y Max 494 60 lata dpeak 990 02 Avg 0 156951 FR RMS 317 555922 al C Int H 0 000039 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved The default display is the Plot Display tab Depending on the type of data selected the Log View Plotter may also offer a Harmonics Analysis tab and a Phasor Diagram tab In all cases the Log View Plotter offers additional information in two floating boxes the Legend and the Calculations window The Legend Each line or bar in the graph is represented by a pattern of the same color in the legend GF Tip Click on the curve sample in the legend to select its equivalent in the graph Displaying the Legend 1 Right click on the background of the Log View Plotter window 2 Select Graph Options in the pop up menu The Graph Options dialog box appears Select the Show legend check box then click OK Page 109 The Log View Plotter Interface Page 110 PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide The Calculations Window The Log View Plotter cal
280. ied to display a custom description See Caption Options on page 134 for more information When a label is used it is usually displayed to one side of the diagram object By default the label identifies the register on the node to which the diagram object is connected The label can be modified to display a custom label name See Text Options on page 134 for more information GF Tip To toggle between default labels and custom labels select or clear Options gt Show Default Labels You can identify the type of diagram object by pointing to it with the mouse The object type appears on the status line Identifying Stale Data Real time data that has not been refreshed is referred to as stale data Vista detects stale data as it occurs and identifies it with a colored border By default Vista identifies data as stale after 30 seconds for meter diagrams the default value is 60 seconds Position the mouse pointer over an object to display a ToolTip that explains why the data has become stale The stale data settings are user configurable on a per diagram basis and can be customized by anyone with the necessary access level Changing the Stale Data Settings To change the amount of time in seconds that Vista uses to identify stale data 1 Right click the background and click Properties 2 Click the Updates tab and change the settings in the Stale Data section 3 Click OK Page 96 2009 Schneider Electri
281. iewing Historical Trend Data PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Viewing Historical Trend Data Click Device Diagram to return to the main device diagram screen Click Show Graph Show Table to toggled between graph and table views we which data is displayed Device Diagram Change Date Range Select the data you want to appear in the graph Show Graph M kW MV KVAR MV kVA T kw F kVA Timestamp tot tot tot tot eae tot ee Click Edit Graph mean mean mean high a high to change how the 2007 Feb 23 23 45 00 000 8 904 3 662 9 712 33 071 11 022 33 8 4 598 graph is displayed WebReach provides a web based graphing utility for viewing historical data This utility allows you to select the date range and the data that you want to view Viewing Historical Data Graphically Click Change Date Range to Main Entrance7650v321 ZA change the range of dates for Page 164 2007 Feb 23 23 30 00 000 7 789 3 366 8 539 15 575 8 49 4 534 10 635 16 507 8 995 Device Diagram Change Date Range Show Table 2007 Feb 23 23 15 00 000 9 561 2007 Fet Main Entrance7650v321 I KW tot mean VV KVAR tot mean KVA tot mean wh Sass lag on Wy Hir ANAR S g S S R g gR R a 38 38 38 36 38 GE g8 3E gE nS a nS nS ns nS a 2S nS Rs Rs RS Re gs Rg RS Re Rs Timestamp Left click and drag to zoom Right click and
282. ifies to automatically disconnect from the site after Log Inserter has finished downloading all outstanding logs including event and data logs The default value is No Device This explicitly defines which specific device to connect to in the site This attribute overrides data contained in the alarm message Site This explicitly defines which site to connect to This attribute overrides data contained in the alarm message Multi Station Setup It is possible to run the ION Alert Monitor on more than one machine in the ION Enterprise system However the configuration files must be stored in the primary server following the convention ComputerName AlertMonitor config Page 311 Starting the ION Alert Monitor PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide For example the Alert Monitor running on a secondary server named ComputerTwo uses the configuration file named ComputerTwo AlertMonitor config located in the primary server Diagnostics Diagnostic and error messages are logged in the ION Enterprise system log with the source Alert Monitor Starting the ION Alert Monitor By default the ION Alert Monitor is stopped and set to Manual startup type To automatically start Alert Monitor on Windows startup change the startup properties of this Windows service to Automatic then start the service Refer to your Windows documentation for details Page 312 2009 Schneider Ele
283. ile Edit Format view Help isa heading jmestamp vll ab mean 974 603 ab mean v11 be mean 047 601 598 112 342 601 598 202 751 603 599 807 460 603 599 353 The date and time are separated Columns are A hard return by the symbol or a space separated by a tab begins a new row Adding Data to a Graph from a Spreadsheet or Text File 1 Open the spreadsheet or text file 2 Copy the range of values you want to plot including the first column and the first row Include other columns in your selection if required 3 Click on the title bar of the Log View Plotter window then select Edit gt Paste The parameters you copied and pasted are added to the graph The axis scales are adjusted automatically to include the new data You can define a trigger for waveform records containing timestamps when you copy records from other applications Simply add an exclamation mark to the end of the timestamp to indicate that itis the trigger time For example the exclamation mark at the end of 22 05 1998 02 00 41 035 PM indicates that the trigger occurred at this time 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Customizing the Log View Plotter Display Customizing the Log View Plotter Display 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Many display attributes for each curve can be adjusted In most cases if you right click on an area of the graph either a pop up men
284. in a node without the module it represents When you paste a selection containing a shortcut Designer searches both the selection to be pasted and the destination to locate the module the shortcut represents If it finds the module it pastes the shortcut as a shortcut If it doesn t find the module it replaces the shortcut with a copy of the module In this way Designer ensures that the pasted selection is complete and not dependent on a module that is unavailable in the destination node Designer performs this process automatically it requires no input from you 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Copying and Pasting ION Modules Modules that Cannot be Pasted Some modules cannot be pasted because their settings are non transferable between nodes All Factory Communications and Diagnostics modules must be individually configured for each node When pasting a selection that contains a Factory Communications or Diagnostics module Designer pastes the location of the icons only Cloning a Node You can quickly configure multiple nodes by cloning a node Essentially cloning a node involves copying a node s complete configuration to a framework then pasting it onto another node This effectively reprograms the node receiving the framework as an exact copy of the original A NOTE When you paste an entire node s configuration the
285. include parameters that return data values as described in the following table Command Parameter Description U Universal time seconds since January 1 1970 u Universal time YYYY MM DD HH MM SS FFF T Local time seconds since January 1 1970 t Local time YYYY MM DD HH MM SS FFF n Node name e g device name g Gate name e g site name p Priority name P Priority number m Alarm message without delimiters M Alarm message with delimiters The value of the AlertMonitorNodeName attribute If this attribute is not s used the default value is AlertMonitor ComputerName The ConnectionRequest element contained in the ActionSet has attributes that you can define as described in the following table ConnectionRequest Attribute Description MaxConnectTimeSeconds Maximum time in seconds a connection to the site is maintained The default value is 300 seconds MinConnectTimeSeconds Minimum time in seconds a connection to the site is maintained The default value is 60 seconds RequestLifetimeHours Defines how many hours a connection request remains valid before it is discarded even if attempts to connect to the site fail The default value is 0 RequestPriority Priority of the connection request which ranges from 0 to 2000 The highest priority is 2000 The default value is 1999 DisconnectOnCaughtUp This spec
286. information and performing control functions as required The Virtual Processor s name implies its characteristics Virtual The Virtual Processor runs in the memory of your PC not as a remote device Processor The Virtual Processor contains a wide selection of ION modules which it uses to process information Using the Virtual Processor The Virtual Processor is not configured at the factory To perform data collection data analysis Modbus communications or distributed control you must first create ION module frameworks using Designer Refer to the ION Reference for information on ION modules Configuring the Virtual Processor with Designer Use Designer to perform all Virtual Processor configuration including adding new modules configuring module setup registers and linking module inputs and output registers to other modules Creating a Second Virtual Processor Create a second JON Virtual Processor Service and start it using the following steps 1 Open a command prompt window 2 Register the Virtual Processor as a service from the ION Enterprise system bin folder by typing vip exe Service N lt custom Virtual Processor name gt 3 Open Control Panel gt Administrative Tools gt Services and start the new registered Virtual Processor Page 244 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Distributed Control Viewing Virtual Processor Data with Vista Aft
287. ing Logged Data Data and events recorded by the devices in your system are regularly transferred by the Log Inserter from each device to the database Vista uses the ION Query Service to transfer this information from the database to your workstation Vista provides two ways to view logged data and events the Data Log Viewer and the Event and Global Event Log Viewer The Data Log Viewer displays data logs from all devices represented in the active user diagram You can use the Data Log Viewer to display waveform and trend data in tabular format You can also select a range of logs from the viewer and display the data graphically in the log view plotter The Event Log Viewer typically displays events and alarms from each device represented in the active user diagram The Event Log Viewer is used primarily to monitor low priority events and alarms associated with the active user diagram Each Event Log Viewer is associated with a single user diagram The Global Event Log Viewer is a special version of the Event Log Viewer used primarily to display high priority events and alarms for your entire system The Global Event Log Viewer is not associated with any single user diagram the event information it displays is common or global to the entire system Using a Data Log Viewer Page 100 Use a Data Log Viewer to view system data stored in the database Data Log Viewers display historical trend data from data recorders and waveform dat
288. ing Window Properties PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Page 160 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Chapter 5 WebReach WebReach enables ION Enterprise to display Vista user diagrams in a web browser With WebReach multiple users can access and display network and other diagrams created in Vista without installing additional software A NOTE Currently only Microsoft Internet Explorer version 6 0 and later is supported by ION Enterprise In This Section WebReach Support on page 162 Displaying Vista User Diagrams Online on page 163 Advanced WebReach Configuration on page 168 Custom Network Diagram Setup on page 168 Troubleshooting on page 170 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Page 161 WebReach Support PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide WebReach Support The WebReach component of ION Enterprise employs a thin client design allowing users to access and display Vista diagrams in a web browser WebReach manages all the necessary data processing and system functions at the server and uses XML to process Vista objects and data for display on the web pages Use a web browser from any machine on your network to view the Vista user diagrams of devices in your power management system Objects that can be displayed in the web browser include real time numeric data full or partial gauges background graphics or diagrams and basic views of e
289. ing a REPO orrea le ek ie aie cd ee PAA te eee BEY 330 Modifying the Finished Report 0 e cece e eee eee eee 330 Types of Default Reports cee cece cece cee cence neces 331 Creating a Report Without a Template 0 eee eeceee ee 335 Automatic Report Generation cece eee e ee cece eee eee 336 Using Reporter on Secondary Server or Client Troubleshooting Chapter l Introduction PowerLogic JON Enterprise software is a complete power management solution for energy suppliers and consumers It allows you to manage energy information from metering and control devices installed in your facility or other remote locations ION Enterprise offers control capabilities and comprehensive power quality and reliability analysis to help you reduce energy related costs ION Enterprise supports multiple communications standards and protocols available on various intelligent metering devices You can also connect to existing power monitoring systems through industry standard protocols such as Modbus OPC DNP and XML ION Enterprise uses Microsoft SQL Server for efficient and secure data management You can install the SQL Server 2005 Express Edition that comes with ION Enterprise 4 GB maximum database size or for larger database needs you can use an existing SQL Server instance Standard edition or better to host the ION Enterprise databases In This Section ION Enterprise Software
290. ing area Use the column sorting and filtering features described in Customizing and Navigating Interface Displays on page 22 to control which devices are displayed in the table If you want to apply the changes to all devices clear any filtering before making the changes 3 Click Apply to save your changes and continue working or click OK to save your changes and return to Management Console A NOTE If you changed the name of one or more devices a warning displays with a list of devices that will be renamed If data for those devices already exist in the ION Data database and you still proceed with the renaming then the existing data associated with the old device name is lost orphaned Click Continue to proceed or Cancel to go back and edit the device configuration 4 When you have finished click OK to save your changes and return to Management Console or click Cancel to discard your changes If you click Cancel a dialog box prompts you if there are pending unsaved changes when you click Cancel Click Yes to discard the changes and return to Management Console or No to return to the configuration window and continue editing If inappropriate values such as a device that is renamed with the same name as another existing device are encountered a message displays with error details You cannot save the configuration changes until you have corrected the errors Page 48 2009 Schneider Electric Al
291. inked the label of the register it is linked to is displayed beside the input If you select the input the existing link is overwritten The inputs that are of a different class than the selected output register are grayed out to indicate you cannot select them 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Linking ION Modules Across Different Nodes 5 Select the input you want to link to Inthe menu click the register you want to select Inthe dialog box double click the register or click it then click Select 6 Select File gt Send amp Save to save your changes to the node The procedure described above can also be performed in reverse order You can select a module s input first and then link it to another module s output register Linking Modules with Variable Number of Inputs Some modules such as AND OR modules Data Recorder modules and Log Acquisition modules have a variable number of inputs In these cases when you click on the input symbol the pop up menu offers one instance of the variable input as well as any fixed inputs the module may have When linking to one of these modules you can select the NEW Source item to add a new link or you can select an existing link and overwrite it If the two modules are in the same window the line remains on the screen to show the link between the modules when you save this change to the node the line changes from a dotted li
292. ion 187 default definitions 175 EN50160 report 175 energy cost report 176 energy period over period comparison report 176 energy usage by shift report 176 event log report 176 export 186 generate 180 IEC 61000 4 30 report 176 inputs 180 load profile report 177 power quality report 177 print 185 save 185 share 187 subscription 188 subscription configuration 61 172 system configuration report 178 tabular report 179 trend report 179 upload reports report packs 191 S selecting multiple items 22 serial device 32 add 34 server 31 add server 33 services Windows 16 site direct site 31 Ethernet gateway site 31 modem site 31 OPC site 32 SQL Server 18 SQL Server instance 256 start a component 19 status object 99 128 display options 139 subscription event watcher 62 Web Reporter 188 symmetrical components 117 system log events 41 T text box object Vista 128 Time of Use Designer advanced configuration 241 time of use Designer 241 time of use Web Reporter 80 U upgrade device 71 user diagram 93 add diagram object 128 129 background color 155 background image 156 communication errors 97 copy paste diagram objects 129 create new 127 customize 127 customize diagram object 133 default 94 default action for window 158 default node 158 default query server 157 diagram objects types 128 edit display mode 92 enable undo option 128 font 155 layout 131 navigate 95 save 127 sp
293. ion s CPU usage ZN CAUTION Do not use the Virtual Processor in any capacity where a failure to execute an expected control action could result in equipment failure or danger to personnel Do not use the Virtual Processor for time critical functions The information presented in this section assumes that you are familiar with the various ION modules and their functions Refer to the ION Reference for details on Distributed Control and other modules Distributed Control Modules The Virtual Processor uses four modules to implement Distributed Control frameworks Three types of Distributed Control modules Distributed Boolean Numeric and Pulse modules receive data from devices or other Virtual Processors within your network and transfer this data to the node address specified in the module s setup registers The Data Monitoring module is used as a means of disabling a control module if the data at the source input which is used to make the control decision becomes stale Page 245 Distributed Control Page 246 PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Distributed Control Module Setup Registers All Distributed Control modules Distributed Boolean Distributed Numeric and Distributed Pulse modules have a Source input and an Activate input The Activate input must be linked to another module and it must be on for a Distributed Control module to function These modules also contain a Destination setup register that speci
294. iption from the list then click Add to add a new subscription The Add New Subscription dialog box appears 3 Type a name for the subscription in the Name field This is the name that displays in the list of subscriptions 4 Select the output format 5 Select a delivery mode Email Click Distribution List Enter the e mail address es to which you want to send the report and click Add after each address select an address from the list and click Remove to remove it Click OK when the list is complete In the Add New Subscription dialog box type the text you want in the subject line of the email in the Subject field File share Type the location of the computer and folder where you want the report to be saved You must type the absolute pathname to the folder including the drive letter The Windows user account IONUser must be configured with valid credentials to read and write to that fileshare See you system administrator for assistance To overwrite an existing report if one exists in the folder select Overwrite existing file To leave an existing file in the folder and save the new report with a new name clear Overwrite existing file Printer From the dropdown list select the printer to which you want to send the report amp NOTE For printed subscriptions the printer must be a local printer on the Primary Server For information on setting a network printer as a local printer consult Mi
295. isible in the ION Map Information pane With this feature enabled you can edit the properties of the Factory objects Show Modbus Addresses Offset in Hex With this feature enabled all Modbus addresses in the Modbus Register Information pane are displayed in hexadecimal format A NOTE If this setting is enabled registers cannot be edited in the Modbus Register Information pane Select Help on the main toolbar to access the following menu items About Provides version information for the program Modbus Device Importer Help Opens the Help file for the program Configure Logging and Calculation Button Page 290 Click this button to enter the Configure Logging and Calculation utility This screen allows you to configure advanced functions for Modbus devices such as enabling logging and should only be used by advanced users See the Configuring Logging and Calculation on page 301 for more information 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Editing a Register Editing a Register To edit a register right click on the register in the ION Map Information pane and select Advanced Properties The following dialog box displays the register information Depending on the type of register being edited different data fields may appear Edit Numeric ariable_Register with Handle 13421 Ea Register Labe PIERE J7 Make this register a constant value
296. isplay 29 manager 281 Modbus add device type 278 configure advanced device functions 301 configure advanced functions 290 default device types 278 edit register 291 map file 278 Modbus gateway add device 34 modem add 36 dial out 32 remote modem setup 74 WinModem 36 monitoring applications 14 N navigating tree structures 22 network component 31 add 33 delete 37 edit 36 network diagram generate 94 node diagram 198 add module 210 add text box 215 configure module 224 copy module 230 to framework 231 create shortcut to module 236 custom labels 227 default versus custom labels 204 delete links between modules 222 display edit mode 200 find dependent modules 211 icons 201 link modules 217 220 link modules across nodes 219 linking modules 217 locate existing ION module 210 paste module 232 free paste or lock paste 235 from framework 232 reset module 228 shortcut to module 214 view as text 213 view input information 240 view output register information 239 view setup register information 240 numeric object 98 128 display options 136 numeric object Vista flags 98 138 O OPC device 32 OPC Server 15 OPC site add device 35 P phasor diagram 116 power factor display in Vista 114 PQDIF Exporter 15 programming applications 15 Q query database Vista 148 query server 148 querying database query wizard 150 R register 281 Reporter 325 reports 100 ms report 175 administrat
297. ist of three phasors that are equal in magnitude and displaced from each other by 120 and have the same phase sequence as the original phasors Negative Sequence Components 2 these consist of three phasors that are equal in magnitude and displaced from each other by 120 and have the phase sequence opposite to that of the original phasors Zero Sequence Components 0 these consist of three phasors that are equal in magnitude and with zero phase displacement from each other If the original phasors of voltages are Va Vb and Vc then the symmetrical components would be as follows Va Val Va2 Va0 Vb Vb1 Vb2 Vb0 Vc Vcl Vc2 Vcd The symmetrical components function as implemented inside some ION meters is useful for steady state analysis unbalance since the parameters are updated every second However when determining the symmetrical components during a fault per cycle analysis is required For this application you do not need real time updates from the meter because you are only interested in the relatively short time before during and after a system fault This information is contained in the waveforms recorded when triggered by a disturbance Page 117 Plotting Waveforms from Devices with High Sampling Rates PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Viewing Symmetrical Components 1 From a waveform Data Log Viewer such as Waveforms Sequence of Events select all three phases of a fault voltage or current
298. ize the User Manager display by filtering and sorting For instructions on using these features see Customizing and Navigating Interface Displays on page 22 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Page 55 Users PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Symbols Used in the Updated Column The following symbols are used in the Updated column to display the status of information in a row Information in the row has been modified since it was last saved There is an error in the information in the row The row is new since the user or group information was last saved Users Use the Users tab to view add and edit users and user information Information that is required but is missing or incorrect is marked by an exclamation mark amp User Manager x Users Groups Hep gover Updated Username First Name LastName Organization Business Email Mobile Email Access Level x guest Guest Account Default Organization Supervisor supervisor Supervisor Account Default Organization Supervisor List of users JakobS Jakob Schmidt MyCompany jakobs mycompany c Supervisor JohnL John Liu MyCompany johni mycompany com Operator Robertac Roberta Cruz MyCompany robertac mycompan Controller Pierre Pierre Jacques MyCompany pierrej mycompany c User I AlexanderK Observer Edit User Account Edit User Account For New User section Nn Usemame First Name Business E
299. ject Vista 129 D data copy data to another application 101 filter data 24 plot 101 108 real time 98 sort 24 stale data settings Vista 96 159 view logged data 100 data log viewer 100 diagram object 128 link to data source 147 database 18 access via 3rd party application 275 ION ION_Data 18 network configuration ION_Network 18 system events ION_SystemLog 18 database management alarm configuration 260 archive 261 268 attach 262 backup 262 271 create new database 264 defragment 262 detach 262 export registry setting 263 manual 260 modify login 263 optimize query time 273 restore 264 scheduled 267 scheduled maintenance 270 SQL editor 265 trim 265 270 update statistics 266 upgrade database 266 Designer clone a node 237 ION modules toolbox 209 node diagram 198 window configuration 206 Designer See ION modules see node dia gram 207 device Ethernet 32 serial 32 diagnostics communications 68 server 67 diagram object 93 caption options 134 preview pane 133 direct site add serial device 34 display adjust column width 23 arrange columns 23 customize interface 22 dock pin pane 22 filter data in column 24 grid tables 23 group table data by column 24 hide unpin pane 22 resizing panes 22 select columns to display 23 sort data in column 24 downstream device 314 downstream device assistant add new device mapping 322 basic versus advanced view 315 change measurement mapping 322 columns 316 displa
300. jects You can copy and paste modules and registers After you copy an object you can paste it into a different location in the tree You cannot paste registers or modules from one class type to another i e you cannot copy a Boolean register and paste it into a numeric module Copy Copies your selection s to the clipboard There are three different paste options Paste Paste Clone and Paste Multiple Paste Pasting registers will normally automatically increments the Modbus address based on the register data type In the case of MaskedBool it increments the bit mask by one until it reaches 0x8000 when the Modbus address increments by one and the mask resets to 0x0001 The new register label is reset to a default label such as Power Meter Module 0004 Paste Clone Pasting a Clone is the same as pasting normally with the exception that the Modbus address of the register is not increased This is a useful feature for pasting multiple registers with the same Modbus address but applying different masks The new register label is reset to a default label such as Power Meter Module 0004 Page 285 View Menu View Menu Page 286 PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Paste Multiple Pasting multiple copies simply performs a normal paste a determined number of times each copy incrementing the address the appropriate number of addresses Moving Objects You can move both modules and registers This is done
301. jects are available for all nodes A NOTE To identify a module in the toolbox point to it with the mouse the module type is displayed as a ToolTip and on the status line at the bottom of the screen To add a module to your node diagram and to the node itself drag its icon from the toolbox into the diagram window Opening the ION Modules Toolbox To open the toolbox select Options gt Show Toolbox Closing the ION Modules Toolbox Click the Close button xj or clear Options gt Show Toolbox Page 209 Adding a New ION Module PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Locating an Existing ION Module Before you can edit a module you must first locate it in the node diagram To find a module in a node diagram you can use the module tray feature of the toolbox Locating an Existing Module from the Module Tray 1 To display the module tray right click the toolbox icon for the type of module you want to locate The module tray appears beside the toolbox Display Modules Coed Ged Ged Ged Gd Ged Gd a a DNP O gt n a The module tray displays links to all modules of that type that are currently in use on the node for example in the image above there are eight Display modules in use by the node To identify a link in the tray point to it the module s label is displayed on the status line at the bottom of the screen 2 To locate a particular module click its link in the module tray Designer
302. l rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Configuring Multiple Devices Configuring Addresses Ports Unit IDs and Sites The following sections describe how to configure addresses ports and unit IDs Configure TCP IP Addresses w 0 E Start fi End B Remove Parameters Text color is red if the number of items does not match the number of items in the Table Editing area If the numbers match the text color is black Exceptions lt none gt This pattern will generate 8 TCP IP Addresses Configure Reset Configuring TCP IP Addresses 1 4 Select the section of the IP address that you want to configure The Start box displays the selected number letter which is the start value Use the up or down arrow in the spin box to change the start value or simply type it in the box Click the up or down arrow on the End box edit the range or type the end value in the box To clear the range and start over click Remove Parameters Set exceptions for individual values or a range of values if required Exceptions reduce the number of addresses created i e total generated addresses minus the exceptions See Setting Exceptions to Generated Sequences on page 46 Click Configure at the bottom of the Configure TCP IP Addresses section Configuring Unit IDs The following instructions apply to serial devices and Ethernet
303. label is replaced with dashed lines When you have unlinked all the registers you need to click OK 4 Select Send amp Save to unlink the modules on the node Deleting a Module s Output Links You can also delete links from the Register Owners dialog box This method gives you the most information about the link you are deleting the output register label and the input and label of the module it is linked to Viewing a Module s Output Links 1 Right click on the output symbol side of the module icon To list the module s setup registers hold the CTRL key while right clicking on the symbol The Register Owners dialog box appears 2 Select the output register you want from the Registers section The Owners section lists all the module inputs to which the selected register is linked 3 To delete one or more of these links select the module input in the Owners list box and click Unlink The input name is replaced with a dashed line 4 When you have unlinked all of the module inputs you want click OK 5 Select Send amp Save to unlink the module inputs on the node A NOTE Owners that reside on a different node are NOT displayed in this dialog box If you need to delete a link between modules on different nodes use the procedure described in Deleting a Module s Input Links on page 223 Page 223 Configuring ION Modules PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Configuring ION Modules After you have pl
304. last item To select non adjacent items hold down the CTRL key then click to select the items To select adjacent items in Vista or Designer diagrams drag a selection box around the items All items in the box are selected Adjusting the Display of a Window or Dialog Box The following sections describe how to resize and hide or reveal panes Resizing Panes To resize panes in a window point the mouse at the border where the two sections meet When the resize handle appears drag to move the border Dock Pin or Hide Unpin Pane Some interfaces in ION Enterprise have panes that can be hidden visible temporarily or docked visible all the time To hide or dock a pane click the Pin Unpin Gg button on the pane When a pane is hidden it is minimized to a button at the edge of the workspace To temporarily show a hidden pane hover the mouse over the button for that pane Move the mouse away to hide the pane again Page 22 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Grid Table Controls Grid Table Controls Certain windows and utilities in ION Enterprise display information in grid tables These tables have unique table and information display commands Group By Box Dynamic Filter Area Co umn Header Sort Icon Filter Icon Column Selector Site Y Column Selector 2
305. lder Alert Monitor resides on the ION Enterprise workstation where it receives and processes incoming alarms from a remote ION meter s Alert module With the implementation of the ION Alert Monitor alarm notification is improved and simplified Since Alert Monitor runs as a Windows service a user is no longer required to log in to ION Enterprise in order to start monitoring the system for alarm conditions Alert Monitor can handle incoming calls from multiple communications ports When alarms are received Alert Monitor uses the ION Connection Management Service to establish a modem connection rather than using the legacy command line executable conman exe ION Connection Management Service allows you to set up specific modem connection request properties such as Minimum Maximum Connection Time Disconnect on Caught up etc These properties are set up in the Alert Monitor s configuration file see Setting Up the ION Alert Monitor on page 309 A NOTE Alert Monitor does not support TAPI modem drivers for Windows WinModems How It Works The ION Alert Monitor responds to alarm messages originating from the Alert module in an ION meter For example an alarm message is initiated as a result of a power quality event 1 An alarm condition prompts the ION module e g Setpoint module to send a pulse signal to the Trigger input of the ION meter s Alert module Refer to the description of the Al
306. lect a check box Click on the check box again to clear the check mark Click OK to return to the Templates tab To add a condition without selecting from the event log click New A new row appears in the table for the new condition A NOTE It is recommended that you use Select From Event Log to add conditions This ensures that the syntax is correct If the syntax is not correct the event watcher will not work Conditions only appear in the Select Event Log Lines dialog box after they have occurred in the system 2 Select the parameters you want to include in the condition by selecting or clearing the check boxes below the Template Conditions table The available parameters are Priority Cause Cause Value Effect Effect Value You must include at least one parameter If you select multiple parameters the event watcher only activates when all parameters are met The Logic of the Template Conditions The conditions within a row of the Template Conditions table must all be true for the condition to be met For example if you have a row with a Priority of greater than 220 and an Effect Value of Disturbance both of these must be met for the condition to be true If you have multiple rows in the table the condition is met if any of the rows are true For example if you have a row with Priority greater than 220 and a row with an Effect Value of Disturbance the condition is met if either of these are true Deleting and Reverting
307. lect a large number of records for plotting without scrolling down repeatedly Page 148 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Using the Query Options Update automatically This option is disabled cleared by default The Data or Event Log Viewer does not display any new records rather the Log Viewer initially uploads the specified number of records for example 100 and does not update again unless it is closed and its query results deleted then reopened With this option selected the Log Viewer continually receives and displays new records up to a maximum of 1000 records the Log Viewer checks for new records every 20 seconds However the updates can consume a noticeable amount of CPU power especially if several Log Viewers remain open simultaneously or if Log Viewers are uploading waveform data The Global Event Log Viewer is hard coded to update automatically every 10 seconds This prevents you from missing alarms Delete query on close This option is enabled selected by default The Log Viewer clears its temporary records from active memory RAM upon closing so that every time a Log Viewer is opened the database is queried again and all available records are displayed This option does not affect any original records stored in the database If this option is disabled Vista caches the record set returned to the Log Vi
308. lect every month or set Frequency to 1 and Fixed Day to 15 Relative Day The backup occurs on the specified day of the month at the specified frequency in months For example to set the backup to occur on the second Sunday of every third month set Frequency to 3 or select which months you want to the backup to occur in and select 2nd and Sunday from the Relative day dropdown lists 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Optimizing Database Query Time Optimizing Database Query Time 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved There are steps you can take to optimize the database query time Use Database Manager to defragment the appropriate database Use Database Manager to Update Statistics on the appropriate database Run only one instance of SQL Server 2005 Run SQL Server 2005 Standard Edition instead of SQL Server 2005 Express Edition A NOTE Instructions on how to perform the Defragment and Update Statistics operations can be found in the section Manual Tasks on page 260 Limiting SQL Server Memory Usage By default SOL Server 2005 Standard Edition and SQL Server 2005 Express Edition are configured to dynamically adjust the amount of memory used based on demand Under some circumstances it is possible for SQL Server to use up memory to a point where the overall system performance is affected You can adjust the amount of memory reserve
309. lectric All rights reserved Modbus Communications Virtual Processor TI Road Tadued by remote Modbus Mosier Modbus Slave Modbus Value 1 i Remote Modbus Device Module Modbus Value2 i Modbus Register Map BO Source 1 leat EO Source 2 i Modbus Value 32 Modbus Base Modbus Link nO Source 16 2 Requested data is sent from the Slave Module to the specific Modbus registers The Virtual Processor s Modbus Slave Module A standard Modbus Slave module can take up to 16 ION register values and make them available to a Modbus master In the Virtual Processor the Modbus Slave module can also be used to bring Modbus data into your power monitoring system it permits a Modbus master to push data into the Virtual Processor A NOTE Refer to the ON Reference for more information on the Modbus Slave module When a Modbus Slave module in the Virtual Processor has no links to its inputs the output registers of the module show the contents of the Modbus register map Currently only the Modbus Slave modules in the Virtual Processor have this additional capability the Modbus Slave modules in ION meters cannot do this Use the Modbus Slave module to bring Modbus data into your power monitoring system as follows 1 Sta
310. lick File gt Manage and select the Manage radio control 2 From the list box select the report or folder that you want to manage 3 Select one of these options New Folder When the Create New Folder dialog box appears type the name of the new folder and click OK The new folder appears in the list Delete A prompt appears asking you to confirm the deletion unless you have selected an empty folder in this case the folder is deleted without confirmation Click OK to delete the report If there are any subscriptions for the report the prompt informs you of the subscriptions Rename Type the new name in the field at the bottom of the screen Click Update to save the change Copy Select the location where you want to copy the report and click Update The report is copied to that location The name of the copied report is Copy of lt report gt where lt report gt is the original report name Move Select the new location and click Update The report is moved to the new location Use the Share option on the Manage Reports dialog box to make a report available to a user or group Users with supervisor level access can share any report all other users can only share reports that they own 1 2 3 Click File gt Manage and select the Share radio control Select the report that you want to share from the list box Select the user s or group s you want to share the report with from the Available Users a
311. lient installation to report on the ION Enterprise SQL database using Reporter import this registry key to the secondary server or client before generating the reports Importing the registry key export file 1 Locate the primary server s ION Ent share typically ComputerName ION Ent where ComputerName is the computer name of the Primary Server on your network and navigate to the ION Enterprise config cfg folder 2 Double click the file named ION_DsnKeys reg to import it into your registry Page 337 Troubleshooting PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Troubleshooting Excel file does not open when you double click its icon This might occur when a Microsoft Excel process hangs To fix this start Excel and open a file or create a new one Click Tools gt Options then in the General tab clear Ignore other applications Close and exit Excel If this does not work try rebooting the computer Page 338 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Index add connection schedule 39 Ethernet device 35 modem 36 network component 33 OPC device 35 serial device 34 server 33 advanced security access meters with 38 alarm acknowledge Vista 105 silence Vista 106 alarm options 144 alert monitor 308 configuration file 309 setup 309 annunciation options 144 C CBEMA 125 configuring multiple devices 48 connection schedule 39 control object action options 143 display options 141 control ob
312. ll saved changes in the Downstream Device Assistant are stored in a log file named Downstream Device Historical UpdatesYYYY MM DD_hh mm ss txt that contains a description of the activities carried out when Downstream Device Assistant was updating the source measurement definitions Page 323 Downstream Device Assistant Commands PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Downstream Device Assistant Commands The following summarizes the commands available in the Downstream Device Assistant File gt Save Saves your changes A copy of the changes are saved for future reference in a comma separated value csv data file in the config Diagnostic Downstream Device Assistant folder File gt Exit Closes the Downstream Device Assistant Edit gt Reset Clears all modifications made since the last save Edit gt Delete Deletes the selected rows gt Edit gt Rename Source Lets you change the name of an Assigned Source See Renaming the Assigned Source on page 321 Edit gt Update Historical Data Opens the Update Historical Data window that allows you to open a previously saved source measurement definition data file with a csv file extension for the purpose of updating existing data in the database You can also manually add edit or delete data entries See Updating the Historical Data at a Later Time on page 323 View gt Refresh Loads the current downstream definitions fro
313. locates the module and displays it in the center of the workspace If the module is located inside a grouping window Designer opens the window to display the module QF Tip To close the module tray click on any module icon in the toolbox Adding a New ION Module Page 210 Most nodes are pre programmed at the factory to provide the most commonly required functions However if the factory default configuration is not appropriate for your application you can add a new module Adding a Module on a Node Drag the icon of the module you want to add from the toolbox onto the node diagram As you drag the icon the cursor changes shape to indicate you are placing an object Designer adds the module and places a pending module icon into the diagram You can then link and configure the module See Linking ION Modules on page 217 for more information on programming modules 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Deleting or Cutting an ION Module Deleting or Cutting an ION Module 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved To remove a standard module from a node delete its icon from the node diagram By removing unnecessary modules from the node you can free up resources for use elsewhere A NOTE Each time a module is deleted all of its output registers setup registers and input links are deleted as well Removing this information from the node affe
314. lts 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Page 169 Troubleshooting PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Troubleshooting Page 170 WebReach depends on the ION XML Subscription Service and ION XML Subscription Store Service to function properly If you are experiencing difficulties with WebReach pages such as getting an error message when you try to open a device diagram check to make sure these services have been started No Real time Data is Displayed This may be caused by security settings being reset by a Microsoft Windows update If this is the case open Internet Explorer select Tools gt Internet Options then click the Security tab Click the Trusted sites icon then click Sites Add the WebReach website i e http lt computer name gt Web to the Trusted sites zone Page cannot be displayed Error This may be caused by complex or large queries such that the results do not arrive within the default WebReach timeout setting of 60 seconds If you suspect this is the case add the custom DWORD registry key QueryTimeout and set it to a higher decimal value e g 120 Tick Labels for Gauges are Unreadable This may occur if you specify an unsupported font for the Ticks Label Font To fix this select only TrueType or OpenType fonts in Vista 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Chapter 6 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Web Rep
315. lumn appears in the Sort Order list Available Columns displays the columns you chose in step 3 2 Double click on the column in the Sort Order list to select either an ascending or descending sort order The Sort Order list displays the column s that dictate the order in which the records are sorted 3 Click Finish to save your changes and quit the Query Wizard 4 Click OK in the Configuration box to save your changes 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Customizing a Diagram Window Customizing a Diagram Window Default Font Background Color 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved You can customize the appearance and configuration of any window within a user diagram You can customize a window s font or background color or configure window properties such as background image real time and logged data links double click action and stale data settings In many cases Vista uses the properties specified for the parent window as the default settings for any diagram objects or grouping windows contained within By modifying a setting in the parent window you automatically modify the same property on all objects inside the window that share this setting For example any object with an option set to Inherit from parent window shares this information This can be useful when adding multiple diagram objects that are all linked to the same source To access any o
316. m Query Server Options Display Options Page 136 Use the Query Server tab to connect a diagram object to a Query Server The Query Server tab is available on the Data Log Viewer and Event Log Viewer objects See Linking a Data Log Viewer or Event Log Viewer on page 147 for more information The Query Server tab is also available on grouping objects and any object configured to open a grouping window or user diagram In this case use the Query Server tab to specify a default Query Server for the associated grouping window or user diagram See Query Server Setting a Default Query Server for a Window on page 157 for more information Use the Display tab to customize the appearance of a diagram object The Display tab is available for the following diagram objects Numeric Status Control and Grouping The Display tab offers a unique set of options for each type of diagram object To view the display options right click on the diagram object then select the Display tab Customizing the Display of a Numeric Object Numeric objects display real time data in your user diagram The default numeric object appears as a rectangular alphanumeric display with a single decimal place of resolution and no unit symbol You can customize the display to change any of these default elements A NOTE Vista supports a maximum of 59 non alphanumeric numeric objects within a single window To change the way numbers are displayed
317. m the database Functionally the same as Edit gt Reset as this command clears all modifications made since the last save View gt Options Displays the Options dialog box where you can change the settings that control what level of detail is displayed for the source measurement definitions View gt Select Physical Sources Displays the Select Physical Sources dialog box where you can select which physical devices you want displayed in the Downstream Device Assistant Page 324 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Appendix Appendix A Reporter Reporter is the legacy program from ION Enterprise version 5 6 and earlier that defined generated and managed comprehensive reports based on information contained in your database Reporter processes selected data and generates a finished report in Microsoft Excel format A NOTE Microsoft Excel 2003 must be installed on your machine for Reporter to function Microsoft Outlook 2003 must be installed if you require reports to be emailed For information on using Web Reporter the replacement for Reporter see Web Reporter on page 171 In This Section Introduction on page 326 Creating a Report on page 327 Generating a Report on page 330 Modifying the Finished Report on page 330 Types of Default Reports on page 331 Creating a Report Without a Template on page 335 Automatic Report Generation on page 336
318. mail Alexanderk Password Last Name Mobile Email CO Re enter Password Organization Member Of occccvece i Everybody Access Level Available access Observer levels Supervisor Message area Page 56 Adding Users 1 Click New A new row appears in the list of users and the fields in the Edit ae data has errors Errors must be corrected before saving changes User Account section are empty ox 2 Enter the user information username and password are required other information is optional 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Users Username Type a username for the new user maximum length 50 characters no spaces allowed Password Type a password for the new user maximum length 50 characters no spaces allowed Re enter Password Re enter the password you typed in the password field An exclamation mark appears beside this field unless the content of the two password fields matches Access Level Select an access level for the user See Access Levels on page 55 for an outline of the different access levels and their permissions First Name Type the user s given name Last Name Type the user s family name Organization Type the user s organization Business Email Type a business email address for the user gt Mobile Email
319. mbols If you click on several items in a row you only see the menu for the last item you click however Designer initiates many requests for information which may impact its performance Linking ION Modules Using the ION Tree In some cases you may want to use the ION tree to select the register for linking The ION tree is a hierarchical listing of every node manager module and register in the ION Enterprise network It allows you to select a register on a node without opening the node diagram Generally you use the ION tree to create links across nodes The ION tree is also the only way to select registers from devices that are not ION compliant and use translators to make data available such as 3000 series meters For example if you are programming a Virtual Processor node and you want to sum data from several 3720 ACMs you must access the 3720 ACM register via the ION tree Page 220 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Linking ION Modules Using the ION Tree Using the ION tree is faster than opening a node diagram It is useful if you want to link to a register on a node whose diagram has not yet been opened It is also useful if you want to link to a register but you are not acquainted with the configuration of the node in which it resides You can go straight to the register without having to navigate through an unfamiliar node diagram Also since a diagram can only be acc
320. me 2007 Feb 23 22 45 00 816 200 Sag Swell 1 Disturbance Start SS1 DistState Main Entrance76S0v321 2007 Feb 23 17 02 03 404 25 Ethernet Time Change Clock 1 Time Changed Main ntrance76S0v321 2007 Feb 23 23 02 04 573 25 Ethernet Time Change Request Clock 1 Time About to be Changed Main Entrance7650v321 2007 Feb 23 23 02 03 035 Ethernet Time Change Clock 1 Time Changed Main Entrance7650v321 2007 Feb 23 22 45 00 974 Sag Swell 1 Disturbance End SS1 DistState Normal Main Entrance7650v321 Adding a Global Event Log Viewer Page 166 2007 Feb 23 17 02 02 395 Ethernet Time Change Request Clock 1 Time About to be Changed Main Entrance76S0v321 2007 Feb 23 06 02 03 597 a Ethernet Time Change Clock 1 2007 Feb 23 06 02 02 191 25 Ethernet Time Change Request Clock 1 2007 Feb 22 08 02 03 982 25 Ethernet Time Change Clock 1 2007 Feb 22 08 02 02 367 25 Ethernet Time Change Request Clock 1 Time About to be Changed Main Entrance76S0v321 To display the Vista Global Event Log Viewer online you need to create an Event Log Viewer object in the Vista diagram and link it to the Global Event Log To add this object to the home page for WebReach 1 Open network dgm in Vista and make sure you are at the top level i e title bar displays User Diagram network Select Options gt Show Toolbox to switch to Edit mode Drag an Event Log Viewer object onto the diagram Rig
321. me 00 15 00 IT After all Sites have been connected start again with the first Site Set Connection Priority pm a Controls the order of concurrent connections Valid range is 1 2000 higher values have higher priority manual connections have a priority of 2000 OK Cancel Page 39 Configuring Connection Schedules PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Schedule Tab On the Schedule tab Set up the date schedule for the connection the default is Daily Schedule options vary depending on the type of schedule selected Daily Occurs every day Weekly Occurs on the selected day at the specified frequency in number of weeks and stays active for the specified duration For example if you set Frequency to 2 Day of week to Sunday and Active Duration to 2 the connection occurs every second Sunday and stays active for two days Monthly Day of Week Occurs at the specified frequency in months in the week and on the day specified and for the specified duration For example if you set Frequency to 3 Day of Month to 2nd and Sunday and Duration to 1 the connection occurs every third month on the second Sunday and stays active for 1 day Monthly Day of Month Occurs at the specified frequency in months on the specified date of the month and for the duration specified For example if you set Frequency to 2 Day of Month to 15th and Duration to 2 the connection occurs on the fifteenth day
322. module There are three different register types Boolean Registers Boolean registers hold Boolean data i e a logical True or False 1 or 0 You can attach a label to the register to indicate an ON or OFF state If a numeric register is mapped to a Boolean register a value of 0 zero puts the Boolean register in an OFF state while any other value turns the Boolean register ON unless a mask is applied Page 281 Registers Page 282 PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide If any of the bits exposed by the mask are set the value is interpreted as a True Otherwise it is interpreted as False MaskedBool can be used to sift out individual Booleans that are stored as arrays of bits in Modbus If no mask is specified all bits are relevant Boolean registers can be 16 or 32 bits long Numeric Registers Numeric registers hold numeric data Pulse Registers Pulse registers are used in Vista to send a pulse to the specified address They are used specifically to write values to a device The user can specify the exact value to send out as a pulse for each register Pulse registers can only write 16 bits worth of data Factory Registers You cannot add or remove Factory objects but you can edit them All Factory registers are initially set to a default constant value You can change these constant values or map the registers to a valid Modbus address see Editing a Register on page 291 There are four us
323. mp Groups box then click the right arrow to move the user s or group s to the Share List To unshare a report select the users or groups from the Share List and click the left arrow Select Order by type to order the lists alphabetically by group then by user Click Apply The report is available to the users in the Share List Page 187 Creating Report Subscriptions PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Creating Report Subscriptions What is a Subscription A subscription is a report which is delivered in a specified manner at a defined interval For example a subscription can be configured so a report is generated monthly and sent via e mail to a group of people Subscription Configuration Before configuring certain types of subscriptions you need to configure reporting subscription options such as the SMTP server for email subscriptions or how to handle files when report subscriptions are written to a fileshare See Reporting Configuration on page 172 for information on configuring these options Adding a Subscription You can only create subscriptions for reports you have access to see Sharing a Report on page 187 The report must be a saved report that has all of its inputs defined see Generating and Viewing a Report on page 180 and Saving a Report on page 185 1 Click File gt Manage and select the Subscribe radio control 2 Select the report to which you want to create a subscr
324. n and reattach the file The backup file is a file copy of the live database but it must have some operations performed on it to allow it to replace the live database The Restore command performs these operations The Restore Database dialog box has the following sections and fields Select the backup to restore This section of the dialog box lists the available database backups Click on a backup to select it The selected database backup has an arrow next to it in the list Click Properties to display the name size start date finish date location and description of the selected backup Restored database name Select or type a name for the restored database Database file location Select the location where you want to save the restored database Page 264 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide SQL Editor Trim 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved SQL Editor Right click on Databases and select SQL Editor to display the SQL Editor dialog box CAUTION When you select this task the following warning appears Any alterations made using the SQL Query Editor may be irreversible Click OK to continue or Cancel to cancel The SQL Editor is intended only for advanced users who have a solid understanding of SQL and ION Enterprise databases changes made through the SQL Editor are in some cases irreversible FE SQL Editor _ Joy x
325. n 29 07 17 09 146 998 Jun 29 07 17 09 162 98 Jun 30 13 27 34 876 1998 Jun 30 15 10 32 297 1998 Jun 30 15 10 32 314 1998 Jun 30 16 55 11 972 1998 Jul 02 15 40 45 171 998 Jul O7 11 19 22 297 Jul 08 19 33 59 13 1998 Jul 08 19 55 00 826 After the report is generated click the tab named for the waveform query to view The left pane contains timestamps that link to the waveform chart on the right pane Click a timestamp to view the waveform To view the waveforms for each current and voltage phase click Show Complete on the Waveforms toolbar Use the magnifying glass icons to zoom in or zoom out 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Creating a Report Without a Template Custom Templates Contact Technical Support if you require other specialized report templates Creating a Report Without a Template 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved You can use Reporter to copy raw data from a database and paste it into Microsoft Excel 1 In the main Reporter window select Manage Reports then click New 2 Fill in the Report Name box select lt No Template gt then click Next 3 Click New to create a source log query for the report Set the Query Properties Name New queries are automatically named in a sequential manner but you can also rename them as required Source Select the source of the query e g power meter Log Choose the data log that y
326. n Options Page 142 PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide To view the action options right click on the diagram object then select the Action tab Use the Action tab to specify the response of a diagram object when it is clicked in Display mode or double clicked in Edit mode The Action tab is available for the following diagram objects Numeric Status Grouping and Control objects Depending on the type of diagram object the Action tab displays one of two sets of options Specify an action for a numeric status or grouping object Customize the action for a control object Specifying Action for Numeric Status or Grouping Objects A NOTE If you change the action for a grouping object that is already associated with a grouping window the existing window and any objects within it is deleted Vista displays a warning before performing this action When you right click on a numeric status or grouping object the Action tab displays the available options Select None if you do not want the object to support an action This is the default for numeric status and grouping objects Select Open Grouping Window to open a grouping window when the object is clicked You can use this grouping window to display additional information For example if a numeric object displays a total value such as total kW you can display specific information such as kW readings for each phase in an associated grouping window
327. n Type Select what period of data you want to compare the selected Aggregation Period to i e today vs the same day from the previous month or current month vs the same month from the previous year The options vary depending on the Aggregation Period selected Number of Comparisons Enter the number of periods you want to compare Aggregation Interval This input appears when you select Month for the Aggregation Period Select how you want data grouped for the report by date Day of Month or the day of the week Selected Dates This box displays the dates of the data that will appear in the report based on the options selected For example to compare the selected measurements for the same day of the month over the last 12 months set Aggregation Period to Day set Comparison Type to Today vs Same Weekday From Previous Month and enter 12 in the Number of Comparisons field Rates Use this input to set up parameters for energy cost reporting Click Configure Rates to access the Energy Rates dialog box Click Energy and Demand to configure basic rate parameters for the report In the Select Measurements section click the check box beside a measurement to include it in the report In the Select Billing Calculation section select Flat Rate or select TOU Schedule If you select TOU Schedule select a time of use schedule from the dropdown list see Time of Use Editor on page 80 for information on configuring a time o
328. n action being performed Communication status lights Indicate if Designer is currently receiving and transmitting data on the ION Enterprise network The Node Diagram Page 198 Anode diagram is a graphical representation of an ION compliant node The node diagram displays the actual configuration of the node Module icons represent the ION modules in the node while lines drawn between these module icons show links between the ION modules In some cases groups of modules are organized inside grouping windows When closed a grouping window appears as a grouping object an icon that looks like a folder Click a group object to open the grouping window that contains the module icons Using a Node Diagram The node is graphically displayed as a node diagram in Designer The node diagram contains a number of ION modules which represent the node s current configuration You can change the configuration of the node simply by editing its node diagram For example when you delete a module from a node diagram the module is removed from both the diagram and the node You can add configure 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved The Node Diagram link and delete modules on the node by making the corresponding changes to the module icons in the node diagram A module s setup registers can be accessed and changed through the module icon
329. n heading to sort the row entries in ascending or descending alphanumeric order according to that column Downstream Device Assistant Options Page 318 Click View gt Options to display the Options dialog box Options xj M Measurements M show all measurements display ION labels C display measurement names M Historical Data T show connection dialog Advanced Cancel Certain options such as show all measurements and the Handles display options are disabled in Basic View To enable them switch to Advanced View first see Advanced on page 320 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Downstream Device Assistant Options Measurements This section allows you to select whether to display the default ION label e g Vln avg in the Measurement column or to display the full descriptive name of the measurement e g Average Voltage Line to Neutral In Advanced view only you can also select whether to display all available measurements or only the most common measurements in the list when picking a measurement in the Updated Measurement column Displaying ION labels versus measurement names To change the setting 1 Click View gt Options 2 Inthe Measurements section select display ION labels to display the ION label or display measurement name
330. n the diagram For some tabs you access dialog boxes by right clicking on the image in the Preview pane for example the Display tab of a numeric object More information is given in the relevant sections that follow Available Configuration Options The following table lists the various configuration options available for each type of diagram object Available Option Tabs Caption Text Edit Text oat ae Display Action Box Annunciation Query Alarming Grouping Object x x x x x Text Box Object x x x Numeric Object x x x x x x x Status Object x x x x x x x Data Log Viewer x x x Event Log Viewer x x x x Control Object x x x x x x 1 Node is the tab available with Grouping Objects A Query Server is only available on Grouping Numeric Status and Control objects when the Action is set to something other than None 3 See Querying the Database on page 148 for information on configuring this option 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Page 133 Caption Options Caption Options Text Options Page 134 PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide To view caption options right click on the object then select the Caption tab Use the Caption tab to add custom user defined text to a diagram object The Caption tab is available for the following diagram objects Grouping Numeric Status Data Log Viewer Event Log Viewer and Control The C
331. n used to quickly replace old modules with new ones lock pasting is an efficient alternative to the time consuming process of deleting a module adding a new one and then configuring it You can use a combination of both free paste and lock paste within a single paste operation Z NOTE You can pre select modules for Designer to reuse when free pasting In the actual diagram where you paste the selection press the SHIFT key and then click on any module icons that you don t want When you paste the new selection Designer has the option of replacing any of the selected modules with the new ones A NOTE Overwriting a module is not the same as deleting the module and then pasting a replacement module If a module is overwritten links from the outputs of that module are retained at the inputs of other modules If a module is deleted these links are also deleted and do not exist after the replacement module is pasted Pasting Shortcuts Identified by the symbol 7 a shortcut icon is a representation of a module icon that is located in another window You can copy a shortcut in the same way you copy the original module but when you paste a shortcut one of two things happens It is either pasted as a shortcut to an existing module if one is available or as anew module In either case it continues to perform its function as before There is a basic reason for replacing a shortcut with a module a shortcut cannot exist
332. nager dialog box appears 2 Type a name for the manager 3 Select a manager type from the drop down list External Boolean Manager External Numeric Manager or External Pulse Manager A NOTE The manager type you choose determines parameters in the modules and registers under it 4 Click OK Page 284 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Edit Menu New Module Adds anew module Adding a New Module 1 Click Edit gt New Module The Add New Module dialog box appears 2 Type a name for the module The default is the next available number of that module type within the current manager e g Ext Num 3 The name of the module determines the default names of the registers under it Note that the module name can be changed later if required 3 Click OK A NOTE Duplicate names are permitted but not recommended New Register Adds a new register See Editing a Register on page 291 for more information on using this dialog box New Register Quick Adds a new register using all default settings No dialog box is associated with this command unless no registers currently exist in the target module in that case it is treated as creating a new register with a dialog box The Modbus address is automatically incremented as appropriate based on the register type and size Copying and Pasting Ob
333. nal Information Additional Information Data Formats Typically Modbus data is transmitted in big ENDIAN big end in format but alternates in which the individual 16 bit words are swapped are not uncommon The formats supported by ION Enterprise 6 0 are Format Type Description SINT16 A 16 bit signed value in 2 1 or big ENDIAN format The high order byte is first the low order byte second UINT16 A 16 bit unsigned value in 2 1 or big ENDIAN format The high order byte is first the low order byte second A 32 bit signed value returned in two consecutive 16 bit registers The high order word is returned in the first SOC a teas register the low order word in the second In effect the 4 bytes are returned in 4 3 2 1 or big ENDIAN format A 32 bit unsigned value returned in two consecutive 16 bit registers The high order word is returned in the first DINE Se OF US 2ea2 2 register the low order word in the second In effect the 4 bytes are returned in 4 3 2 1 or big ENDIAN format A 32 bit signed value returned in two consecutive 16 bit registers Contrary to 32_4321 the high order word is 3322123 returned in the second register the high order word in the first In effect the 4 bytes are returned in 2 1 4 3 format U32 2143 A 32 bit unsigned value returned in two consecutive 16 bit registers Contrary to U32_4321 the high order word is returned in the second register the low order word in the first
334. nal Parameters from a Data Log Viewer 1 Select the range of cells you want to plot Ensure that it contains the same type of information timestamps as the data already being plotted 2 Select Edit gt Copy 3 Click on the title bar of the existing Log View Plotter window then select Edit gt Paste The parameters you selected are added to the graph If you want to plot waveforms on the same graph as historical data the historical data should originate from high speed data recorders and span a short time range typically a few waveform cycles lt 1 second Adding Events from an Event Log Viewer You can add events to a waveform or trend plot This is useful for comparing abnormalities of the waveform or trend shape with any corresponding events that happened in the same time period Adding Events from an Event Log Viewer to a Waveform 1 Select the row s you want to add in the Event Log Viewer 2 Select Edit gt Copy 3 Click on the title bar of the existing Log View Plotter window then select Edit gt Paste The copied event records are added to the graph Each event is represented in the Log View Plotter as a diamond symbol A diamond symbol is added to the legend and diamond symbols appear at the appropriate areas along the top of the diagram Point to a diamond symbol to display a description of the event in the status bar at the bottom of the screen Page 119 Adding Parameters to a Log View Plotter Page 120
335. name in the TOU name field 3 Click OK Deleting a TOU Name Select the TOU name in the list on the Define TOU Names tab and click Delete Page 87 Configuring TOU Names and TOU Periods Page 88 PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide A NOTE If you delete a TOU name the TOU periods assigned to the name are replaced with Unaccounted Deleting a TOU name in a particular schedule affects all sub schedules in that schedule Defining TOU Periods A TOU period is the time span within the 24 hour period to which you apply a TOU name such as 8 00 a m to 5 00 p m for On Peak You must have TOU names defined before you can associate TOU periods with those names Two TOU names are already defined On Peak and Off Peak You can edit or delete these names or add new names Adding TOU Periods Select a day groups to set up the TOU time periods on peak off peak etc for that group 1 Inthe navigation pane select the day group for which you want to define a TOU period then select the Define TOU Periods tab 2 Click Add The Add a Time Period dialog box appears 3 In the Start Time field type the time that the period begins or select the hours and minutes and use the up and down arrows to set the start time 4 Inthe Stop Time field type the time that the period begins or select the hours and minutes and use the up and down arrows to set the stop time 5 From the Time of Use Name dropdown list select the TOU
336. name to associate with the time period 6 Click OK To add a split time period i e a time period that spans from 19 00 to 6 00 you must add two separate time periods and associate them with the same time of use name If you want to expand a time period into time that already belongs to another period you must first edit the other time period to clear the time Continue adding time periods until the 24 hour period is filled Unaccounted time blocks cause your reports to display inaccurate information Editing TOU Periods 1 Highlight the period you want to edit and click Edit The Edit a Time Period dialog box appears 2 Make the required changes then click OK Deleting TOU Periods To delete a period highlight the period and click Delete 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Chapter 4 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Vista Vista is the ION Enterprise component that displays and controls your power monitoring management system For information on starting and logging on to Vista or ending your Vista session see Getting Started on page 19 In This Section ee E E SE SE SE SE AH FH FH FH FH HH HF OH G The Vista Interface on page 90 Vista User Diagrams on page 93 Monitoring Your System in Vista on page 96 Viewing Real Time Data on page 98 Viewing Logged Data on page 100 Adding a Global Event Log Viewer on page 104 Acknowledgin
337. nd of the command line and append r lt ReportName gt where ReportName is the name of the report you want to schedule for automatic generation note that spaces in the report name are not supported system bin repgen exe r lt ReportName gt Reporter also supports multiple report generation Separate the report names with a comma For example if you have reports named Rep1 and Rep2 the command line might look like this D Schneider Electric ION Enterprise system bin repgen exe rRep1 Rep2 8 Verify your schedule settings in the Schedule tab To create more schedules select the Show multiple schedules check box Click New to create a new schedule 9 Click OK A NOTE Check the properties of your report to make sure you have specified a valid Date Range for your report and that the Show Report on screen option is cleared Page 336 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Using Reporter 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Using Reporter on Secondary Server or Client on Secondary Server or Client When Database Manager archives ION_Data it creates a registry key export file that includes the DSN data source name it created The registry file is called ION_DsnKeys reg and is stored on the primary server in this folder ION Enterprise config cfg If you want an ION Enterprise secondary server or c
338. ndows in your Workspace To arrange windows do one of the following To locate an open window and move it to the foreground select the Window menu and select the window name from the list of open windows To arrange all open windows in the workspace select Window gt Arrange All Changing a Window s Background Color By default the background color of all windows in a node diagram is light gray To select a new background color for a window 1 Right click on the background of the window and select Background Color The Color dialog box appears 2 Select the color you want or click Define Custom Colors for more options 3 Click OK When choosing a background color consider how the color affects the visibility of icons and links Links highlights and shadow effects used to depict the various states of an ION module may not appear against certain background colors For this reason you should avoid using certain colors for your background particularly white dark gray and black Changing a Window s Default Font You can specify a default font to be used for all module icons grouping icons and text boxes in a window 1 Right click on the background of the window and select Default Font The Font dialog box appears 2 Specify anew default font size and style 3 Click OK Fonts can also be specified individually for grouping windows and text boxes See Changing the Font of a Grouping Window on page 203 an
339. ne to a thin black line to indicate that the link is now programmed on the node Linking ION Modules Across Different Nodes If the selected node is a software node such as the Virtual Processor or Log Inserter many of the links you create are to modules on other nodes When you create links across different nodes it is important to keep track of these links and note what modules are dependent on others This helps you determine what will happen if you ever want to delete a module that is linked to a module on another node A NOTE You cannot link modules on one device to another For example you cannot create a link between a module on an ION7330 to a module on a different ION7330 or to a module on another meter 1 Open the node diagrams that contain the modules you want to link 2 Position the diagrams within the workspace so you can see the two modules you want to link 3 In the first node diagram click on the output symbol of the module icon A pop up menu or dialog box appears listing the module s output registers 4 Inthe list of output registers click the register you want In the case of the dialog box click a register and then click Select 5 Drag the cursor from the first node diagram to the module you want to link to in the second node diagram The dotted line ceases to follow the cursor if it crosses the window boundary but the cursor changes to indicate a link is in progress 2009 Schneider Electric
340. ner Icons Page 204 PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Displaying Default or Custom Icon Labels Module icons can display two types of labels Default left and Custom right Ext Pulse 19 Master Reset ifs AN k X 5 g je Default labels All modules have a default label The default label identifies the module by type and if applicable by number It appears in node diagrams user diagrams and event logs unless a custom label is available Custom labels Custom labels are available only if they have been preconfigured by a user A custom label usually identifies a module by its function or purpose Custom labels are useful for describing modules setup registers output registers and Boolean ON OFF conditions For information on adding custom labels see Customizing a Module Label on page 227 Displaying Default Labels or Custom Labels Select Options gt Show Default Labels to toggle the option on or off When Show Default Labels is selected default labels are displayed When Show Default Labels is not selected custom labels are displayed This is a global setting that applies to all node diagrams Moving Icons in a Node Diagram You can move module and grouping icons anywhere in a node diagram This is useful for organizing your diagram for example by function or type so that you can easily find a particular module or visualize the workings of your node s configuration You can move a single icon or g
341. ng a Value Between Devices The following example shows how the numeric output of the Integrator modules in meter A is sent to an External Numeric module in meter B Virtual Processor Distributed Numeric Module Meter A Meter B Source Activate External Numeric Integrator Module Output E Module Output i Data Monitor Module Status Source Note that the Distributed Numeric module is disabled if the Data Monitor module detects a communication problem between the meter A and the Virtual Processor e g timeouts or slow network connections This helps to ensure that control actions are only performed based on up to date data Page 247 Modbus Communications PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Example Device Control This example framework monitors total harmonic distortion THD which could cause a piece of equipment like a power transformer to overheat When a setpoint is reached the system sends a network message to a workstation and turns ona fan Setpoint Module Source Distributed Boolean Module Data Monitor Module Status Destination ION meter External Boolean module Switch register Q External Digital Output Boolean Module 1 Module Source Source Launching Module RunCommand
342. ng icon 1 Right click on the grouping icon The Grouping Object Configuration dialog box appears 2 Select Use Custom from the Caption section and type the new name into the text box 3 Click OK Changing the Font of a Grouping Window To change the font font style and size of a caption 1 Right click on the grouping icon The Grouping Object Configuration dialog box appears 2 Inthe Font section do one of the following To use the font of the parent window select Inherit from parent window To use a different font select Custom then click Font The Font dialog box appears Select the font options you want then click OK to continue 3 Click OK Changing the Position of the Caption To change the location of the caption 1 Right click on the grouping icon The Grouping Object Configuration dialog box appears 2 Select either Top or Bottom in the Position section to specify a caption position above or below the grouping icon 3 Click OK Deleting a Grouping Window NOTE When you delete a grouping window any modules inside are deleted as well Designer warns you before deleting modules See Deleting or Cutting an ION Module on page 211 for more information on deleting modules 1 Select the grouping icon of the window you want to delete 2 Press the Delete key If the grouping window contains modules Designer displays a list of modules that will be deleted Page 203 Desig
343. ng those with dependents on that node and those that will not Select a module in this list to display any additional information available in the field at the bottom of the dialog box 3 Click OK to remove the selected modules or Cancel to abort the procedure Designer removes the module icon from the node diagram and deletes the module from the node itself A NOTE If you delete a shortcut icon the original module is not affected However when you delete the original module all shortcuts to that module are also deleted Viewing a Node or Module as Text You can use the View Diagram Text command to display as text the complete contents of one or more modules or of an entire node Use this option to view the specified information on your screen so you can sort it perform analysis create a detailed record of your node s configuration or print a copy for your records 1 Select the module s that you want to display GF Tip To select all modules in the node left click on the background of the main node window being careful not to click on a module icon then select Edit gt Select All 2 Select Options gt View Diagram Text The Text View screen appears The text of any modules that are offline appears in red B Utility TempReader Text View Bees View archive x Sort by Defaut x Find LOCAL TIME Thu Jan 30 09 49 03 2003 NODE TYPE 7350 OPTIONS 0 5 95 240VAC 20 TO BOC ETH73 270
344. nges PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Cancelling Changes 1 To undo all unsaved changes Click Edit gt Reset or e Click View gt Refresh 2 Click Yes to confirm Changing the Measurement Mapping Log Inserter automatically associates logged data with a measurement by searching for a mapping between the label and the measurement However in cases where no mapping exists Log Inserter creates a measurement that is based on the register label To manually change this measurement mapping 1 Switch to Advanced View 2 Click the Updated Measurement cell that you want to change then select the new measurement you want to map from the list Select the Manual check box 4 By default the Update Historical Database check box is selected this applies the change to existing data in the database if for example the source and measurement mapping you are adding already exists To make the change only to data going into the database from this point forward clear the Update Historical Database check box 5 Click File gt Save A dialog box prompts you with the changes Click Yes 6 If prompted select which database to update Click OK Adding a New Downstream Device Mapping To add a new address mapping that associates the source and measurement to a specific logged quantity in the database 1 Scroll down to the end of the table and click the last row the one with the asterisk beside it 2 Fillin the Up
345. nges to a node Designer temporarily takes the affected modules offline and programs them with your changes After they have been programmed the modules are then placed back online Normally this is a routine procedure However certain circumstances may prevent a module from returning online For example if the node lacks sufficient processing power to operate the module the module remains offline You can easily identify any offline modules all offline modules are highlighted with a red outline In addition whenever you open a node diagram Designer displays a list of all offline modules in the node Z NOTE If you have offline modules in your node you may be able to put them back online by selecting File gt Send amp Save 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Page 207 ION Module Overview Page 208 PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Module Status Programmed vs Pending The terms programmed and pending refer to whether or not a module s representation in the node diagram matches the node itself Master Reset Ext Pulse 34 AN ag 7 P g 5 Programmed Pending Programmed A programmed module is one that is the same both in the node diagram and in the node The links labels and setup register values in the node diagram exactly match those on the node When you first open a node diagram all the modules appear programmed since they are read directly from the node itself and then display
346. nt them to appear in the report 4 Save your changes 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Types of Default Reports Types of Default Reports 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved This section shows basic characteristics of the Microsoft Excel reports generated from the Reporter templates The first tab in the workbook is created from the Presentation sheet of the report template You can modify the look and functionality of a report by editing its presentation sheet See Modifying the Finished Report on page 330 for details Z NOTE The presentation sheet contains references that automatically update the data each time the report is generated Be careful not to overwrite these references Energy and Demand Use the Energy and Demand template to create a tabular report on energy consumption and peak demand levels over a period of time categorized by time of use TOU Time Of Use schedules are typically set up to match an energy provider s tariff schedule The Energy and Demand template uses quantities from the Energy and Demand log kWh kVARh kVAh kW Demand kVAR Demand kVA Demand that is available on most ION devices TOU Schedule Reporter requires a TOU schedule when creating a report using the Energy and Demand template A sample TOU schedule is included this allows you to define time periods that coincide with time periods in your
347. o the same Query Server used by the parent icon The parent icon is the diagram object that you clicked to open this window Select Custom Query Server then click Edit Link to display a dialog box where you can select a new Query Server link When you click the Edit Link button the Create Link dialog box appears Page 157 Configuring Window Properties Page 158 PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Use the Create Link dialog box to specify a query 1 Double click on the Query Server that you want from the Nodes box 2 Double click on Query Modules from the Managers box 3 Double click on the Query that you want from the Modules box 4 Double click on the query register that you want from the Output Registers box 5 Click OK to save your changes The name of the selected Query Server and register are displayed as the Group Name on the Query Server tab of the Window Properties Configuration box Node Setting the Default Node for a Window Use the Node tab to specify a real time source for any window or grouping object in a user diagram The node that you select provides the default source of real time data for all numeric status and control objects within the window It also is the parent node for any Data Log Viewer or Event Log Viewer objects placed in the window Setting a Default Node for a Window 1 Right click anywhere in the background of the window and select Properties from the pop up menu The Window Pr
348. o use the default labels select Use Default Labels 3 Click OK to return to the ION Module Setup dialog box Customizing a Setup Register Label 1 Inthe ION Module Setup dialog box select the setup register and click Modify 2 Do one of the following To create a custom label select Use Custom Label and then type a name for the label in the box To use the default label select Use Default Label 3 Click OK to return to the ION Module Setup dialog box Resetting ION Modules in a Node Diagram Designer allows you to undo certain changes you have made in a node diagram since the last time you saved and sent your changes to the node It refreshes the selected module icons so they reflect what is actually on the node Reversible changes include 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Configuring ION Modules Changing the value of a setup register Changing module or register labels Changing the links between modules Z NOTE Since adding and deleting modules happens immediately on a node you cannot undo the deletion or the creation of a module To reset ION Modules 1 Select the module s you want to reset 2 Select Edit gt Reset All the changes made to the selected modules since the last time you sent and saved the node diagram are discarded Modules not included in the selection are unaffec
349. odules and text icons are deleted and the core modules and any grouping windows containing core modules remain 3 Select Edit gt Select All to select the remaining module and grouping icons Page 237 Copying and Pasting ION Modules PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide 4 Select Edit gt Paste from framework In the Paste from framework dialog box select the framework file that contains the node configuration you want to paste and then click Open The Paste Summary dialog box appears See Using the Paste Summary Dialog Box on page 233 for information on using the Paste Summary box 5 Select all modules in the list click last item hold the SHIFT key and then click first list item the entire list appears highlighted 6 Change the paste type to lock paste hold the SHIFT key and then click the paste type check box until all modules are set to lock paste M 7 Click OK to complete the procedure The selected framework is pasted into the node diagram All module icons in the selection appear as pending until you select Send amp Save to save the changes to the node Page 238 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Viewing Output Registers Setup Registers and Inputs Viewing Output Registers Setup Registers and Inputs Each module icon has an input symbol and an output symbol The input symbol on the left provides access to the module s inputs and the output
350. of every second month and stays active for 2 days Set up the time period for the connection to occur by setting a start and an end time In the Start Time and End Time fields type the time or use the arrows to change the time Scheduled Site Connection Lx General Settings Sites Schedule Date Monthy Day of Week x specific weekday in the month Frequency months 1 Day of Month 1st Sunday 7 Duration days 1 Recur every 1 month s on the 1st Sunday of the month and remain active for 1 day s Time Start Time 12 00 AM S End Time 6 00 4M 5 If you configure a full day i e 24 hour daily schedule make sure you allow enough time between the end time and the start of the next connection to avoid connection problems For example to add a 2 minute gap to a 24 hour schedule set the Start Time to 0 00 00 and the EndTime to 23 58 00 Page 40 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide System Log Events System Log Events System Log Events lists events for components in the system This information comes from the ION_SystemLog database Eile Edit View Tools Help Event Filter E Displaying last 7 days events Local Time Modify Seiver Show Minimum Priority Level M Servers I Sites O Devices IM Connection Schedules feat
351. og box that explains each aspect of the proposed changes You can use the Paste Summary box to define how to integrate the source modules into the destination modules For example if a source module is being pasted to a destination that is already occupied you can either lock paste the new module over the existing one or free paste the new module into the next available destination If you paste a selection that contains a shortcut Designer may paste the shortcut as a module See Pasting Shortcuts on page 236 for more information In some cases Designer may not paste every module in your selection See Modules that Cannot be Pasted on page 237 for more information Pasting ION Modules from the Clipboard or a Framework When pasting modules the first thing to do is select the node diagram and window where you want the modules to go If you have more than one window open you can click on the title bar of the window you want to make it the active window 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Copying and Pasting ION Modules A NOTE You can paste modules into the same node diagram they were copied from or into a different one You can paste modules from two sources the clipboard or a framework When you paste a selection from either source Designer describes the proposed changes in the Paste Summary dialog box
352. ollowing table lists the attributes you can assign for a Channel Channel attribute Description Name of the communications port the modem is connected to The Name default value is COM1 The type of modem The value entered here must exactly match the ModemType displayed value under Modem Type property in the Dial Out Modem Options dialog BaudRate The modem s baud rate The default value is 9600 The node name as it appears in the system log messages The text AlertMonitorNodeName specified here defines the value for the a command parameter described below The default value is AlertMonitor ComputerName This controls whether all alarms are logged to the ION Enterprise system NoLog log The default value is YES log all alarms A value of NO disables all alarm logging This specifies how many times a connection attempt should be retried if NumtTries anes there are communication errors GF Tip Open the example file MachineName AlertMonitor contig in a text editor program and refer to it when reading this section to see the proper usage of the elements and attributes in the ION Alert Monitor configuration file Actions are grouped inside ActionSet elements which contain connection requests and or commands to execute when alarms are received Specify ConnectionRequest to set up an ActionSet to send a connection request specify Command to
353. omatic Service creates a subscription and delivers the real time data in XML format ION XML Subscription Store Stores XML data subscriptions for the power monitoring devices on the network This service is A Automatic Service used only by WebReach This service may not be available on all operating systems 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Page 17 ION Enterprise Databases PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide ION Enterprise Databases The ION Enterprise databases are typically installed on the Primary Server and run in the background of your ION Enterprise system To connect to these databases ION Enterprise uses the SQL Server instance you created when you installed ION Enterprise or configured SQL Server For information on managing these databases in ION Enterprise see Database Manager on page 255 Microsoft SQL Server Database Microsoft SQL Server 2005 Express Edition SQL Server Express comes with ION Enterprise by default SQL Server is the database engine that manages the ION Enterprise databases the ION database ION_Data the Network Configuration database ION_Network and the System Events database ION_SystemLog To connect to the databases ION Enterprise uses a SQL Server instance called ION which is created when ION Enterprise is installed unless a pre existing instance is specified when ION Enterprise is installed The Network Configuration Database The Network Configuration dat
354. on a Baud rate register The value is represented as a number from 0 to 3 where 0 300 Baud and 3 115200 Baud With enumeration you can map the return values to corresponding string values In Vista when you view the register it displays the corresponding string value instead of the actual return value You can also use enumeration to generate non contiguous scaling values for other registers For example a Modbus scale register returns 2 1 0 1 and 2 which indicate scaling of 102 101 1 10 and 10 respectively In this case use an enumerated ordinal of 2 through 2 with enumerated labels 0 01 through 100 You can access enumeration for a register from the register properties window the Edit Mode window and also from the toolbar When selected the following screen appears Edit Enumeration Labels Label to be displayed if none of the enumerated values are returned Invalid Data New Enumeration Label Add New Ordinal Values Enumeration Labels Remove H hd Save amp Close To add or remove enumeration values select them and click Add New or Remove When new enumerations are added they are appended to the bottom of the list and are given the next sequential ordinal value You can relocate values up and down with the up and down arrow and buttons To change the ordinal value for the enumerations double click in the Ordinal Values list The change propagates down to the bottom of the list en
355. one of the provided curves you need a data log viewer that contains the magnitude and duration values for the sag swell disturbances The Duration column must be set as the X parameter for the Log View Plotter it appears in blue in the data log viewer table See X Parameter for Log View Plotter on page 149 for more information on setting the X parameter for Data Log Viewers The Magnitude values can be in any one of the other columns 1 2 In the Data Log Viewer select a range of cells to be plotted Select Edit gt Plot Selected Data The Log View Plotter window appears with Duration as the x axis and Magnitude as the y axis Right click on the graph and select Overlay Curve from the pop up menu The Overlay Curve dialog box appears Select the text file containing the curve data that you want to overlay from the ION Enterprise config lvp directory Click Open The selected curve appears in the graph You can review each point in your data and see where it falls in relation to the curve NOTE This process automatically changes your x axis scale to logarithmic 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Creating and Customizing a User Diagram Creating and Customizing a User Diagram The following sections describe How to customize an existing user diagram by customizing the appearance and function of a diagram object or diagram window How to
356. onversion process in Excel Search the Microsoft support knowledgebase for more information Send report to printer prints the report each time it is generated Select the printer you want to use from the list Email report to recipients sends the report in Excel format to an email address using Microsoft Outlook 2003 Click New to add a new email address or Delete to remove an existing one from the list Validation Select Report duplicate and missing entries to enable error checking Use the Hours Minutes and Seconds boxes to specify an expected time interval between each record Select Remove duplicate records to delete redundant records from the report If you want Reporter to insert records automatically for ones that are missing select Replace missing records with then select Values from the previous row An empty row or A zero value Display Select one of the options to control how Reporter handles raw data sheets in the report Show Hide or Delete Page 329 Generating a Report PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide A NOTE The Delete raw data sheets option is useful when you want to reduce the report s file size this particularly applies to those reports that contain a significantly large amount of data The Display Options grid lists other options you can turn on or off Double click the appropriate row to turn the option on or off Notes Use the Notes tab to enter details
357. op level of a diagram make sure Options gt Browse closes active window is selected Workspace The main area in the center of the Vista screen is the workspace The workspace is used to display information such as user diagrams and data and event viewers Status Bar The status bar displays the status line which describes any active processes and provides a brief description of the currently selected command or toolbar button the current time on the workstation a progress indicator bar two communication status lights Toolbox In Edit mode the toolbox also appears on the screen You can add objects to the user diagram using the toolbox See Creating and Customizing a User Diagram on page 127 for more information on the toolbox and Edit mode Page 91 The Vista Interface Page 92 PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Other Display Features Vista offers several display features to assist you when viewing a user diagram Some of these are accessible through the toolbar and menu options see Toolbar on page 90 Those only accessible through menu options are Browse Closes Active Window Select Options gt Browse closes active window to have each window that you open replace the previous one This option is selected by default Without this option selected any previously opened windows remain open Arrange All Select Window gt Arrange All to tile all open windows in the workspace Displa
358. operties Configuration dialog box appears 2 Select the Node tab 3 Doone of the following Select Inherit from parent icon to use the same node as the parent icon the diagram object you double clicked to open the window Select Custom to select a different node Select ION and click Select to display the Select Node dialog box Select a default real time source for the window from the nodes available 4 Click OK to save your changes Action Specifying an Action for a Window You can specify an action for Vista to perform upon opening or closing a particular window For example if you want Vista to automatically engage a modem tool such as the Connection Manager every time you open a certain grouping window you can specify the tool as an action Specifying an Open or Close Action 1 Right click in the background of the user diagram or grouping window then select Properties The Window Properties Configuration dialog box appears 2 On the Action tab select Command line on open or Command line on close 3 Click Browse In the Browse dialog box locate the program you want select the exe file and click Open The specified file and path name appears in the box below the selected option 4 Click OK to save your changes 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Configuring Window Properties A NOTE To remove
359. or vertical bars or 3 D horizontal or vertical bars Select Spline available for Line or Line Symbol types if you want the line that connects each point to be a smooth curve If you leave it cleared each pair of points is connected by a straight line Select Fill Area available for Line type to fill the area under the curve with the line color Clear the check box to leave the area under the curve transparent The Marker section is available for Line Symbol and Scattered types of lines Specify the shape size and style of the marker used for the points The Style options apply only to geometric shapes e g circles boxes diamonds etc For any line type click Line to change the width and the style e g solid dotted dashed etc of the line For bar graph types a dialog box appears where you can specify the hatching pattern and the width of the bars 3 Click OK to save your changes Page 123 Customizing the Log View Plotter Display Page 124 PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Changing the Bar Style for the Harmonics Analysis Tab 1 Right click on the bar or on its curve sample in the legend and select Curve Properties The Bar Graph Configuration dialog box appears 2 Select the type of bar to use from the Type list This selection is applied to all bars in the graph Three bar styles are available Group Bars Shows bars side by side Deep Bars Shows bars one behind the other Stacke
360. ort you want to print has multiple columns of data e g if it has multiple measurements or multiple sources in a table the columns may be printed on multiple pages A NOTE The first time you print a report you may be prompted to install an ActiveX control Click Install to accept this control Saving a Report To save a report with some or all of its inputs defined 1 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Display a report that has its inputs completely filled in either select a defined report or enter the required inputs and click Generate Report Click File gt Save The Save Report dialog box appears Type aname for the report in the Name field In the location box below the Name field select the location for the saved report or click New Folder to create a new folder for it note that you cannot nest one folder inside another From the section at the bottom of the dialog box select the inputs that you want to save and deselect those you do not want to save with the report You can save a report with only part of its inputs completed When you generate one of these reports you need to enter information for the inputs that were not saved Click OK The report is saved with the inputs you have selected Page 185 Exporting a Report PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Exporting a Report You are able to export generated reports in a number of different formats the formats available vary
361. orter You can use the Web Reporter of ION Enterprise to define generate and manage comprehensive reports based on information contained in your databases This section discusses the elements of reporting in ION Enterprise such as the default report definitions generating and viewing reports export formats and subscriptions NOTE SQL Server Reporting Services must be installed before you install ION Enterprise in order for Web Reporter to be installed If you installed ION Enterprise with Reporting Services not present and would like to install Web Reporter contact Technical Support You cannot use reports that were created in earlier versions of ION Enterprise in Web Reporter However you can still use Reporter the reporting interface from earlier versions of ION Enterprise For instructions see Appendix A Reporter on page 325 In This Section Introduction on page 172 Web Reporter Interface on page 173 Default Report Definitions on page 175 Creating a New Definition from a Default Report Definition on page 179 Generating and Viewing a Report on page 180 Entering Report Inputs on page 180 Printing a Report on page 185 Saving a Report on page 185 Exporting a Report on page 186 Report Administration on page 187 Managing a Report on page 187 Sharing a Report on page 187 Creating Report Subscriptions on page 188 Installin
362. orting a Repote erir oeat sey ihe E EE go UE E AARNE 186 Report Administration 0 ccc cee cee cece eee eee teens 187 Managing a Report 3 icsasntata sies neepa aap ahaa els ol Wine Cea ates s 187 Sharing a Reports lt cwuwtisosanackeeadtasautakacaeuave ce ope sae ea seus 187 Creating Report Subscriptions 00 cece cee eens 188 Installing a Report Definition or a Report Pack e eee 191 Custom Report Definitions 0 cece ccc eect ect e ee eeeee 192 Running the ION Power Quality Aggregation Service Manually 193 Chapter7 Designer s zcceccedeecaiercuntererietiaiicnnnaniawd 195 Getting Started with Designer 2 ce eee eee eee ee eens 196 Node Diagrams and the Designer Interface 20eeeeeee 197 The Designer Interface 922 2 8ic soe tk Seach lee deh ba eae te atte ona 197 The Node Diptak orere r e EEr iene nen Aa Fe Bee oe Y 198 Display Mode versus Edit Mode eilerien eee eee 200 Designer Shortcuts 72sec eerste EAR oe nie ae a ee Se E 200 DesignerlCons ertuna a r a e a 4 hie a A odes rira 201 Designer WindOWS sire Coa A ena Leeland AE E kel ENR 206 ION Module Overview 0 cece cece cece cence ee eees 207 Using ION Modules 2252540564066 b ares Rea a eae a Rede ee 209 Adding a New ION Module 0 cece ce eee eee 210 Deleting or Cutting ani ION Module 6 0 ccc cece cece 211 Viewing a Node or Module as Text cesy ur
363. ou want to copy raw data from Database ION_Data lt SQL gt is the default setting To change the database source select one from the list or click More Ifa TOU schedule is required select Apply TOU Schedule to database queries then select one from the list or click Manage to create one 4 To add another query click New then set the query properties as described above 5 When you have added and configured all your queries click Next 6 Configure the report options as described in the section Step 3 Set Up the Report Options on page 328 Page 335 Automatic Report Generation PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Automatic Report Generation You can use the Windows Scheduled Tasks utility to generate reports on a set schedule 1 Click Start gt Settings gt Control Panel Double click Scheduled Tasks 2 Double click Add Scheduled Task Use the wizard to select Reporter from the list of programs 3 Assign a name for this new scheduled task and specify how often this task should be performed 4 Set the start time and other relevant data for your schedule Click Next 5 When prompted enter your user name and password and confirm the password Click Next 6 Asummary screen of your schedule appears Select Open advanced properties for this task when I click Finish then click Finish 7 The Properties screen of your task opens The Task tab displays the command line to run Reporter Add a space at the e
364. ouping objects into the image by placing them at the appropriate points on the drawing Users can display site specific information by double clicking on the appropriate spot in the background See Image Displaying a Background Image on page 156 for information on using a custom background 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Display Options Customizing the Display of a Control Object A control object appears differently depending on the type of register to which it is linked This same criteria also determines the display options available To view the display options of a control object right click the object then select the Display tab The options available depend on the type of control object External Numeric A control object that is linked to an External Numeric module appears as an alphanumeric display box The Display tab has the following sections Border and Background Color In the Border section select Hide to show no border or select Show to display a border If you select Show you can specify the width in pixels and click Color to choose a color for the border In the Background Color section select Transparent for no background or select Custom then click Color to define a color for the background External Pulse A control object that is linked to an External Pulse module appears as a button icon b
365. ow High Mean M Log Log Interval o Seconds I Calculate I Calculate IT Calculate M Log F Log M Log M Is Downstream Device Downstream Device Name Meter01 Include Name of Device Instance Is Downstream Device Select this to indicate the register belongs to a downstream device Downstream Device Name Enter the name of the downstream device in this field The register label is appended with this name For example if the device name is Meter01 the register label becomes VoltsA Meter01 A NOTE Using this option without also using the Include Name of Device Instance option causes multiple devices to appear as a single device in your energy management system Do not use this option on its own unless only a single instance of this device is present in your system Include Name of Device Instance Select this to append the actual device instance name to the register label The placeholder DeviceName is then added to the label the name of the actual device instance gets inserted when it is created in Management Console Page 304 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Saving and Exiting For example if the device instance is named Device01 VoltsA DeviceName Meter01 is replaced with VoltsA Device01Meter01 This allows easy creation of unique names within ION Enterprise as well as enabling each device instance to appear in ION Enterprise as multiple
366. ow link before placing the objects Cutting Copying and Pasting a Diagram Object 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Use the Cut Copy and Paste commands on the Edit menu to make a copy of a diagram object and paste it into another window or user diagram You can paste the copy as many times as you like to create multiple versions of an object Each copy retains all of the attributes and linkage information of the original Page 129 Copying a Group of Diagram Objects to a Framework PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Cutting or Copying a Diagram Object 1 Select the object s 2 Do one of the following To remove the original select Edit gt Cut then click Yes to confirm the deletion or No to cancel To retain the original select Edit gt Copy The selection is copied to the ION Enterprise clipboard A NOTE The ION Enterprise clipboard is a temporary storage area that holds any information cut or copied from Vista It should not be confused with the Microsoft Windows Clipboard After the object is copied to the ION Enterprise clipboard you can paste it into the active window Pasting a Diagram Object 1 Select the window you want to paste to 2 Select Edit gt Paste The object appears in the active window Copying a Group of Diagram Objects to a Framework A Vista framework is a template that you can use to record the layout of a group of diagram objects When you select Edit
367. ows you to compare energy usage between shifts i e 6 00 1 00 vs 1 00 to 8 00 Event History Use the Event History report definition to create a report of events or alarms that have occurred in the system It includes the following information on the events timestamp source name event description and event priority If no event has occurred that matches the inputs entered when generating the report no data is returned IEC6 1000 4 30 Use the IEC61000 4 30 report definition to create a report on IEC61000 4 30 compliance information by observation period 3 second 10 minute or 2 hour for one or more sources The IEC61000 4 30 report definition provides the following types of information voltage profile THD profile unbalance profile flicker profile frequency profile and summary table 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Default Report Definitions Load Profile Use the Load Profile report definition to create a graphical representation of demand or load levels over a period of time The profile shows peak loads points on the graph where peak electricity demand is high A load trend report can be used to analyze the electrical loads at the time of maximum demand This information creates opportunities for developing strategies to improve energy management The Load Profile report definition uses similar measur
368. p Changing the Schedule Click the Change button in the Schedule section The Edit Schedule dialog appears where you can reconfigure the frequency and time of the scheduled backup A NOTE Do not schedule scheduled backups to begin at the same time i e do not schedule a backup of the ION_Data and a backup of the ION_Network at the same time This can cause problems with the task Page 271 Scheduled Backup Page 272 PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide The Edit Schedule dialog box differs depending on what you select in the Occurs section Daily Set the frequency in days For example to set the backup to occur every seven days set the frequency to 7 Weekly Set the frequency in weeks and select the days of the week on which you want the backup to occur You can select multiple days of the week For example to set the backup to occur every two weeks on Monday and Thursday set the frequency to 2 and select Monday and Thursday from the list of days Monthly Set the frequency then select Fixed Day or Relative Day to set the day of the month on which the trim occurs Frequency Depending on your version of SQL Server click Select Months to select the months in which you want the backup to occur or set the Frequency in number of months Fixed Day The backup occurs on the specified date at the frequency specified in months For example to set the backup to occur on the 15th day of every month se
369. p 3 Specifying columns The Available list displays the logs available on the specified node The Selected list displays the currently selected logs 1 Highlight the name of the log s that you want from the Available list and click Add The log s appears in the Selected list A NOTE Check for additional tabs If you selected more than one node in step 1 this box requires you to specify logs for each node Each tab is labeled Node 1 Node 2 etc and is identified at the top of each tab Select Advanced log view to access any logs whose configuration has changed over time This check box enables access to old configurations of snapshot logs 2 Click Next to continue Step 3 Specifying Columns and Filters Choose columns and specify filter settings Query Wizard Tablet Table2 Table EqyDmd Log TestRack P7650 r Select the columns to appear in the Log Viewer Available Selected in order node log lt Remove Lle kwh del rec m Filter Timestamp Format yyyy mm dd hh mm ss timestamp 7 BETWEEI 7 flast_month_to_d x AND today_124M Replace inser_ Delete ano oR nor timestamp BETWEEN last month to datef and today 12AM Use the Select the columns to appear in the Log Viewer section to add or remove a column from your log viewer and the Filter section to establish a range for your query and to screen out unwanted data Pag
370. p Registers The ION Scheduler module has a special class of setup register called a calendar register Configuring a calendar register is only necessary for nodes that have a Scheduler module For detailed information on how to configure a calendar register see the description of the Scheduler module in the ION Reference Page 225 Configuring ION Modules Page 226 PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Modifying Address Setup Registers All Distributed Numeric Distributed Boolean and Distributed Pulse modules contain an address setup register that references another register You can specify anew value or clear an existing value as required Currently the Virtual Processor is the only node offering these types of modules A NOTE Currently you can only link the address setup register to External Numeric External Boolean and External Pulse registers Modifying an Address Setup Register 1 Right click on a Distributed Numeric Distributed Boolean or Distributed Pulse The ION Module Setup dialog box appears 2 In the Setup Registers section select a register then click Modify The Modify Address Register dialog box appears Modify Address Register Nodes LOGSRY WORKSTATIONX Production MainFeed Tolerance Feeder Output Registers Hist Log Enble Ext Bool Modules MnMx Enble Ext Num Modules Over Amp Enble Ext Pulse Modules Over kw Enble Factory Modules Sag Swell Enbl 4 Register Lab
371. pears with five option tabs Image Query Server Node Action and Updates Image Displaying a Background Image To view the image options select the Image tab on the Window Properties Configuration dialog box Use the Image tab to specify a background image for the active diagram or grouping window The Image tab has two options Select None if you do not want to display a background image or if you prefer to display a single color Select Custom image to display a background image Enter the path and filename of the image you want to display Vista supports images saved in the following formats Windows bitmap bmp Windows metafile wmf or Windows Enhanced metafile emf You can create your own background image using a scanned photograph or a drawing created within a standard graphics program Some ideas include An engineering drawing of your installation depicting the power distribution system and the location of critical elements A single line diagram illustrating the power distribution network or the individual components of your facility An aerial photograph of your facility depicting the approximate location of your monitoring equipment A satellite image or geographical map depicting your transmission and distribution network The following illustration depicts a sample Vista background with hidden diagram objects here the object is visible by the handles because it is selected in Edit mode
372. plate Label field This is used if the device has a default Vista diagram The string entered in this field is an internal identifier and is only used if the Add Generate Network Diagram Support feature is used see Tools Menu on page 287 for more information A NOTE Changes made here are not be reflected in ION Enterprise until you add or update the device type Factory Information Tab 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Tools Menu 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Tools Menu Device Properties Device Properties il Serial Number 1 0 0 0 Revision Number 1 0 0 0 OEM ID ION Version Compliance Options FAC1 User Defined 1 N JA FAC1 User Defined 2 yy 74 FAC1 User Defined 3 yy 74 FAC1 User Defined 4 ry 74 These fields are used to identify the device type By default all values are constant values but you can map them to Modbus registers if required Advanced Tab Maximum number of registers for a single request setting The maximum number of registers requested for the device can be set anywhere from 1 to 125 It is recommended that you do not change this setting unless the specific device has special requirements Multiple Preset Write check box Be sure that you match this check box with the device type Select the check box if the device type supports Multiple Preset Write for registers and coil
373. py You can then paste this selection into a word processing program Maintain External Inputs The Maintain External Inputs check box allows you to paste the module selection with all external links intact If this check box is cleared all external links links to modules outside the selection are discarded The following example depicts an external link to a Power Meter module r external link nn Dn 1 Setpoint 7 XN l E pe I Power Meter if at 4 a ah Mi X 7 E E ee If you copied the two modules on the right but omitted the Power Meter module from the selection the link to the Power Meter module would be external Upon pasting the selection the external link to this module would be lost unless you selected Maintain external inputs on the Paste Summary box Check Boxes Free Paste Lock Paste No Paste The check boxes to the left of each module indicate the proposed action that is how the module will be pasted A green check mark M indicates a free paste A check mark with a lock symbol M indicates a lock paste A red X symbol X indicates the module will not be pasted An X symbol without a check box X identifies a module that has no possible destination and cannot be pasted You can click on a check box to change the proposed action For example if you click on a free paste ora will not be pasted symbol it changes to a lock paste symbol
374. r a workspace and a status bar When in Edit mode the ION Modules toolbox is also displayed Title Bar The title bar displays the name of the program the user name for example suest and the name of the active node diagram Menu Bar Below the title bar is the menu bar Click on a menu name to display a list of available commands 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Page 197 The Node Diagram PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Toolbar The Toolbar offers quick access to the commands used most frequently Each command offered on the toolbar is also available from the menu bar Open Reset Module Cut Paste Mal Sx TOON tae Save Create a Link Copy Help When you point at a toolbar button a description of it appears in the status bar at the bottom of the screen and on a small ToolTip beside the button Workspace The main area in the center of the screen is the workspace where you view and edit node diagrams Status Bar The status bar displays status information The components from left to right are Status line Describes any active processes and provides brief descriptions of the currently selected command or toolbar button For example when you move the pointer over a toolbar button or click on a menu name a brief description of the item appears in the status line Time display Displays the current time on the workstation Progress indicator Depicts the progress on a
375. r details for an incident or waveform details PQ Incident Detail To view details of an incident click the incident in the First Timestamp column of the Statistics table Page 177 Default Report Definitions Page 178 PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Detailed information about a single power quality incident is displayed including ACBEMA plot containing the power quality disturbances for the selected incident The timestamps types durations phases and magnitudes of disturbances in the selected incident with the worst event in the selected incident highlighted worst event largest magnitude x duration The power quality settings of the device that registered the disturbance i e sag swell limits transient threshold etc To return to the PQ Summary report use the browser s back button PQ Waveform Detail To view the waveform details of an incident click the incident in the Time column of the Worst Disturbances table The waveform details presents all of the waveforms that were recorded for a disturbance It displays a waveform chart along with an optional table with waveform values The following waveform plots and data are displayed based on the timestamp selected A summary waveform plot displaying a plot of the V1 V2 and V3 waveforms Anindividual waveform plot for each of Vi and Il V2 and 2 e V3 and I3 Ifthe source queried has digital input logging enabled over the tim
376. r each parameter The first column numbers the rows The X column lists the harmonics number and the Y1 Y2 Y3 etc columns list the harmonic values for each bar in the harmonics histogram Rows where the X value is not an integer i e 5 1 5 2 25 contain sub harmonic values 2 Click Format to change the number of significant digits displayed in the X and Y columns or to change the width of these columns Width defines the number of characters the column can display Precision defines the number of significant digits displayed 3 Click Copy to copy columns to the clipboard This allows you paste a copy of the data into another application such as a spreadsheet program or a text file A NOTE The Log View Plotter can only display one data table at a time If you want to display tabular data for another curve from the same graph or a different one you must first close any open data window 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Page 111 Viewing the Plot Display Tab PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Viewing the Plot Display Tab The Plot Display tab depicts the specified parameters as curves against a graph Log iew Plotter Main Keating_ 600 User Diagram 7600_fac 4wye_v 1 3 0 Plot Display kW tot high First Point 03 28 2007 03 00 00 AM kW tot mean kVAR tot mean kW tot high kW tot low 1T Calculations Log Yiew Plotter x Info Timestamp kw tot high Cursor 1 03 28 200
377. r not to show data warnings in the generated report Measuremeni s Reports other than Load Profile Use this input to select the measurements you want to include in the report Click Select Measurement to display the Source Selector dialog box Click the and to expand and collapse items in the navigation tree Click Select All or Select None in the top right corner to select or clear all the check boxes For reports where you can select multiple measurements click the check box beside a measurement or group of measurements to select it For reports where you can only select a single measurement click on the measurement name to select it When you are finished selecting measurements click OK Measurements Load Profile Report This input determines whether the report is calculated using demand or power measurements Select either Demand or Power from the dropdown list Page 181 Entering Report Inputs Page 182 PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Nominal Frequency Type the nominal frequency of the system i e 60 Nominal Voltage Type the nominal voltage of the system i e 120 Period The Period input contains the following fields and dropdown lists Timezone Select whether you want to view timestamps in either Server Local Time or UTC Universal Coordinated Time Aggregation Period Select the block of time for which you want to compare data i e day week Compariso
378. r serial and set up connection schedules for these sites In addition the Management Console Tools menu provides access to device and system configuration maintenance and programming tools See Management Console Tools on page 53 for details CAUTION Unauthorized changes to network configuration can result in an unstable or unusable network therefore only users with Operator or Supervisor level access can make changes in Management Console In This Section The Management Console Interface on page 28 Management Console Network Components on page 31 Setting Up Your Network in Management Console on page 33 Accessing Meters with Advanced Security on page 38 Configuring Connection Schedules on page 39 System Log Events on page 41 gt gt o Setting Up Large Systems on page 43 Page 27 The Management Console Interface PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide The Management Console Interface Sort indicator Group By box Filter indicator Pin Unpin Icon File Edit View Tools Help 4 Column Selector g Drag a column headeNgere to group by that column Enabled Type Address Site Penne Column Selector Description O ID O ICMPTimeout O Baudrate ByteTimeout Connect amp ttempts PadByte NumPadByte Timesync3xEnabled Timesynce3 20E nabled Timesynche thernetE nabled Timesyn
379. ral disturbances The Power Quality report shows a system s line fluctuations for the specified date range Use the Interactive Power Quality toolbar to change the time interval between incidents Select the incident interval time between power quality events Click the timestamp of the incident in the Waveforms tab to view a graphical representation of the disturbance 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Types of Default Reports Beles Type a question for help Q z 2il l D O Piara B EJ Microsoft Excel File Edit View Insert Format Tools Data Window Help DBE BIEGRIV GE Aan FI grn E window x Me fe 2 11 2007 2 40 36 PM bd Power Scie 2 Sil a Power Quality 2007 03 01 09 45 51 Waveform Preview Local Time Keatins BMain7GN Winuefarme e of First Point 2007 Feb 11 14 40 36 0 2007 Feb 06 12594217 A Click Show Complete to 2007 Feb 11 14 40 36 141 god display individual waveforms 2007 Feb 11 14 40 36 149 Click the magnify buttons to 2007 Feb 18 07 52 08 644 zoom in or out 2007 Feb 18 07 52 08 669 ll NALA Wl Ill 2007 Feb 23 22 44 58 553 A O TT 401 Ly i ili im Hi TTY ii ye L2 Show Complete GQ Q miT CANAAN Ni Warsorms i 2007 Feb 23 22 44 58 711 EN50160 EN50160 is a set of power quality standards used by ener
380. range UpperCase Lower Case Start End UpperCase Lower Case Add Remove OK Cancel 2 Use the Add number or Add character as applicable spin box to set a value to exclude from the range you have specified then click Add Repeat to set additional values to exclude To set a range of values to exclude select Add number range or Add character range then use the Start and End spin boxes to set the range to exclude Click Add Repeat to set additional ranges of values to exclude 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Creating Multiple Copies of a Device A NOTE You cannot add the same number or letter to the list of exceptions more than once If the Add button is disabled check that the numbers or letters are not already included in the exceptions list near the top of the window 3 Use the Remove number or Remove character spin box to remove the exception that was set for a given value i e put it back in as an acceptable value Use the Remove number range or Remove character range spin boxes to remove the exception that was set for a range of values Click Remove Step 3 Duplicating the Device Once you have finished configuring names you are ready to duplicate the device Click Duplicate The duplicated devices appear in the Table Editing area 12 of 12 Devices Displayed Columns with captions in green can be modified in the grid below
381. re then click OK Deleting a Day Group To delete a day group select the day group in the Define DayGroups tab then click Delete When you delete a day group you also delete the TOU periods configured for that day group If you add a day group again you will need to reconfigure the TOU periods Configuring TOU Names and TOU Periods 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved When you run reports the reports calculate and display data according to the information you enter in the Define TOU Periods and Define TOU Names tabs A NOTE You need to define TOU names and periods for each schedule that you create Be sure to apply a TOU name to every square on the calendar Unaccounted time causes your reports to display inaccurate information Defining TOU Names A TOU name is a designation that is used to differentiate billing rates Three TOU Names are already defined On Peak Off Peak and Partial Peak You can edit or delete these names or add new names Defining TOU Names 1 Inthe navigation pane select the day group for which you want to define TOU names then select the Define TOU Names tab 2 Click Add The Add a TOU Name dialog box appears 3 Type the TOU name you want to add then click OK The TOU name is added to the list of TOU names Editing an Existing TOU Name 1 Select the TOU Name in the list on the Define TOU Names tab and click Edit The Edit a TOU Name dialog box appears 2 Type the new
382. rename Enter the new name in the Updated Assigned Source column All rows with measurements associated with the renamed source are automatically updated A NOTE If you do not want to assign the existing data in the database to the new source name switch to Advanced View first then clear the Update Historical Database check box for all appropriate rows 3 Click File gt Save 4 A dialog box prompts you with a summary of the changes Click Yes to continue or No to cancel 5 When the operation has completed click OK then Close Renaming the Assigned Source for one or more Measurements 1 Switch to Advanced View 2 Select the row s you want to rename To select a row click the area just to the left of the first column The row is highlighted to indicate that it is selected 3 Click Edit gt Rename Source 4 Inthe Source Rename box type the new name for the downstream source Click OK A NOTE By default the Update Historical Database check box is selected for all affected rows this applies the change to existing data in the database To make the change only to data going into the database from this point forward clear the Update Historical Database check box for the affected rows 5 Click File gt Save A dialog box prompts you with a summary of the changes 6 Click Yes to continue or No to cancel 7 When the operation has completed click OK then click Close Page 321 Cancelling Cha
383. rently selected in the System Setup pane Refresh To manually refresh Management Console and reload its contents select View gt Refresh or press F5 Page 28 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved The Management Console Interface Options Select Tools gt Options to open the Options dialog box Use this dialog box to change display settings for the System Log Events display window Highlighting Highlighting controls how Error events are displayed in the System Log Events display window Select or clear the Enable Highlighting check box to turn highlighting on or off Click Set Highlight Color to change the highlight color for Critical or Error events in the System Log Events display window Events The Events section of the dialog box lets you control how many records appear in the System Log Events display window and how date and time are displayed Customizing the Management Console Interface You can customize what is displayed in the Management Console interface and the tables within the display windows Select which columns appear in tables Filter sort and group data in tables For instructions on using these features see Customizing and Navigating Interface Displays on page 22 Display Window Shortcut Menus To access shortcut menus in the Display Window first click the icon of the System Setup item
384. results page is automatically updated to link to the custom network diagram you specified However the Network Diagram button that exists in each meter user diagram uses a hard coded link to x pml diagrams ud network dgm Use Vista to manually update the Network Diagram link in the meter user diagrams Changing the link for the Network Diagram button 1 Start Vista and select Options gt Show Toolbox to switch to Edit mode 2 Right click the Back to Network button The Grouping Object Configuration dialog box appears 3 Select the Action tab and select Open User Diagram 4 Click Browse to locate your custom network diagram Select the diagram filename then click Open 5 Click OK to save your changes Page 168 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide WebReach Registry Settings WebReach Registry Settings The registry keys for WebReach are located in HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SOFTWARE Schneider Electric ION Enterprise 6 0 WebReach This table lists the default WebReach registry entries and settings Default Registry Entries Default Setting Description Sns i i i icate with th i AdtoDidgram timeout 20000 milliseconds Timeout period for the autodiagram components to communicate wi e device and determine the appropriate template to open ee are Time limit for a diagram subscription to update its timestamp If the subscription is Expire Hme iat 600 seco ds not
385. rface 6 cece eee eee 43 Creating Multiple Copies of a Device 00 0 rrer 45 Configuring Multiple Devices ununun nann nunn cee een eens 48 Editing Duplicated Device Information 6 6 0 c eee e cece eee eee 50 Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Management Console Tools sssssscssssessrresssresees OG Infroduchon 5 1 66 5000s soSased RER ERE EEEE 54 User Manager eae eG alc sais an aia a aN EE a E a arate a E a ro E a O 55 USETE a a a shee athe te a hae E E O hans 56 COUPS e a Ne Paw tie E EEES EERE EAE ENEA Se eee Net 58 License Manager ee cece cece cece eee reece eee 60 Reporting Configuration Manager 2 cece eee e eee ee eees 61 Event Watcher Managers s3ss 0 lt 03s6ea eaee eae de slew wees week es 62 Creating a Template ses sro as Torrean og oF aan SE INE NES ESR eS 63 Adding an Event Watcher 2 0 0 0 0 000 c cece ec cece eee eens 64 Diagnostics Viewer cc cece cee eee ee eee reece eee 66 Starting Diagnostics Viewer nereido tosi H upia cece eee eee 66 Service Diagnostics x wie eae Naw eaa de Steines ak NA ae diel E gia BAAS ee See 67 Communications Diagnostics 0 ccc eee eens 68 Additional Commands 0 0 e cece teen eens 70 Device Upgrader scesa tania data nd E EEEE 71 Using Device Upgrader 6 0 iriak EAEE EE REA E nee 71 Firmware Upgrade Error Codes sasda ror ietan a e cence eects 73 Remote Modem Setup cece cece eee
386. rialNum FAC1 ION Version FAC1 Template FACT OEM ID xl Cancel 2 Use the dropdown lists to navigate to the required register Click OK The scale to be used now appears in the Register Scale field 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Page 293 Register Properties Defined Page 294 PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Register Offset The register offset is used if the register value returned must be offset by a value The scale can be set to any constant decimal value within the range of 3 402823466 E 38 to 3 402823466 E 38 A NOTE If 10 is entered then 10 is subtracted from the received value To add 10 enter 10 Scale Multiplier and Offset applied Modbus value scale ION value offset 1 multiplier OR ION value Modbus value offset multiplier 2 scale If the offset for a specific register can be obtained from the device then you can map the offset value to another register You can only map the offset factor to registers already created in the Modbus Device Importer The mapped register used can be a valid Modbus mapped register or a register with a constant value Mapping the offset to a constant register is a convenient feature you can change the offset for many registers by changing the constant value in one location Mapping the Offset Factor to Another Register 1 Select the Reference another register for Offset check box 2 Use the drop
387. rights reserved Use seasons to create timeframes for presenting data in reports A newly created schedule has a single season called All Year Expand a sub schedule to view its seasons If you only need one season All Year you can skip the steps below and go to configuring special days Page 83 Configuring Seasons Page 84 PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Configuring Seasons Use the Define a Season tab to set up or edit the time spans for each season A NOTE A date can only belong to one season you cannot overlap dates in one season with dates in another 1 From the navigation pane select the sub schedule to which the season belongs 2 In the tab display pane select the Define a Season tab After you add a sub schedule the tab displays only one season All Year that covers the entire year The season is listed at the top of the tab and the calendar that shows the days and months that belong to that season is full To make room to add other seasons you must edit the All Year season 3 Select All Year from the Define a Season tab and click Edit The Edit a Season dialog box appears 4 Inthe Season Name field type the name of one of the seasons you want to define for example Summer 5 Set the Start Date and End Date for the season You can specify fixed start and end dates i e 12 31 or relative start and end dates i e the last Saturday of October Fixed Date Click on the month or
388. ring sorting column selection and pin unpin to customize the Diagnostics Viewer display see Customizing and Navigating Interface Displays on page 22 Pin Unpin button Diagnostics tabs File Help Diagnostics Console Message Connection Status Il Tree States Dynamic Filter field 5 E ION Enterprise Diagnostics Description 3 TECHPUBS M2003 E S Service Diagnostics BC ommunicatio oY INFO TECHPUBS VM2003 Router 03 24 2009 01 54 08 140 PM Net 4 LOGINSERTER TECHPUBS VM2003 INFO TECHPUBS YM2003 Router 03 24 2009 01 54 09 500 PM Spa E Communication Diagnostics INFO TECHPUIBS VM2003 Router 03 24 2009 01 54 20 812 PM Use OON INFO TECHPUBS YM2003 Router 03 24 2009 01 54 25 468 PM U 4G Building2 Electricity E d j Kouter 4 25 se DIAG TECHPUBS V M2003 SiteServer 03 24 2009 01 54 27 125 PM I Expand collapse tree INFO TECHPUBS VM2003 Router 03 24 2009 01 54 27 531 PM Use ar DIAG TECHPUBS VM2003 SiteServer 03 24 2009 01 54 27 562 PM Gateway2 DIAG TECHPUBS YM2003 SiteServer 03 24 2009 01 54 27 593 PM INFO TECHPUBS M2003 Router 03 24 2009 01 54 28 296 PM Use INFO TECHPUBS M2003 Router 03 24 2009 01 54 36 140 PM Use INFO ETHERNET Gateway1 03 25 2009 09 47 26 058 4M Site comm INFO ETHERNET Gateway1 03 25 2009 09 47 27 355 AM Site conne
389. riority Cause Cause Value Effect Effect value Description Any event with a priority greater than 200 Template Conditions Area M Priority I Cause I Cause Value I Effect D Effect Value p x foo Dip Swen Disturbance Start Disturbance 551 DistState OK Cancel Event Watcher Manager comes with default templates that cannot be modified You can create custom templates if the default templates do not provide what you need To define a custom template 1 Click New in the top right corner of the tab A new row appears in the main table for the new template 2 Type a name for the template Type a description for the template if desired 3 Use the Template Conditions section to set the conditions to be watched See Using the Template Conditions Section below 4 Click Apply to save your changes click OK to save your changes and exit Event Watcher Manager or click the Event Watchers tab to set up an event watcher 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Page 63 Adding an Event Watcher PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Using the Template Conditions Section Use this section of the interface to configure the condition the template watches for 1 Add a condition To add a condition from the event log click Select from Event Log The Select Event Log Lines dialog box appears To select an event click on the boxes at the left of the table to se
390. rm To acknowledge all alarms to date click on the ack_time column heading A confirmation box appears asking if you want to acknowledge the selected alarm s 2 Select Yes to acknowledge the alarm s or No to cancel If you acknowledge the alarm but do not have a sufficient access level the alarm remains unacknowledged and the message Insufficient Authorization appears in the status line Page 105 Acknowledging Alarms Page 106 PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Silencing Alarms If you are not ready or able to acknowledge an alarm you can silence it until it can be acknowledged Select Options gt Silence Outstanding Alarms to silence alarms A NOTE Acknowledging an alarm does not change the operating conditions that caused the alarm You must ensure that the cause is corrected to remove the alarm condition 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Controlling System Functions Controlling System Functions 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved You can use control objects to send commands from Vista to a node Each control object in your user diagram is configured to perform a single function When you click a control object it performs the specified function For example you could click a control object to clear an energy accumulator toggle a relay reset a counter or adjust the value of an analog output device The def
391. roup of icons within a single node diagram or into an open grouping window NOTE Moving the icons in a node diagram does not affect the function of the modules or the node in any way Moving Icons 1 Select the icon s you want to move When a grouping icon is selected all icons within its grouping window are automatically selected as well 2 Drag the selected icon s to the new location A NOTE When selecting a group of icons you can only choose icons from within the active window 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Designer Icons Arranging Icons in a Node Diagram You can use the Align and Grid options in the Layout dialog box to adjust the spacing and layout of the module and grouping icons in your node diagram Use the Align option to specify the horizontal and vertical arrangement of the selected icons and the Grid option to activate and configure invisible guidelines A NOTE Arranging the icons in a node diagram does not affect the function of the modules or the node in any way Changing the Order of Layered or Stacked Icons If an icon appears on top of another icon that you want to bring to the front select the icon that is sitting on top then click CTRL K or click Edit gt Send to Back Aligning Icons The Align tab in the Layout dialog box allows you to specify the horizontal and
392. rrors would increase by two while Bad Responses would not change 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Page 69 Additional Commands PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Additional Commands Page 70 The following sections describe additional display options and shortcut menus available in Diagnostics Viewer Diagnostic Details In the tabs on the diagnostics information pane double click a row to display its Diagnostic Details screen This displays the diagnostic information for the selected item only Use the Previous and Next buttons to view the details of other rows in that tab of the diagnostics information pane To copy information to the clipboard select the rows you want to copy then press CTRL C Diagnostics Information Pane Shortcut Menu Options Right click in the diagnostics information pane to display a shortcut menu The following table lists all the commands available though not all displays provide all the commands listed Right click Option Description Update Refreshes the information in the diagnostic table Resets the information in the diagnostic table not available in the etal Communications Server Diagnostics display Copy All Copies all selected information to the clipboard Enabled by default this option is only available in the Console Messages tab of the Communications Server Diagnostics display This option automatically Auto Scroll scrolls an
393. rt selection pane The report is generated and displayed in the report display pane To generate a report from report definition or from a partially defined report 1 Select the report you want to generate from the report selection pane 2 Complete the required inputs see Entering Report Inputs on page 180 3 Click Generate Report The report displays in the report display pane A NOTE Each report icon has a small circle on its lower right corner If the circle is green it is a Defined Report it has all of its inputs completed If the circle is white you need to fill in inputs before you can generate it After you generate a report you can do any of the following Click to subscribe to the report See Creating Report Subscriptions on page 188 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Printing a Report Printing a Report Click the forward and backward arrows I4 4 i of 2 gt Pll to navigate through the pages of report if there are multiple pages Print the report J See Printing a Report on page 185 Export the report as a PDF Excel XML HTML or TIFF file See Exporting a Report on page 186 Click show inputs or hide inputs to show and hide the report inputs Click the Print button The Print dialog box appears Select the printer from the list and configure other options as you require then click OK If the rep
394. rt the Virtual Processor and open it in Designer 2 Drag a Modbus Slave module from the toolbox 3 Leave the inputs of the Modbus Slave module unlinked The Modbus Slave module will not read the Modbus register map if any of its inputs are linked the module provides the linked data to the Modbus register map 4 Configure the Modbus Slave module s setup registers The Modbus Slave module reads the register map starting at the address specified in BaseAddr setup register until each output register is filled Ifthe Format setup register is a 16 bit format 16 bit data is put into each of the ModVal output registers 32 bit format two pieces of 16 bit data are combined into one 32 bit ModVal output register Packed Boolean then the data is put into the ModVal 1 output register in Packed Boolean form Ignore the Scaling InZero InFull and OutZero OutFull setup registers there is no scaling applied to any of the Modbus register map values 5 Link the outputs of the Modbus Slave module to the inputs of other modules in the Virtual Processor Page 249 Common Virtual Processor Applications PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Three examples of modules to link to are Data Recorder modules for data logging Setpoint and Relative Setpoint modules for alarming Distributed Numeric module for redistribution to ION meters for automated plant wide demand or power factor control Common Virtual Processor Appli
395. rvice Start Management Console OF soe oe Ye Click Tools gt System gt Device Upgrader Type your username and password in the log in prompt A dialog box displays with recommendations and warnings regarding the upgrade operation After reading the recommendations and warnings click OK If you need to implement any changes because of the recommendations and warning close Device Upgrader make the changes then re open Device Upgrader and continue The Device Upgrader window appears 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Page 71 Using Device Upgrader PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Device Upgrader Iof x File Help List Devices of Type r Select Revision Uparade 7350 zi Select File _urorede Select Devices to Upgrade 3 ae Cancel File No Revision File Selected See Tolerance Feeder Pere m Upgrade Status 4 gt 1 device selected V Save Restore framework 4 r Failure Handling Halt after 1 comand do Ignore all 6 Select the device type of the device s you want to upgrade from the List Devices of Type box 7 Select the name s of the device s you want to upgrade in the Select Devices to Upgrade box 8 In the Select Revision section click Select File Locate and select the upgrade upg file that you saved in step 2 then click Open 9 Select or clear the Save Restore framework check box selected by default If selected this ke
396. s clear the check box if the device type only supports Single Preset Write Disable 1 check box This is a special feature for ION meters ION meters return a 1 if a specified register is not available and the system interprets that value as a control signal Most devices use the value of 1 as a valid data value so it is recommended that this feature is turned off for all non ION meters Requested update period for any calculated registers setting Enter a number in seconds to specify how often the physical Modbus device is polled to update the registers used for calculations Select the Tools menu on the main toolbar to access the following menu items Add Device Type After you correctly configure and save a device you can add it to the ION_Network database By adding a device to the ION_Network database you can now create new devices of the device type in Management Console Before you can add the device type you must go to the Device Properties and configure the device See View Menu on page 286 Page 287 Tools Menu Page 288 PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide To add the device type click Tools gt Add Device Type After the device type is added a new screen appears that shows the device types currently in the ION_Network database See View Current Device Types Ensure that the device type you added is present and the configuration is correct Update Device Type If you add a dev
397. s a graphical representation of the disturbances and an interactive selection of group events The Power Quality template uses data from all three Power Quality log files that are found on devices with sag swell and transient detection capabilities Sag Swell Log Transient Log Waveform Log Sample Power Quality Report A B E D E E H 1 _ Power Quality Summary Ead From 2007 Feb 01 00 1 3 Power Measurement Ltd To 2007 Mar 01 00 1 a Number of Incidents 3 ea Incident Interval 1200 seconds Interactive Power Quality 1 SEE Incident Interval sec 1200 4 Worst Disturbances 1996 CBEMA ITI This graph displays the worst 11 disturbances recorded 412 m 500 13 F 4 400 48 300 16 8 jira 200 ae 18 E Click on any incident s eral E EN po a timestamp to view its 20 z p o r r details z 0 0001 0 001 0 01 01 pa Duration s 24 4 25 26 Worst Disturbances 27 Incident Meter Time Phase Duration s Magnit 28 Incident 1 Main_Entrance7650v321_SagSwe 2007 Feb 11 14 40 35 707 Sag v3 3 49E 01 is Incident 3 Main_Entrance7650v321_SagSwe 2007 Feb 23 22 45 00 816 Sag va 1 58E 01 30 Incident 2 Main_Entrance 650v321_SagSwe 2007 Feb 13 07 52 08 234 Sa 3 30E 02 31 32 Statistics The Power Quality Summary tab displays a chart that identifies the worst line disturbances and a list of incidents linked to their details An incident is made up of seve
398. s relevant input 3 If necessary delete the link between a register and one of its owners Select the owner from the Owners list and click Unlink See Deleting Links on page 222 for more information on deleting module links 4 When you have finished viewing the register owners click OK Viewing Owners on Other Nodes Displaying a module s register owners is an effective way to locate dependent modules on the selected node but it does not show any dependent modules located on another node If you remove a module with a dependent module on another node the dependent module s inputs are not reset It continues to look for the deleted output register Page 211 Deleting or Cutting an ION Module Page 212 PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide If you are not sure whether a module has dependents on other nodes check with the person who programmed them to ensure you do not disrupt the operation of any modules on that node If you still want to remove the module you may want to directly delete the link on the other node first This ensures that the module is not inadvertently linked to the next module to occupy the location of the deleted module Deleting or Cutting an ION Module After you have determined that you can safely remove an ION module without disrupting other functions there are two ways to remove it delete and discard the module or cut the module to paste it in another location In either case Designer immed
399. s to display the full name of the measurement amp NOTE In some situations if display ION labels is selected the displayed label may not match the label on your meter for example if a custom label was used Instead it displays the known default label for that particular measurement Updated Measurement Column display To change the setting 1 Click View gt Options and ensure Advanced is selected 2 Inthe Measurements section select the show all measurements check box to display all available measurements in the Updated Measurement column To display only the most common measurements clear the show all measurements check box Historical Data If the show connection dialog check box is cleared the ION_Data database is automatically set as the Default Connection for historical data If you want to select a different database select the show connection dialog box With this setting enabled the database connection dialog box is displayed every time you save your changes When the dialog box displays select Custom Connection and specify your database connection details C Default Connection Custom Connection Data source works TATION3MION Database flon_D ata User Id ION Password Cancel Page 319 Downstream Device Assistant Options Page 320 PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Advanced The enable advanced features check box sets the view to Basic View if it is clear
400. s until you have created at least one Page 326 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Creating a Report Creating a Report 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved 1 Start Reporter 2 Select Manage Reports then click New This starts the new report wizard Step 1 Select Template 1 Type the name of the report in the Report Name box 2 Select the template you want to use in the Report Template list 3 Click Next Step 2 Select Database and Sources 1 Specify your database ION_Data is selected by default To connect to a different database e g an archived database select it from the Database dropdown list or click More 2 Select the box beside each source name device that you want to include in your report Select the Show Details box if you want to see additional information for the devices A NOTE Show Details is only available when Show only sources applicable to the template is selected 3 If the report template you are using requires a TOU schedule such as Energy and Demand the TOU Schedule section appears on the dialog box Select a TOU schedule from the list or click Manage to create a new one TOU Schedules A typical TOU schedule has On Peak Off Peak and Shoulder Peak periods The Energy and Demand report template requires a TOU schedule If you do not want to use a TOU schedule simply create a TOU schedule
401. scriptions are emailed From Display Name Type the name that you want to appear in the From field of an emailed report From Email Address Type the email address that you want to appear in the From field of the emailed report Default Overwrite Existing File Setting Select the check box to set the default setting for the Overwrite Existing File check box that appears in the Subscriptions dialog box when you select File share for the subscription Delivery Mode If you select this check box the existing report is overwritten by default If you clear this check box the new report is given a unique filename and the existing report is not overwritten 4 Click OK to save your changes 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Page 61 Event Watcher Manager PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Event Watcher Manager Page 62 The Event Watcher Manager defines events for the On Event selection in report subscriptions See Creating Report Subscriptions on page 188 for more information on report subscriptions The Event Watcher Manager interface consists of two tabs Event Watchers An event watcher links a device or group of devices to the conditions defined in a template Templates A template defines the conditions that make up an event GF tie For instructions on using filtering sorting and column selection to customize the Event Watcher Manager interfa
402. se User Guide Displaying the Global Event Log Viewer The Event Log Viewer displays logged events in a table of columns and rows Each labeled column contains a single category or event description and each numbered row represents a single event record Typically Event Log Viewers display the following information Timestamp This indicates the event s date and time Priority This determines the relative significance of the event Each type of event has a numeric value assigned to it that represents its relative priority level See Alarming Options on page 144 for more information Cause This is the label and value describing the cause of the event For example if the label is Setpoint 1 and the value is Active then the event was caused by setpoint 1 changing to an active state Effect This is the label and value describing the effect of the event For example if label is Relay 1 and the value is Forced On then the effect of the event was to force relay 1 on Ack _time This is the date and time that an alarm was acknowledged Any event with a priority level that exceeds the alarm threshold appears highlighted in red until the alarm is acknowledged When an alarm occurs Vista can notify you in several ways a beeping sound a flashing title bar a message box or a custom sound If you have sufficient security clearance you can acknowledge alarms See Acknowledging Alarms on page
403. separate different module types and groups together modules of the same type Modules group registers into convenient or logical groups Registers are the objects that actually hold the Modbus register information For more information on ION architecture refer to the ION Reference Managers organize the Modbus map file into a formatted structure There are three different types of managers supported in the Modbus Device Importer External Boolean Manager holds Boolean type registers External Numeric Manager holds Numeric type registers External Pulse Manager holds Pulse type registers You can create up to 127 managers After you create a manager you cannot change its manager type Similar to managers modules also help organize the map file structure You can create up to 4095 modules inside a given manager Use modules to arrange registers into logical groupings or similar register types When naming a module choose a name that is relevant to the type of registers it contains Modules inherit the class type of their parent manager so you cannot change a module type after is has been created A register is an object that can be linked to a physical register on a Modbus device where data is read from or written to You can map registers to a Modbus address then use Vista to read and write data to this Modbus device When you create a register it inherits the type of its parent module You can create up to 255 registers per
404. side the Virtual Processor are updated Frequent module updates contribute to the workstation s processor load By increasing the Module Update Period you reduce the number of times a module executes in a given time period Configuration Saver Period 10 to 600 seconds The interval at which the Virtual Processor writes its configuration data to the workstation s hard disk Increasing the Configuration Saver Period significantly reduces the processor load if you have a large Virtual Processor configuration file Client Polling Period 500 to 300000 ms The interval at which the Virtual Processor gets information from other nodes in the network for example another Virtual Processor or a device You can increase the period for less critical Virtual Processor applications and reduce the period for more critical applications Server Polling Period 200 to 1440000 ms The interval at which the Virtual Processor responds to requests for information from client nodes such as Vista or the Log Inserter Reducing this value increases the rate at which these responses are sent however this can also increase network traffic 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Page 79 Time of Use Editor PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Time of Use Editor Page 80 Time of Use TOU schedules created with the Time of Use Editor are designed to be used with Web Reporter When you use
405. soft Excel spreadsheet that contains a list of these devices to add to Management Console you can use the Configure Names area to create duplicates of that device type then use the Table Editing area to copy and paste the device properties from the Excel spreadsheet Example Copy and Paste 20 Ethernet Devices from Excel 1 Make sure the names in the Excel spreadsheet conform to the naming convention Group DeviceName 2 Add the first device and set up its properties in Management Console You can assign it a simple device name such as A B1 since it will be overwritten when the values are copied and pasted from Excel Set the Enabled property to No this makes sure that Management Console does not attempt to connect to the device Click OK to add the device 4 Right click the device and select Duplicate and Configure 5 Select the 1 in the Configure Names box then use the End spin box to set the value to 20 6 Inthe Hide Show Columns area clear the check box of all non editable columns to hide those that contain grayed out values Also hide the columns you do not want to paste over or those that are not included in the Excel spreadsheet 7 On the Excel spreadsheet arrange the columns so they match the order of the columns on the Table Editing area Hide all columns on the Excel spreadsheet except those corresponding to columns on the Table Editing area 8 Select the cells in Excel and copy them CTRL C
406. space available on the disk where the database resides Server Version The type and version of the SQL Server instance that is hosting the database Scheduled Jobs Use the Scheduled Jobs section of the tree to configure scheduled tasks or view information about the scheduled tasks For more information on scheduled tasks see Scheduled Jobs on page 267 Show Archives Select this check box lower left hand corner if you want the Databases list to include all archived databases along with the live databases After Show Archives is selected you have the option to perform any of the tasks available for the live ION databases on your archived databases archive backup restore detach attach and trim depending on the type of database Clear the Show Archives check box to hide the archived databases from view and to prevent the tasks mentioned above being performed on database archives Page 257 Common Database Management Procedures PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Common Database Management Procedures The following sections outline common procedures that you can perform using the manual tasks For more details on individual manual tasks see Manual Tasks on page 260 Detaching then Re attaching Databases The following procedure explains how to detach a connected database and then re attach a new database in its place Detaching and re attaching a database 1 2 Stop all ION Enterprise serv
407. st Fit For all columns right click on the column title area and select Best Fit all columns Arrange Columns To change the order of the columns drag a column header to the left or right of its original position 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Page 23 Grid Table Controls Page 24 PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Group by Column To group data according to the contents of a particular column drag the column header to the area above it marked Drag a column header here to group by that column To expand or collapse the groups click the or button To expand or collapse all groups right click the column header in the group by box and select Full Expand or Full Collapse respectively You can also group by multiple columns in a specific order with sorting and filtering applied Timestamp ha Target Category Computer Description Priority DIAGNOSTIC Source LOGINSERTER TECHPUBS M2003 Source QUERYSER ER TECHPUBS M2003 Source TECHPUBS M2003 SiteServer Source IP TECHPUBS M2003 Priority ERROR Source Power Quality Aggregation Priority INFORMATION Source Real Time Data Service BABE Source Report Subscription Service Source TECHPUBS M2003 Router Source TREEMON TECHPUBS M2003 6 To ungroup drag the column header back to its original position or right click the column hea
408. ster or Slave 1 Select the port you want to reassign and then click Rename Port The Modbus Port Site dialog box appears 2 From the dropdown list select the port you want to reassign to the Modbus master or slave see Adding a Modbus Master Ethernet Site on page 76 or Adding a Communications Port for the Modbus Slave on page 78 Deleting a Modbus Master Site or Slave Port A NOTE Deleting a Modbus Master Site also deletes all devices connected to it 1 Click on the site or port you want to delete and then click Delete Port or Delete Site depending on the item selected 2 Click OK to confirm the deletion 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Modifying the Global Parameters Final Steps After Saving and Exiting When you have finished using Virtual Processor Setup click Save to save your changes then click Exit to close the window In order for the changes to take effect you must stop then restart the ION Virtual Processor Service Modifying the Global Parameters Typically you do not need to change the default Virtual Processor s Global Parameters However the settings in the following table can be modified to try to optimize system performance To view and select the settings expand Global Parameters Global Parameter Value Range Description Notes Module Update Period 50 to 1000 ms The interval at which ION modules in
409. such as the CBEMA ITIC curve Z NOTE You can copy information displayed by Vista Log Viewers to the Windows Clipboard and paste it into other Windows applications Plotting Logged Data 1 Select data from a data log viewer To graph trends for all parameters over a particular time span select a group of rows To graph a trend for a specific parameter using all available records select an entire column To graph multiple parameters over a specific time span select the first cell in the desired range and drag to highlight to the last cell of the range 2 Select Edit gt Plot Selected Data or click El Vista plots the data and displays it in the Log View Plotter window Page 108 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide The Log View Plotter Interface The Log View Plotter Interface The Log View Plotter is a Vista window that graphically displays selected data W Main Keating_7600 User Diagram 7600_fac 4wye_v 1 3 0 pq effect_ion effect_value VI V2 v3 v4 n 12 4 1 551 DistState Normal 2 ATATA A A A A A EA AAT A A AA AA 3 551 DistState Disturbance AAA OA LANV 551 Di Log Yiew Plotter Main Keating_7600 User Diagram 7600_fac 4wye_v 1 3 0 pq 551 Di x Wenlssi1D Plot Display Harmon
410. suring that the list goes from smallest number to largest number Page 295 Shortcut Keys Shortcut Keys General Key Shortcuts PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Keystrokes Action CTRL N Opens a new template after a save prompt CTRL O Opens an existing template after a save prompt CTRL S Quick saves the current template CTRL A Saves the current template in a new location CTRL D Adds the device to the ION Network database CTRL U Updates the device in the ION_Network database CTRL G Adds Network diagram support for the device to the system CTRL P Opens the device properties window F5 Refreshes the ION Map Information pane collapsing all nodes except the currently selected node F6 Collapses all nodes in the tree view F11 Saves the current ION Handle list F12 Views the current device types in the ION_Network database Register Quick Edit Mode Keystrokes Action TAB Cycles through the data fields Enter Saves the changes to the current register and exits edit mode Page Up Saves the changes to the current register and displays the edit mode for the register above the current register Page Down Saves the changes to the current register and displays the edit mode for the register below the current register Escape or Mouse Wheel Click Cancels the changes to the
411. t Detach The Detach Database dialog box appears If necessary select the database that you want to detach Click Clear to clear any existing connections to the database In the Detach options section select whether or not you want to update statistics prior to detach Click OK to detach the database Restart ION Enterprise services A NOTE Do not move the ION_Network or ION_SystemLog databases unless absolutely necessary Export Registry Setting Modify Login 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved This task lets you export settings to a registry reg file This task is useful if you need to set up ION Enterprise clients in a system where the primary ION Enterprise server s database settings server instance name database name or password are customized After you export the settings to the registry reg file you can run that registry file on the client machine 1 Right click on Databases and select Export Registry Setting The Database Registry Key Export dialog box appears Type the path and filename for the file or click the browse button L to specify the location to which you want to save the database registry key The directory ION Enterprise config cfg is the default save location for the exported database registry key Click OK Use this task to change the password for the SQL Server instance used for the ION Enterprise databases 1 2 Stop all ION Enterprise s
412. t and output registers Click the left symbol to display a list of inputs click the right symbol to display a list of output registers See Linking ION Modules on page 217 for more information Module icons with a double border represent core modules module icons with a single border represent standard modules For more information on core and standard modules see Core Modules and Standard Modules on page 208 Page 201 Designer Icons Page 202 PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Grouping Icons and Grouping Windows Grouping icons represent grouping windows Click a grouping icon left to open its associated grouping window right E grouping window Oo x A grouping window acts as a folder or sub window where you can store icons that you want to keep together For example you can use grouping windows to group module icons by application a single grouping window may contain all module icons required for demand or advanced setup routines You can use a grouping window much like a standard window You can create rename or delete a grouping window you can move a grouping window within a diagram and you can move a module into or out of a grouping window When you finish editing the grouping window close it to minimize the window to its corresponding grouping icon in the node diagram Opening a Grouping Window Click on the grouping icon Closing a Grouping Window Click the Close button jx Moving
413. t the Align triggers check box to align the trigger times of all waveforms in the graph When multiple waveforms are plotted their trigger times are not always correlated Select Separate curves vertically to display each curve separately A NOTE See Calculating Harmonics Using More Than One Cycle on page 115 for more information on the System Frequency and of cycles for harmonics options 2 Click OK to save your changes 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide The Log View Plotter Interface Displaying Curve Data in a Table After you plot data in the Log View Plotter you can select a curve and display its data points in a table This option is only available on the Plot Display and Harmonic Analysis tabs 1 Right click on the curve line in the Plot Display or Harmonic Analysis tab and select Data from the pop up menu Harmonics Data Copy Format Y1 Y2 0 0 100 100 0 1129 1 76e 02 0 5747 0 2899 6 371le 02 6 207e 02 0 6614 0 6003 3 488e 02 0 1032 0 508 0 6138 0 1205 1 715e 02 0 3329 0 2469 G7 e f dof 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 I a a Plot Display tab The data points are displayed The X column lists the x axis coordinates and the Y column lists the y axis coordinates The first column assigns a number to each set of points Harmonic Analysis tab A window appears listing each harmonic number and the magnitude of each harmonic fo
414. tab Right click on the axis labels to display the Axis Labels dialog box Select the Format Decimal Scientific or Engineering and determine the Axis Title none or custom text Right click the axis tick marks to display the Vertical or Horizontal Axis dialog box Configure the Range Ticks and Grid style Select Logarithmic scale to enable the logarithmic scale option Other Display Options for Partial Dial Full Dial and Arc Meter Displays To configure meter parameters on partial dial full dial or arc meter displays right click anywhere in the Preview section of the Display tab Set the Range Arc Position Ticks and dial Position For full and partial dial displays set the label position to inside or outside Click Line Attributes to set the style and width of the dial 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Display Options Other Display Options for Scrolling Graphs In the Preview section of the Display tab Right click the vertical or horizontal axis tick marks to bring up the Vertical and Time Axis dialog boxes Set the Range and Ticks and for the vertical axis Grids Style Right click on the vertical axis labels to display the Axis Labels dialog box Select the Format Decimal Scientific or Engineering and determine the Axis Title none or custom text Right click on the graph background to display
415. te Overwriting a persistent module effectively relinks its outputs and rewrites its label but its core functionality remains intact e g the Master Reset module may be relabelled but pulsing this module still initiates a master reset When pasting a default framework onto a meter use lock paste to ensure that all persistent modules in the old default framework are overwritten by the corresponding persistent module in the new default framework Persistent modules are listed in the ION Device Template Reference Copying Modules Designer offers two ways to create copies of modules copy and paste using the ION Enterprise clipboard or copy or paste using a framework A NOTE The ION Enterprise Clipboard is a temporary storage area that holds any information cut or copied from Designer This clipboard should not be confused with the Windows Clipboard When you copy a selection of ION modules you can use Copy Cut or Copy to Framework Copy saves the selection to the clipboard and leaves the original module s intact Cut saves the selection to the clipboard and removes the original module s Copy to framework saves the selection as a file and leaves the original modules intact Additional considerations include pasting with shortcuts modules that cannot be pasted and cloning a node copying and pasting a complete node configuration from one node diagram to another Page 230 2009 Schneider Electric
416. ted that is if they had pending changes the changes are still pending Fast linking ION Modules in the Log Inserter When linking modules in the Log Inserter you can save time by using the Fast Linker utility The Fast Linker automates much of the linking process enabling you to quickly link any combination of event data or waveform recorders To access the Fast Linker options press the CTRL key and click on the Log Inserter inputs For more information on using the Fast Linker utility refer to the description for the Log Acquisition module in the ION Reference Page 229 Copying and Pasting ION Modules PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Copying and Pasting ION Modules You can easily create a new function in a node diagram by copying and pasting modules You can copy and paste a single module a group of modules grouping icons text objects or the entire node You can copy modules from one node and paste them into another as long as the node you are pasting to supports the selected modules and has sufficient resources When pasting modules you can replace existing modules or add new ones You can also copy modules and save them as a framework You and other users can then reuse this framework in other nodes Saving a node s configuration as a framework provides a fast and easy way to program a large number of nodes at once A NOTE Persistent modules cannot be deleted but they can be overwritten during a framework pas
417. ter the ION Log Inserter Service has finished downloading all outstanding logs When this has been completed the status of the site is considered Caught up Setting Up the ION Alert Monitor 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved A NOTE This section is intended for advanced users Contact Technical Support if you need assistance The configuration settings for Alert Monitor are stored in a config file that follows the file naming convention MachineName AlertMonitor config An example config file with this name is provided in the ION Enterprise config AlertMonitor folder An XML schema file named AlertMonitor Schema xml is also provided in the same folder for your reference You can use this schema to validate the config file using available XML validation tools Use a text editor or XML authoring tool to create and edit the configuration file Remember to rename the config file to match the machine name e g if the primary server is named ComputerOne rename the config file to ComputerOne AlertMonitor config Configuration File Components Channels define the communication port and modem that the Alert Monitor uses while Actions define the commands to be carried out in response to an alarm A Channel contains the modem definition and configuration settings for the port Page 309 Setting Up the ION Alert Monitor Page 310 PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide The f
418. terval l Quarterly x Schedule Archives will occur on the first indicated day of the month at the indicated time Day Saturday x Time 12 00 00AM M_Schedule Enabled ___OK Cancel You must select this check box to enable the scheduled archive Data Types A scheduled archive is preconfigured to archive all data types and to trim each of the data types after the archive is complete Clear the Trim after archive check box for a data type if you only want to perform an archive without subsequently deleting that data CAUTION Trimming data permanently removes it from the database Trimming without archiving is not recommended for data records Amount of Live Data This setting determines the number of complete months of live data that you want to keep in the ION_Data database Archive Interval For SQL Server 2005 Express click Select Months then specify the months for which you want the archive to occur For SQL Server 2005 Standard Edition select one of the following options Monthly Bi monthly every 2 months Quarterly Semiannually Annually Every 2 years Every 3 years Every 4 years and Every 5 years A NOTE The Database Manager scheduled jobs use the year and month in the archive file name If you use SQL Server Manager Studio or SQL Server Enterprise Manager to schedule the database archives do not set the archive frequency to more than once a month to prevent failures
419. the COM port used by the Modbus network for example TCP IP port 7802 connects to an EtherGate device s COM2 port 3 Click OK A NOTE Do not use 502 for the TCP IP port Modbus TCP packets use the TCP IP protocol and are sent to this registered port number At this time the Virtual Processor does not support Modbus TCP MBAP Adding a Modbus Master Serial Site 1 Select Master Sites then click Add Site 2 Select Serial Site then set COM Port to the serial port of your computer that you want to assign as your Modbus Master The Virtual Processor s Modbus Import and Modbus Export modules then use this COM port to communicate to the Modbus slave devices 3 Click OK A NOTE The COM port used to define a Master Site must be different from the COM port used for connecting to ION devices Configuring the Modbus Master Site Parameters Select the site and expand the tree until the parameters under Settings are displayed Select the parameter you want to change and then click Modify lt setting gt where lt setting gt is the setting selected Transmit Delay The amount of time the Virtual Processor waits between sending out requests The supported range is from 10 to 60000 milliseconds A NOTE For Ethernet sites specifying too small a value for Transmit Delay may overload the network Receive Timeout The time period the Virtual Processor allows for establishing communications The supported r
420. the Update Historical Database check box when you saved your changes the first time you can update the existing data in the database at a later time through the use of this csv file How to use the Downstream Device Assistant csv file To update the existing data in the database with the source measurement changes contained in the csv file 1 Click Edit gt Historical Data The Update Historical Data window appears 2 Click File gt Import CSV 3 Downstream Device Assistant opens the folder that contains the csv files Select the Downstream Device Definitions file you want to use then click Open 4 Click File gt Update Historical Data 5 The Historical Data Update prompt displays how many source measurement pairs will be updated Click Yes 6 Click Yes at the Historical Data Update prompt 7 After the operation has completed click OK then Close You can update only one ION database at a time To select a different database first make sure the show connection dialog check box is selected under View gt Options You can then use the database connection dialog box to specify which database you want to update A NOTE If you update address definitions that affect multiple historical databases only the first historical database you select is automatically updated To update the remaining historical databases you must import the address definitions to each one using Select Edit gt Update Historical Data A
421. their access level Closing a User Diagram To close a user diagram Select File gt Close to close the current diagram Select File gt Close All to close all diagrams Navigating a User Diagram After you open a user diagram you can use it to interact with your power monitoring system Each user diagram displays system information through diagram objects which you can use to monitor and control various aspects of your system Page 95 Monitoring Your System in Vista PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Monitoring Your System in Vista Use Vista user diagrams to display real time and logged data monitor events and alarms and control a variety of system functions How Data is Displayed Information in your user diagram is displayed using diagram objects Each diagram object communicates a single piece of information from somewhere in your power monitoring network for example a single numeric object displays numeric data from a single source There are seven types of diagram objects grouping text numeric status data log viewer event log viewer and control Each type of object performs a specific type of function In most cases you can identify an object s function by a caption a label or both the text object does not use a caption or a label By default the caption is usually located below the diagram object and identifies the node to which the diagram object is connected The caption can be modif
422. tions Columns in Both Basic and Advanced View Column Name Description IsDownstream The IsDownstream column identifies which devices in the Assigned Source column are downstream devices If ISDownstream is selected it means that the device identified in the Assigned Source column is downstream to a physical device whose name is indicated in the Physical Source column If lsDownstream is cleared this indicates that the device is a physical source Note also that a physical source has the same Assigned Source name and Physical Source name by default Assigned Source This is the default name that Log Inserter assigned to a downstream or physical device For example Modbus 109 MainFeed PM7650 is the default name assigned for the downstream Modbus device with unit ID 109 whose measurements are being logged to a data recorder on a Modbus Master device named PM7650 that is part of the MainFeed site group Updated Assigned Source This text field allows you change the current name under Assigned Source In Basic view all rows that contain the same Assigned Source name are automatically updated to the new name when you enter it in the Updated Assigned Source column In Advanced view you can select one or more rows and rename the source using the Updated Assigned Source column while leaving the other rows unchanged See Renaming the Assigned Source on page 321 for more details Physi
423. to turn on or off Set the DIP switches on the modem as instructed The modem is now ready to be used at the remote power monitoring site Page 74 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Virtual Processor Setup Virtual Processor Setup The Virtual Processor VIP is the ION Enterprise service ION Virtual Processor Service that provides coordinated data collection and aggregation control and mathematical analysis of power monitoring system data from groups of metering or similar intelligent devices Use Virtual Processor Setup to configure a Virtual Processor Modbus Service for defining sites and devices in a Modbus network and to set up the communications port for it Virtual Processor Setup can also be used to improve the performance of the ION Virtual Processor Service by modifying its global operating parameters See Virtual Processor Service on page 244 for application examples using the Virtual Processor Configuring the Virtual Processor s Modbus Service 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved A NOTE This information is provided for the benefit of customers who have legacy implementations of Modbus communications using the Virtual Processor Users that are setting up new Modbus communications should refer to Modbus Device Importer on page 277 Modbus support in the Virtual Processor will be removed in a future version of ION Enterprise Wh
424. tors for these flags do not change in WebReach Contact Technical Support if you need to change the default WebReach flag colors Page 167 Advanced WebReach Configuration PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Advanced WebReach Configuration This section covers customization and advanced configuration information for WebReach and is intended for advanced users only Z CAUTION If you use Registry Editor incorrectly you can cause serious problems that may require you to reinstall your operating system Custom Network Diagram Setup This section describes how to change the default home page that WebReach displays If you have a custom network diagram on the primary server that you want to use instead of the automatically generated network diagram 1 Start Windows Registry Editor and navigate to HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SOFTWARE Schneider Electric ION Enterprise 6 0 WebReach 2 Right click to add a new string value and name it NetworkDiagram 3 Right click NetworkDiagram select Modify then type the path and name of your custom network diagram in the Value data field 4 Click OK For more information refer to the NetworkDiagram item in the table under the section WebReach Registry Settings on page 169 If there is no NetworkDiagram entry in the registry then the default value x pml diagrams ud network dgm is used The Network Diagram navigation button located on the date range page and the
425. tries that contain the old Assigned Source name or Measurement will be updated with the new name or measurement If you want to leave the existing data in the database unchanged clear the Update Historical Database check box before saving the changes Manual see Caution below By default Log Inserter automatically associates the proper measurement to the appropriate piece of data in the data log Normally the Manual check box should remain cleared However if you want to specifically change the measurement or register handle associated with a particular address definition select the Manual check box for that measurement This manually overrides Log Inserter so that it uses this new address mapping from now on i e Log Inserter does not attempt to resolve that address ever again Page 316 1 Do not change the value of IsDownstream when making changes to source measurement definitions as it is automatically set by the Downstream Device Assistant 2 Do not use the Physical Source column to modify the existing name of a valid physical device as Log Inserter uses this name to perform proper data logging 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Basic View versus Advanced View A NOTE It is not recommended that you select the Manual check box This reserves the ION register for which Manual is checked for t
426. tructions in your modem s documentation to set up and connect the modem to one of your computer s serial ports Select a port that the ION Enterprise Communications Server is not using Using Remote Modem Setup 1 Start Management Console 2 Click Tools gt System gt Remote Modem Setup The Remote Modem Setup dialog box appears 3 Set the Port to the serial communications port that the computer uses to communicate with and set up the modem Set the Baud Rate to match the modem s baud rate A NOTE To reduce possible communication issues set the computer modems and meters to the same baud rate 4 Set the following properties for the remote modem Select the type of modem from the Type box Set the Site Baud Rate To set the modem to answer after a specified number of rings select Auto Answer then type the appropriate number in the Number of Rings box To save the modem configuration data in the modem s onboard memory select Store Profile This feature allows the modem to revert to the saved settings after a power failure Clear Store Profile to disable this feature To turn on the modem s internal speaker select Speaker On then select a setting from the Volume list Clear Speaker On to disable this feature 5 Click Send to save the settings to the modem If there are DIP switch settings required for the modem that is being configured a message displays with instructions on which switches
427. ts You can move a single diagram object or a group of diagram objects within a single window or from one window to another 1 Select the object s you want to move 2 Drag the selected object s to the new location You can also use the arrow keys on the keyboard to move the selected diagram object s one space at a time When diagram objects overlap use the Send to Back command to place one object beneath the others Select the object then select Edit gt Send to Back or press CTRL K Resizing a Single Diagram Object You can adjust the size of a diagram object to make it larger or smaller or you can stretch it horizontally or vertically to change its shape 1 Click on the diagram object to select it 2 Do one of the following To make the object larger or smaller drag a corner handle To stretch the object horizontally or vertically drag a middle handle Resizing a Diagram Object s to a Standard Size The Size tab in the Layout dialog box lets you automatically resize a diagram object or group of diagram objects to a set of standard dimensions 1 Select the diagram objects you want to resize 2 Select Edit gt Layout or click The Layout dialog box appears 3 Select the Size tab Page 131 Adjusting Diagram Object Layout and Size Page 132 PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide 4 Edit the horizontal and vertical dimensions of the object s as required Select No change to make no changes to that
428. ts in Vista use the above priority mapping as a guide to set the Cutoff setup register to a lower value using Designer System Log Filter Setup The System Log Filter Setup dialog box lets you change the date and time filter applied to the System Events Log display 1 Click Modify to display the System Log Filter Setup dialog box 2 Select the time range by which you want to filter from the dropdown list To set up acustom filter select Custom Date Range then use the dropdown lists and arrows in the Select a Date Range dialog box to specify the start and end of the range 3 Click OK 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Setting Up Large Systems Setting Up Large Systems To perform batch network setup of devices create the first device in Management Console see Adding Network Components on page 33 using a logical naming scheme After you create this first device you can then use it to create multiple duplicate devices and configure their properties The Duplicate and Configure Interface Duplicate Ethernet Device and Configure _ Oy x a Use the Editors below to configure devices visible in the grid Filter the grid to configure a subset of the devices displayed Help Configure Names Configure TCP IP Addresse Configu fecr_lewtita ccrao fiero 0 Scroll left me me EA e A T e bcc a Start amp End spin box Exceptions lt none gt
429. ts inputs 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Page 221 Deleting Links PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Deleting Links If you want to disassemble a group of linked modules and use them for another function you can delete the links between the modules rather than deleting the modules Designer provides several ways to delete links Fixed Links Most links between standard modules can be deleted However some links between core modules are fixed and cannot be deleted These fixed links include Data Acquisition module and all Power Meter modules Data Acquisition module and all FFT modules FFT module and all Harmonics Analyzer modules FFT module and all Symmetrical Components modules If you attempt to delete a fixed link Designer informs you that the link cannot be deleted Deleting Visible Links If the linked modules are in the same window simply click on the link line and press the Delete key This is the easiest method as long as you know which output register and input are involved For example in the image below the easiest way to delete the link is to click on the line joining the Power Meter and the Sliding Window Demand module its color reverses to indicate it is selected and press Delete Power Meter kW swd a SSSSSSSSS If there are multiple lines between the same modules and you only want to delete one of the links you may want to use the method described in Del
430. tween parameters using color Each parameter is listed in the graph legend accompanied by a sample of its associated curve The color of a curve can be changed after you have plotted data in the Log View Plotter If color is not enough to distinguish one curve from another for example if you plan to print the graph on a black and white printer you can change the curve style after you have plotted data in the Log View Plotter By default Each curve is shown by a thin line that connects each point of data You can customize the style of each curve independently and show or hide the coordinates of each data point Harmonics are displayed in a bar graph You can distinguish between parameters by customizing the display style of each parameter Display options include bar type hatching width and color Use the following instructions to customize curve styles bar styles and curve colors Changing the Style of a Curve on the Plot Display Tab 1 Right click on the graph background to display the pop up menu Highlight the curve from the menu to reveal the sub menu You can also right click on the parameter curve in the diagram or its entry in the legend to access the sub menu directly 2 Select Curve Properties from the sub menu The Curve Style dialog box appears Select the type of curve you want from the Type list Vista offers seven curve types a simple line a line with symbols a scatter plot of markers horizontal
431. twork for new sources of common or typical measurements to be exposed to the OPC Server This is only available with the optional OPC Server license PQDIF Exporter This component lets you export data to Power Quality Data Interchange Format PQDIF and set scheduled exports with notification This is only available with the optional PQDIF Exporter license Programming Applications 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved These ION Enterprise applications help you customize elements in your system and configure third party devices so the system can recognize and utilize them Designer Use the Designer component of ION Enterprise to perform a wide range of functions from configuring setup registers of ION devices on your network to creating complex frameworks using a combination of ION modules from hardware or software nodes Modbus Device Importer Use the Modbus Device Importer component of ION Enterprise to integrate third party Modbus devices into your ION Enterprise network Large System Setup Using Management Console Use the Duplicate and Configure dialog box to set up large systems efficiently See Setting Up Large Systems on page 43 for more information Page 15 ION Enterprise Services PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide ION Enterprise Services Many of ION Enterprise s core components run as Windows Services This allows your servers to continue monitoring your power management syst
432. u or a dialog box appears with configuration options Unless otherwise noted the options you specify for the Log View Plotter window are saved and restored every time you plot data from the original data log viewer If you plot data from a different data log viewer its graph has its own optional settings Customizing an Axis After you have plotted data in the Log View Plotter use the following instructions customize the axis or gridlines change an axis label s format or add an axis title or change the font or color used on all axes You can also change the scale of an axis Configuring an Axis 1 Right click on the graph background to display the pop up menu Highlight the axis from the menu to reveal the sub menu You can also right click on the axis to access the sub menu directly 2 Select Axis Properties from the sub menu A dialog box appears Vertical Axis Cancel J Line uu PU a eee Major every fi oo Sub divided by fa me MV Major Style I Minor Range Make changes in the From and To boxes to adjust the axis range Ticks Make changes in the Major every and Sub divided by boxes to adjust the frequency of major and minor ticks respectively Grid Select or clear the Major and Minor check boxes to turn graph gridlines on or off Click the Style buttons to change to the line style or width of major and minor gridlines Logarithmic scale Select this check bo
433. u want from the Modules box Double click on the Query Register that you want from the Output Registers box 4 Click OK on the Create Link dialog box to save your changes The name of the selected ION Query Service is displayed as the Group Name on the Query Server tab of the Configuration dialog box 5 Click OK on the Configuration dialog box to accept your new configuration After you have linked a diagram object to a log server you need to define a query to specify the type s of logged data that you want the object to display See Querying the Database on page 148 for more information A NOTE If the Query Server has multiple Query modules that are accessing multiple databases you need to select the Query module that is connected to the database that contains the data of interest Page 147 Querying the Database PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Querying the Database The Data Log Viewer the Event Log Viewer and the Global Event Log Viewer query the database extract logged data and display that data in Vista A query is a set of instructions that the log viewer uses to request particular data from the database Each log viewer has its own individual query Editing this query information changes what data the query retrieves and the way a log viewer displays that data Right click on the data or event log viewer object and select the Query tab to view the query options or access the Query Wizard Use the
434. uccessfully Page 189 Creating Report Subscriptions Page 190 PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide The following is a list of possible warnings their cause and solutions Warning Cause Solution The SQL Server Agent ION On the Primary Server click Start gt Settings gt SQL Agent service service is not running Control Panel Select Administrative Tools not started Subscriptions cannot be then select Services Right click the SQL Server delivered Agent ION service and select Start Report Subscription Service not started The ION Report Subscription Service is not running Subscriptions cannot be delivered On the Primary Server click Start gt Settings gt Control Panel select Administrative Tools then select Services Right click the ION Report Subscription Service and select Start From e mail address incorrectly configured The e mail from address is either not set or has the wrong configuration On the Primary Server open the Reporting Configuration dialog box in Management Console Tools gt Reporting Configuration Enter a valid email address For example myemail mycompany com Path syntax invalid The file share pathname entered is not correct Enter a valid UNC Universal Naming Convention pathname 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Installing a Report Definition or a Report Pack
435. uide 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Advanced TOU Schedule Configuration Click OK to return to the TOU Program Editor Click the Summary tab in the TOU Program Editor This compiles the schedule to include the setup register overrides you just defined The Device Setup Register Values section of the summary displays the register values that will be sent to the meter and includes the configured values The TOU Program Log Output section of the summary displays the log generated while the TOU schedule is compiled Any setup register overrides that are defined appear as entries in this log file Page 243 Virtual Processor Service PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Virtual Processor Service The Virtual Processor is a service that operates on the ION Enterprise server providing coordinated data collection data processing and control functions for groups of meters This makes distributed operations possible providing customized solutions to a variety of industrial commercial and power utility needs The Virtual Processor lets you to gather the information available from your network of power monitoring devices and enables you to categorize manipulate and or customize the data before distributing the information to the different departments in your company You could think of the Virtual Processor as a virtual device capable of collecting and processing data from several power monitoring devices analyzing the
436. umber in the Width in pixels field to change the line thickness Background Color lets you set the background color of an object Select Transparent to use the background color of the parent window or select Custom and click Color to select another color 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Page 143 Annunciation Options PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Annunciation Options Alarming Options Page 144 To view the annunciation options right click on the status object then select the Annunciation tab Use the Annunciation tab to specify how users are notified of a change of status The Annunciation tab is available on the Status Object only A NOTE The Annunciation feature requires that the Status Object s diagram is displayed if the display is closed or minimized then the annunciation feature does not work To view the annunciation options right click on the status object then select the Annunciation tab The Annunciation tab has three options that set the action that Vista performs when a status object becomes active Select Command line to automatically launch another application in the event of a change in status Type the program s executable exe command into the field provided or click Browse to locate the appropriate file Select Message box to specify an annunciation message Type your message into the field provided The first line of text appears as the title of the message bo
437. ur changes The Create Link dialog box disappears and the new link information is displayed along the lower edge of the Configuration dialog box 7 Click OK on the Configuration dialog box to save your new configuration Linking a Data Log Viewer or Event Log Viewer The Event Log Viewer and Data Log Viewer display logged data After you have placed an Event Log Viewer or Data Log Viewer object into a user diagram you need to link it to the ION Query Service Linking a Diagram Object to the ION Query Service 1 Right click on the Event or Data Log Viewer object you want to link 2 Select the Query Server tab in the Configuration dialog box The Query Server tab has two options Select Inherit from parent window to have the selected diagram object default to the same Query Server used by the parent window the window in which the object resides If you select this option click OK to exit skip the following steps and continue with Querying the Database on page 148 Select Custom Query Server and click Edit Link to display a dialog box where you can select a new Query Server link 3 Select Custom Query Server and click Edit Link The Create Link dialog box appears Use this dialog box to specify the Query Server Query Manager Query module and Query register Double click on the Query Server that you want from the Nodes box Double click Query Modules from the Managers box Double click on the Query module that yo
438. ut the communications server is arranged in these tabs Console Messages lists all ION Network Router Service and ION Site Service console messages for the current session QF Tip The blank area below the Description column header is a dynamic filter field Type the wildcard character in front of the text you want to search for example warning The diagnostics information pane automatically displays only those records that match the text you typed in the box Connection Status displays the current status of ION Enterprise software components connected to Network Router Tree States displays the ION tree status of all nodes hardware devices and software nodes Log Inserter Diagnostics The Log Inserter diagnostics information pane is split into two sections The top section Select Nodes pane contains the available nodes while the bottom section contains the node details Select Nodes to Display In the Select Nodes pane select the check box beside a node to display its diagnostics information Clear the check box to hide that node s diagnostics information QF Tip If there are many nodes and you want to display only a few of them right click the Select Nodes area then select Clear All Select only the nodes you want to display To display all the nodes again right click the Select Nodes area and select Select All 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Page 67 Communications Diagnosti
439. vent data and waveform logs Although identical in many ways to Vista WebReach has certain differences and limitations AVI objects are not supported they appear as grey boxes on screen The diagram displayed by WebReach are read only control objects such as On Off and Trigger switches are disabled The time displayed by WebReach is the local time at the web server not at the client computer A NOTE To ensure the correct local time is displayed in WebReach ensure that the following are configured correctly on the meter TZ Offset DST Start DST End and DST Offset WebReach Installation After ION Enterprise is Installed WebReach is automatically installed and enabled if IIS Internet Information Services is detected during the ION Enterprise primary server installation To install WebReach after ION Enterprise has already been installed on the primary server 1 Install the IS Windows component consult Windows help for more information 2 Open Windows Control Panel and double click Add or Remove Programs 3 Select Change or Remove Programs Select ION Enterprise then click Change The InstallShield Wizard starts 4 Select Modify then click Next 5 Follow the installer directions to install WebReach Page 162 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Preliminary Setup Preliminary Setup Before you can see the WebReach pages a network diagram
440. vices for instructions on configuring other properties for multiple devices 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Page 47 Configuring Multiple Devices PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Configuring Multiple Devices After you have duplicated the devices you can select and configure any or all of them 1 If you have closed the Duplicate and Configure interface select the devices you want to configure from the Devices display window in Management Console Right click and select Configure Selected Devices this option is only available if multiple devices are selected The Configure Selected Devices interface appears This interface has the same layout and controls as the Duplicate and Configure interface see The Duplicate and Configure Interface on page 43 for information A NOTE Devices affected by a configuration change that has not been saved are identified by an asterisk in the first column of the Table Editing area 2 Scroll to the right in the Duplicate and Configure area to view the Configure TCP IP Addresses Unit IDs Ports and Sites sections of the interface depending on the type of device being configured Configure these parameters as described in Configuring Addresses Ports Unit IDs and Sites on page 49 then click Configure at the bottom of the applicable interface section A NOTE Configuration changes only affect the devices that are currently displayed in the Table Edit
441. vices and DDE compatible ice ee Disabl ION DDE Service applications such as Microsoft Excel sapled ION Event Watcher Service Monitors system events for conditions specified in Event Watcher Manager see Event Automatic Watcher Manager on page 62 ION Log Inserter Service Provides historical data collection and storage for your power monitoring system See Log Automate Inserter on page 274 Routes all information between ION Enterprise software components such as client i i ically detects ch to the network ION Network Router Service workstations and the Log Inserter The service dynamica y detects c anges to the networ Automate configuration including the addition of new servers it can also recognize new software nodes such as Vista that are added to an existing server ION OPC Data Access Server Manages and is responsible for supplying OPC data to client applications Manual ON Power Quality Periodically processes and aggregates new Power Quality event data Automatic Aggregation Service i F file f t hedul ION PQDIF Exporter Service Translates data from ION Enterprise databases to PQDIF file format and manages scheduled Manual PQDIF exports i istori i itori tem Linki Data L ION Query Service Provides historical data retrieval for your power monitoring system See inking a Data Log Automate Viewer or Event Log Viewer on page 147 for more information regarding this service I
442. virtual devices For more information on downstream devices and naming conventions see Downstream Device Assistant on page 313 Saving and Exiting 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved To exit the Configure Logging and Calculation screen Click OK to save your settings Click Cancel to exit without saving You are returned to the main Modbus Device Importer console screen 1 Click File gt Save to save the template files 2 Click Tools gt Update Device Type to send the template file changes to the ION_Network database Page 305 Saving and Exiting PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Page 306 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Chapter 10 ION Alert Monitor The ION Alert Monitor receives and processes alarm notifications coming from modem connected meters on remote power monitoring locations In This Section ION Alert Monitor on page 308 How It Works on page 308 Setting Up the ION Alert Monitor on page 309 Starting the ION Alert Monitor on page 312 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Page 307 ION Alert Monitor PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide ION Alert Monitor ION Alert Monitor is a Windows service ION Alert Monitor that replaced the Alarm Server program that was available in ION Enterprise 5 5 and earlier the legacy alarmsrv exe program is still functional and available in the system bin fo
443. wer the column specified for the X parameter is colored blue for easy identification Page 149 Using the Query Wizard PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Using the Query Wizard The Query Wizard helps you edit an existing query or create a new query for a Data Log Viewer Event Log Viewer or Global Event Log Viewer 1 Right click on the log viewer that you want to configure 2 Select the Query tab in the Configuration box 3 Click Edit Query The Query Wizard appears The Query Wizard consists of four steps designed to guide you through the process of editing a query These steps are described in more detail in the following sections Selecting the node s to query Specifying logs within the specified node s Specifying columns and specifying filters Choosing a sort order Depending on the type of query new or existing you may not need to perform all four steps When you start the Query Wizard it automatically opens on the appropriate step in the process 4 Use the four buttons at the bottom of the Query Wizard to move through or exit the Query Wizard Use the Back and Next buttons to navigate through the dialog boxes Click Cancel to quit the Query Wizard and discard your changes Click Finish to quit the Query Wizard and save your changes 5 When finished click OK to save your changes and close the viewer configuration box The following example describes each step in the process of creating
444. x Select Invert active state to change the way the status object reacts to an active state When this option is selected the status object treats an active state as inactive and vice versa This is useful for example in cases when you want to be notified if a function such as a cooling fan switches off A NOTE If you select the Invert active state check box this also inverts the default colors of the status object Every type of event that occurs in an ION Enterprise network has a prioritized value that identifies its relative significance on a scale of zero to 255 By default Vista identifies any event with a priority of 128 or greater as an alarm To view the Alarming options right click on the Event or Global Event Log Viewer then select the Alarming tab Use the Alarming tab to create or delete a priority range specify the security level required to acknowledge an alarm or customize the way Vista annunciates an alarm 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved Alarming Options The Alarming tab has three main sections Priority ranges lists the currently configured alarm ranges When you select a range in the Priority ranges section for example Range 192 255 the other sections Level to Acknowledge and Annunciation display the current settings for that range You can proceed to modify any of these settin
445. x to enable the logarithmic scale option Line Click this button to display the Line Parameters dialog box and change the line style or the width of the axis 3 Click OK to save your changes Page 121 Customizing the Log View Plotter Display Page 122 PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide A NOTE The axis range and the frequency of the major ticks are not stored in the diagram but are recalculated for every new plot Changing the Color of an Axis or the Gridlines 1 Right click on the graph background to display the pop up menu Highlight the axis from the menu to reveal the sub menu You can also right click on the axis to access the sub menu directly Select Axis Color Major Grid Color or Minor Grid Color from the sub menu The Color dialog box appears Select the color you want or click Define Custom Colors for more options Click OK to save your changes The axis or the major or minor gridlines change to the color you selected Changing the Format of the Axis Labels or Adding an Axis Title 1 Right click on the graph background to display the pop up menu Highlight the axis from the menu to reveal the sub menu You can also right click on the axis labels to access the sub menu directly Select Axis Labels from the sub menu The Axis Labels dialog box appears Select the format in which you want the axis labels to appear Decimal is used by default for example 01 02 03 but if the labels ar
446. xed Date Type a start and end date in the date boxes or click the arrows beside the dates to display a pop up calendar and select a date Type a time in the time boxes or click the up and down arrows beside the time to adjust the hours or minutes up or down Select whether you want to view timestamps in either Server Local Time or UTC Universal Coordinated Time Sampling Period Select the sampling period to use for the IEC61000 4 30 report 2 hour 10 minute or 3 second Shifts Use the buttons to add additional shifts For each shift enter a name and set the start and end time for the shift To configure a shift that spans midnight add two shifts and give them the same name For example to set up a day shift and a night shift add three shifts Day from 8 00 AM to 8 00 PM Night from 8 00 PM to 12 00 AM and Night from 12 00 AM to 8 00 AM Signaling Voltage 1 2 and 3 Eval Limit Type the maximum percentage of intervals in an observation period in which the mean value of the signaling voltage can exceed the curve defined in the EN50160 standard before that mains signaling voltage is considered non compliant Show EN50160 Configuration Parameters Select whether or not to show the configuration inputs entered in the Configure Evaluation Limits dialog box in the report Source s Use this input to select the devices you want to include in the report Click Select Sources to display the Source Selector dialog box From
447. y Mode and Edit Mode There are two display modes in Vista which affect how you navigate a user diagram Whether or not the toolbox is shown indicates the mode you are in if the toolbox is open you are in edit mode if it is closed you are in display mode Display mode allows you to monitor your system view system data and control some aspects of your system In Display mode single click objects to view the information they contain or perform their associated action Edit mode allows you to configure the appearance and function of user diagrams and diagram objects In Edit mode double click objects to view the information they contain or perform their associated action Right click on objects to view configuration options See Creating and Customizing a User Diagram on page 127 and Customizing a Diagram Object on page 133 for more information When instructed to click a diagram object either single click or double click depending on the mode you are in 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Vista User Diagrams Vista User Diagrams This section explains how to use Vista user diagrams to view real time and logged data from your power monitoring system The information that you obtain from your ION Enterprise network is represented graphically in a user diagram What is a User Diagram A user diagram is a configurable display that consists of two main elements Di
448. y default The Display tab has three options Default image Custom image and None Select Default image to display the button icon Select Custom image and click Browse to select a different image Select None to show no image the control object is hidden but still functions External Boolean A control object that is linked to an External Boolean module appears as a switch icon by default The Display tab has two options Default image or Custom images Select Default image to display the switch icon Select Custom images then click Browse to define custom images for ON OFF and Unconnected To hide the control object for a given state leave the appropriate box blank Currently the custom image option supports the following graphic file formats BMP WMF Windows Metafile EMF and AVI without audio and uncompressed or compressed using RLE8 compression NOTE Vista no longer uses the 6 frame bitmap format for Boolean custom images However if you are a user of an earlier version of Vista and have upgraded your existing graphics still work If the 6 frame bitmap check box is selected you can use the same file for all three states Vista uses the first frame to display the UNCONNECTED state the second frame for the OFF state and the last frame for the ON state If no file name is provided in the entry box of a state nothing is displayed when the status object is in that state Page 141 Action Options Actio
449. y physical sources 318 options 318 rename assigned source 321 update historical data after changes 323 duplicating a device 45 Ethernet device 32 add 35 Ethernet gateway add device 34 event log viewer 100 102 diagram object 129 display 103 link to data source 147 event watcher 62 add event watcher 64 create template 63 exit a component 19 G global event log viewer 100 102 add 104 display 103 grouping object Vista 93 128 display options 140 grouping window Vista 93 groups of users add edit 58 H harmonics analysis 115 calculate using more than one cycle 115 ION module 207 281 configure 224 core versus standard module 208 online versus offline module 207 output register 207 parent module 227 persistent module 208 programmed versus pending 208 setup register 207 view as text 213 ION tree 220 278 L large system setup 43 log inserter fast link option 229 log into a component 19 log off from a component 19 log view plotter 108 add data from another application 120 add data from data log viewer 119 add events 119 calculations window 110 customize 121 de index parameters 114 display curve data in table 111 graph options 110 harmonics analysis tab 115 legend 109 overlay curves 125 phasor diagram tab 116 plot display tab 112 remove parameters 125 specify y offsets 114 symmetrical components 117 X parameter 149 M management applications 14 Management Console customize the d
450. y tab The total harmonic distortion THD K factor and Crest factor values for this waveform are displayed in the Calculations window To view the calculations for another parameter click on it in the graph or on its curve sample in the legend The Calculations window updates automatically The currently selected parameter is indicated above the calculations Calculating Harmonics Using More Than One Cycle By default the harmonics are calculated using one cycle You can increase the number of cycles by any power of two cycles i e 2 4 8 16 32 or 64 up to the maximum number of cycles available for the waveform 1 Right click on the background of the graph area then select Graph Options The Graph Options dialog box appears 2 Select the number of cycles over which harmonics calculations are to be performed from the of cycles for harmonics list 3 Select the appropriate frequency in the System Frequency box if the waveform you are analyzing came from a system with a frequency other than 50Hz or 60Hz For example if the waveform was captured from a 400 Hz system using a 3710 ACM specify 400Hz in this box Page 115 Viewing the Phasor Diagram Tab PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide A NOTE The Harmonics Analysis tab is only available for waveform records Vista does not perform a harmonics analysis for trend data or for waveforms with less than eight samples per cycle You cannot displ
451. yle size and color for the numeric object This section has two options Select Inherit from parent window to use the default style Select Custom to specify a custom style then click Font to display the Font dialog box and make your changes Setting Flags Use the Flags button to display the Normal Operating Range dialog box Use this dialog box to set a Low Limit and a High Limit and define a normal operating range to be displayed on the numeric object After flags have been set you can use them to quickly determine whether a reading is within the normal range you defined The effect of setting these limits depends on the display style you have specified For example on the Partial Dial Full Dial and Arc Meter displays flags appear as colored ranges on the dial On other types of numeric objects the flag function changes the object s background color whenever a limit is exceeded By default Low Flag color is blue and High Flag color is red however you can specify any colors you want Select Options gt Flag Colors to display a dialog box where you can edit these options A NOTE The flags used in Vista are not linked to setpoints in ION meters Setpoint activity is automatically logged by the Log Inserter Setpoint status can be monitored using a status object and or data log viewer Other Display Options for Vertical or Horizontal Bar Graphs In the Preview section of a vertical or horizontal bar graph Display
452. you have created a tariff schedule you can manage these files using the TOU Program Manager Creating a Time of Use Schedule 1 In Designer select Options gt Edit TOU Programs 2 Click Make a New TOU Program A New Program appears in the left window of the display Click on this to rename it Click Edit Launch Program Editor 4 Follow the instructions on screen and click Finish when you are done and Close Downloading a Time of Use Schedule into an ION meter 1 Start Designer and connect to your meter 2 From the Factory Configuration screen root window of the node diagram right click the Sample TOU module under Time Of Use Setup The ION Module Setup dialog box appears 3 Click the Quick TOU button 4 Select the TOU schedule you want and click OK Advanced TOU Schedule Configuration The TOU program editor provides an advanced mode that lets you make configurations supported by the meter but that are not provided in the TOU Editor described above The advanced TOU is useful in the following cases When TOU seasons do not use a fixed start or end date that is the same in every calendar year Alternate days defined as a specific date and are not a particular day of the week Accessing Advanced TOU Mode 1 In Designer select Options gt Edit TOU Programs Select a TOU Program or create a new one and click Edit Launch Program Editor 2 Hold the CTRL key and right click on the text in the Seasons s
453. you want to view events for See System Log Events on page 41 for more information 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved PowerLogic ION Enterprise User Guide Setting Up Your Network in Management Console Setting Up Your Network in Management Console Adding a Server 2009 Schneider Electric All rights reserved The Primary Server contains all the ION Enterprise programs and it controls the overall operation of your energy management system The primary server is displayed on the Server screen when you first start Management Console To start building your system add and configure your sites and devices Adding Network Components For details on adding various components see the following sections Follow the procedure below to add a new network component 1 Inthe System Setup pane select the icon for the type of item that you want to add i e Site Device or Dial Out Modem 2 Right click in the display window select New and then select the specific type of network component from the shortcut menu The options differ depending on which system setup icon you selected The Configuration dialog box appears 3 Use the fields and drop down menus to configure properties Mandatory items are highlighted in red To configure advanced properties right click in the dialog box and select Advanced Properties For more shortcut menu options see Configuration Dialog Box Shortcut Menus below 4

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

HP EliteBook 820 G1/CT Notebook PC（PDF形式、1850kバイト）  Epson EB-S6 with 3-year Lamp Warranty  MANUAL TÉCNICO  CutList Bridge User`s Guide  MC1000/12 Philips Micro music system  FA570RF Installation Manual  CompacOnline User Guide - Generic  HP ProBook 4545s    HP Mini 5101 Notebook PC  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file